Home

1 Press

1. 91 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 Preparations 2 1 2 Panel Cutout Unit mm e E5CC Individual Mounting Group Mounting 1 0 y 4555 48 x number of Units 2 5 o A 3 m O 3 e co e Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers e The recommended pa
2. 5 E h ST Stable Range 5 p d PV SP No 1 Display Selection 15 0 y gt Il i po PV SP No 2 Displa AL FA a 5Pdd Selection i Q 055 a o2 ie lc EL o Lf Integral Derivative HeaF od 5 MV Display Selection Time Unit B E N zt AE AT Calculated Gain Hiat Soak Time Unit P PV Decimal Point 2 2 8 a an Display 2 l 2 I e AL H AT Hysteresis Alarm SP Selection Y G PV Status Display o DB arr Function 5 rr pa L EME Limit Cycle Mv My GE MV at Stop and Error Remote SP Input VOR SV Status Display O 28 0 Amplitude arr Addition zc Function y a ic le 3 CHF o Oe ien AMA Auto Manual Select Remote SP Enable cl RE F Display Refresh 3 Bn GEF Addition 2 25 Period D ic 1 D NR Extraction of Square MEV MINI Remote SP FMZ Move to Calibration i PU iirc Manual Output Method emote Liew SF Root Enable SFF Moving Average Count Hal d Upper Limit g Level ya MO a Mo Move to Advanced Function Hin Setting Level o cF MV Display MAN Manual MV Initial Value Remote SP g Displayed when initial EF ag Lower Limit setting communications 3 protect is set to 0 Move by setting password 169 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A 33 A Appendices E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Index E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Index 1 Numeric
3. sees A 31 setting monitor setting items sssssssssssse 5 49 setting output specifications sss 4 14 setting the input type c ococcccncnococcnoninnonoconononcnnanonnnons 4 10 setting the set point SP ccconncccccccononoconononnnnnanonnnnonos 4 19 setting the SP upper and lower limit values 5 15 Setup Tool ports cuca 2 23 2 24 3 7 Shit Key CE KOY ira 3 7 shifting input values ccc ceeeeeccseeeeeeecenseeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeees 5 3 SANING IDDULS radican 5 3 simple program function ccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 5 37 starting Meno qc ras 5 38 A OTe eee 5 17 clic deo el rs cron 5 18 operation at startup cccoocccccnccnnncocnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 5 17 POSUICUOMS C P 5 18 SPOTO SP T uuu LEM MEAT 5 11 Specilications att dai A 2 ME 4 25 Index 5 Start p ColditloHs illa 4 25 ST stable range eoe e ei ee ent eee 4 26 Stanby SedqueriCBS iie boda idiota 4 37 standard CONTOR aromas tuaeque t ad oet t Racine 6 42 SV status diSDldy eoe soon or as br tre ta te oett eus 5 51 switching the SP mode eeeeeessess 5 13 T temperature Unison 4 12 terminal arrangement eese 2 7 terminal block wiring examples he OO A E EID Mf 2 7 EE D d e 2 11 thermocouple calibration sssssusssss 7 4 thermocouple or
4. ssssssse 5 15 Setting Change Protect ssseseesss 6 5 Soak TIG 2 5 teca risen a aset 5 37 5 38 6 30 Soak Time Remain ccccsssseeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeessaaeeess 6 13 soak Time Unib eoe eens 6 74 SP Lower LIT o e e ores 6 41 DP MOIE ti a ieee cee 5 55 5 56 6 20 SP Ramp Fall Value 5 17 6 32 SP Ramp Set Value 5 17 6 32 SP Ramp Time Unit seeessssssse 6 56 SPTracklhg sais dia 5 55 5 56 6 77 SP Upper LM eeu eoe Ehe e 6 41 SPOTO OPZ uocuttemietev este eens 6 25 ST self tuning sess 6 42 6 60 ST Stable Range i ende oca eise as Eneas sese 6 60 Standard or Heating Cooling 6 42 Standby Sequence Reset ssse 6 57 SV Status Display Function 6 83 Temperature Units 6 40 Transfer Output Lower Limit 6 50 Transfer Output Signal sssssuss 6 49 Transfer Output Type sssesusse 5 34 6 49 Transfer Output Upper Limit 6 50 Wait Band M 5 38 6 30 Work Bit 1 to 8 OFF Delay esses 6 34 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Work Bit 1 to 8 ON Delay
5. M 1 2 1 1 2 FAUNO cmn 1 2 1 1 3 Maiv FUNCIONS tee aos 1 3 1 2 1 0 Configuration and Model Number Legend ccccssessseeeesseeeeseeseenseeeenseeeeeseeeeenseenensenes 1 5 1 2 1 17 OG ONMIQUI TIO Rock cid ces ces Gaited exes 1 5 1 2 2 Model Number Legend Sian dado 1 6 Section 2 Preparations za STAN OO ett 2 2 2 1 1 Dimensions WAITS MM a sis 2 2 2 1 2 Panel CUTOUT CU AIL MIM P 2 3 2 1 3 MOUNINO O 2 5 PAPAE T eRuI XI gu liim 2 7 2 2 1 E5CC Terminal Block Wiring Example ooooccccccccccconccccncccnnnonccnncconnnonconcncnnnnncrnnncnnnnnrrnnnnonnnnncinnnnss 2 7 2 2 2 E5EC Terminal Block Wiring Example ssssesssssseseseseeeeeeeeee nennen nnne 2 11 2 2 3 Precautions when Wiring ib tatcacatenensansetspiartoeathetastncddunce aii cccadencosteaddahapsagdse lt bcaacnedexscesanexsetas 2 16 2 2 4 WV BNI A A CEN 2 16 2 3 INSUIATION BIOCK Diagram S ite aiii sobs Eoo ceu EE EE EE a Ena EE eI 2 22 2 4 USING the Setup TOON Po init 2 23 2 4 1 sels m 2 23 2 4 2 Connection rigolo Ner dec 2 23 2 4 3 Bo DIVER qum 2 26 20 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Section 3 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 Section 4 4 1 4 2 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 9 4 10 4 12 Part Names and Basic Procedures Basic ADPICAUON Hg 3 2 POWER O
6. j Alarm hysteresis Condition A Only Alarm pP oo gt o lt D 5 o O o Tl c 5 o et O 5 o D 5 e D lt o O Standby sequence canceled Standby sequence reset Alarm output Condition A Sa Alarm output Condition B a Setting range Default A Condition A 5 Condition B H Setting e Related Parameters See Alarm 1 to 4 Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 44 Alarm 1 to 4 Latch Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 63 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 57 6 Parameters 5h N Auxiliary Output 1 Open in Alarm Auxiliary output 1 must be assigned She N Auxiliary Output 2 Open in Alarm Auxiliary output 2 must be assigned 5h 3 N Auxiliary Output 3 Open in Alarm Auxiliary output 3 must be assigned 5h HN Auxiliary Output 4 Open in Alarm Auxiliary output 4 must be assigned e This parameter sets the output status of auxiliary outputs 1 to 4 e When Close in Alarm is set the status of the auxiliary output function is output Function unchanged When Open in Alarm is set the status of the auxiliary output function is reversed before being output The following table shows the relationship between the auxiliary output function auxiliary output and operation displays SUB1 to SUBA Auxiliary output Operation displa A AEREA sue Close in Li Alarm OFF Not lit Open in OFF Lit Alarm OFF Not lit Setti
7. Lut T M ut m d ni o U AY e 3 D mp D O o O 9 et O 5 E 0 mp 0 p m Ln A J rE lt mmm En A 1 Current Output NONE Not assigned NINE O Control output heating n C O Control output cooling EB Control Output 2 Same as the Control Output 1 Assignment Same as the NONE None Assignment parameter Control Output 1 Assignment parameter o e Bunjes uonoun J peoueApy 9 9 v E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A 23 A Appendices Parameters Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment Auxiliary Output 4 Assignment Integrated Alarm Assignment Soak Time Unit Alarm SP Selection Remote SP Input Remote SP Enable Remote SP Upper limit Unit None Setting monitor value Display Default ALM1 NIT NE MLM NONE No assignment O Control output heating bre C O Control output cooling ie oe ALM1 Alarm 1 alari ALM2 Alarm 2 detection ALM3 Alarm 3 HA ALM4 Alarm 4 HA Heater alarm HB HS HB Heater burnout alarm HB HS Heater short alarm HS S ERR Input error RS ER RSP input error PEND Program end output RUN RUN output ALM Integrated alarm WR1 Work bit 1 4 WR2 Work bit 2 WR3 Work bit 3 WR4 Work bit 4 4 WR5 Work bit 5 WR6 Work bit 6
8. sse 7 13 resistance thermometer esesssesesssse 7 14 clearing the program end status 5 39 cold junction compensator ssseesseeesss 7 13 COMMUNICATIONS PE Rc ce aane 2 21 communications operation command 5 21 Communications Setting Level 6 84 A 26 CompoWAgy F eeeeeeeeereee 1 4 5 53 6 84 A 26 connecting the cold junction compensator 7 4 CONtolQUIDUES santi bait PH 1 3 4 17 control outputs 1 and 2 ooocccccnccnncnnncnnnnncononannncnnncnnnnanos 2 17 control Der c G 4 14 CONMMO liz Ia o eU A 30 controlling the start of the simple program function 5 13 CT dimensions nintendo A 7 ESATA Me A 7 P A eode dataldsta fiestas ad A 7 Index 2 specications tt cdt A 7 A A 2 19 current transformer CT cccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 43 A 7 Current Value Exceeds cccccsseeeececeseeeeeeseeeeeeeenees A 12 D els TMG oec 4 29 detection current values ooocccoonccccnonccccnnocnnonannnnnaninonanos 4 45 Digit SNIN KEY etudes cte dotted ach eaten eee oe eec 3 7 GIImersiOLDIS usto ticas io DL Rao aE 2 2 direct and reverse operation esssseeeesss 4 14 Display Range Exceeded eeeeesesss A 11 displaying changed parameters
9. ssueueusssss 6 8 Program Paten iioc Ir roin a 5 37 6 43 Program Start eo e tote entes bg etate ades 6 12 Proportional Band dci 6 27 Proportional Band Cooling 4 13 5 9 6 28 PTOTOCOl SEWING usd 6 84 PV Decimal Point Display 6 82 PV Rate of Change Calculation Period 4 35 6 78 PV Status Display Function 6 82 PV MV Manual MV c sssecccccsseeeeeeseeeeeeesaaeeess 6 37 PV SP Display Selection 6 8 PV SP No 1 Display Selection 4 49 6 8 6 81 PV SP No 2 Display Selection 4 49 6 8 6 81 Remote SP Enable Heidi 5 55 6 75 Remote SP Input ccccsseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 5 55 6 75 Remote SP Input Shift oocccccccconnnncccnonnnnnnnos 5 55 Remote SP Input Slope Coefficient 5 55 6 27 Remote SP Lower Limit 5 55 6 76 Remote SP Monitor 5 55 5 56 6 9 Remote SP Upper Limit 5 55 6 76 RINT S PS 6 68 HT Bobust TEnlhd 215 rr 6 68 RUIN SOP ARM 6 13 Scaling Lower Limit ica 6 40 Scaling Upper Limit ccccccsssseeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeees 6 40 Set Point During SP Ramp 6 10 Set Point Lower Limit csesseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 15 Set Point Upper Limit
10. Buiuni jjes LS 2 6 7 4 Basic Operation 3 In this state the change width of the PV every 60 seconds is within the ST stable range or less In the following instances PID constants are not changed by self tuning ST for the present set point 1 When the PID constants have been changed manually with ST set to ON 2 When auto tuning AT has been executed To execute self tuning again after completing the above operations set the ST parameter to OFF and then set itto ON again e ST Stable Range The ST stable range determines the condition under which ST self tun ing functions This procedure sets the ST stable range to 20 0 C Operating Procedure Advanced Function Setting 1 Press the Key several times in the Advanced Function n Setting Level to display the ST Stable Range parameter ST Stable Range The default is 15 0 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the value to 20 0 I RT Robust Tuning e When AT or ST is executed with RT selected PID constants are automatically set that make it hard for control performance to deteriorate even when the characteristics of the controlled object are changed e HT can be set in the Advanced Function Setting Level when PID control has been set e The RT mode cannot be selected while an analog input is set Selecting the RT mode in the following cases will help to prevent hunting from occurring e When the set temperature is not constant and is changed in a
11. sss 6 34 DAS SW ONO C e 5 20 5 21 cingi cn Etc p 5 21 PF Key KP9 Key 3 6 3 7 5 20 5 32 5 48 6 5 nip 5 48 PID constants recita 4 23 4 25 FID COMMON scen a nase 4 13 DOWEN SUDIDIV rr n 2 16 process value set point 1 eeeeessssssse 4 49 process value set point 2 cccccsseeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 4 49 program end emen c 5 39 program end ob DUE oscars 5 39 proportional aclara 4 28 proportional band sentida ade 4 29 Protect Level aaa 6 3 A 26 eigoiz rero PECES 5 19 Initial Setting Communications Protect 5 19 Operation Adjustment Protect 5 19 Pi Wey M cito o Mer C 5 20 Setting Change Protect cccccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 20 PV change rate alarm dioi iia 4 35 PV status display cc 5 51 R RATIOS n eR A 2 registering calibration data oocccconnccccooncnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnos 7 2 remote SPInpll narco eee 2 20 remote SP input compensation 5 56 resistance thermometer calibration 7 7 Diod eee eee eee eran ee Sere nce ane er eee 1 4 2 21 A 5 AT RODUSE TURING a rai 4 26 dig SIOD COMM PEE a dia 5 12 S sampling A ct alec ledeeiciveaatewennc ce 1 2 4 35 A 4 sensor input setting ranges coocccccoccccnnccnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnos A 30 deron ger S 5 15 SE POMS OO UTE 6 9 setting levels diagram
12. 5 22 Down Key 9 Key cccccccccccccsssssseeeeeeeecesssssseeeeeeeeeeens 3 6 E enor O AA E A 10 EVONTINDUIS cipacion e o eee itia 1 3 2 18 5 11 extraction of square roots ccooonccccocccccconcncconnnnonononononos 5 44 F THOME DANG M 3 4 m6 T ines 3 4 zo 3 4 H HB alarmi uoi eri iii 4 39 A 3 A 12 heater burnout alarm eene 6 58 A 3 heater short alarm eee 4 39 A 3 heating cooling control ssseesssssssse 5 7 6 42 FAS alarm dodici rt e daa 4 41 A 3 A 12 Ho alaf TIS Loren heetsto e 1 3 I O configuration M 1 5 indication eco i r A 30 infrared temperature sensor seseessessess 7 13 initial setting example cine A 4 8 ccc O 4 9 initial setting examples eeeeeeeeeeeeesees 4 8 Initial Setting Level 3 4 6 38 A 18 HAITIAN ZATION e 6 56 IMRPUTIEROT diarias A 10 WNDU CIV OL e 6 31 input sensor types cc eeeccseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeteeeenseeeenaeeeens 1 3 Input Type detall ec ETE 6 39 MOULD aaa ori 4 10 INP cac E A A R S 2 16 installation T Q 2 2 mounting the Terminal Covers ze TH nr 2 5 ESEG ouest Mud M 2 6 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 mounting to the panel
13. 199 9 to 520 0 C 199 9 to 940 0 F 20 0 to 120 0 Cy 40 0 to 250 0 F Thermocouple K 200 to 1300 C 300 to 2300 F 220 to 1320 C 340 to 2340 F 6 20 010500 0 C0 0t0 900 0 F 40 0to 520 0 C 40 0 to 940 0 F 100 to 850 C 100 to 1500 F 120 to 870 C 140 to 1540 F 8 20 010400 0 C0 0t0 750 0 F 40 0to 420 0 C 40 0 to 790 0 F T 9 200to 400 C 300 to 700 F 220 to 420 C 340 to 740 F 199 9 to 400 0 C 199 9 to 700 0 F 199 9 to 420 0 C 199 9 to 740 0 F 200 to 600 C 300 to 1100 F 220 to 620 C 340 to 1140 F 100 to 850 C 100 to 1500 F 120 to 870 C 140 to 1540 F U 200 to 400 C 300 to 700 F 220 to 420 C 340 to 740 F 199 9 to 400 0 C 199 9 to 700 0 F 199 9 to 420 0 C 199 9 to 740 F 200 to 1300 C 300 to 2300 F 220 to 1320 C 340 to 2340 F R e 0101700 COyO to 3000 F 2010 1720 CCY 40 to 3040 F 20 to 1720 C 40 to 8040 F B 18 100to 1800 C 300 to 3200 F 0 to 1820 C 0 to 3240 F 20 0 2320 C A0 0 3240 F 20 to 1820 CY 40 to 2340 F ES1B Infrared 20 to 130 C 40 to 270 F Temperature 60 to 22 0 to 120 C 0 to 240 F 20 to 160 C 40 to 320 F Sensor 120 C 0 to 165 C 0 to 320 F 20 to 205 C 40 to 400 F 165 C 140 to 0 to 260 C
14. 3 Part Names and Basic Procedures Use the following procedure to move to Advanced Function Setting Level Power ON Level changes automatically F Step 4 Operation Level Key for atleast 3s Initial Setting Level pe Used to set the input Used for SP alarm type and other basic values and other basic zm E gs settings and monitoring Step 5 Enter 169 for the Alas parameter HMg lt Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter eee PP PROC PCC CCPC CCP rrr reer errr Perret er er rene er rr rf rn ne ne Step 1 Step 3 Press the 2 Keys simultaneously for at least 3 s e e U y D 3 D p U 9 pu Tl c 5 et O 5 p 9 5 2 o D 5 ro gt O lt D 0 Ote cl Pavel Advanced Function Used to set protection j Setting Level for operations Advanced settings Step 2 Change the parameter with the 9 Key and change the setting of the LEPE parameter to 0 m Step 1 Move to Protect Level Step 2 Display Initial Setting Communications Protect and set it to O Step 3 Return to Operation Level Step 4 Return to Initial Setting Level Step 5 Display Aar Move to Advanced Function Setting Level and then enter 169 Steps 1 to 3 are necessary only the first time Perform only steps 4 and 5 to move to Advanced Function Setting Level Other Setting Levels There are five other setting levels Manual Control Level Protect Leve
15. Er a L1 pee Er M M Lm pese Er hy Lh C cr lt Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment There must be an auxiliary output 1 Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment There must be an auxiliary output 2 Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment There must be an auxiliary output 3 Auxiliary Output 4 Assignment There must be an auxiliary output 4 e These parameters set the function to assign to auxiliary outputs 1 to 4 1 2 3 4 5 Setting range Default NONE Disabled Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment ALM f a Control output heating Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment AL M2 EE Control output cooling Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment ALMI ALM i Alarm 1 Auxiliary Output 4 Assignment ALMH HL MC Alarm 2 HL M3 Alarm 3 ALMH Alarm 4 Heater alarm in HB alarm 14 HS alarm LUE Input error HSP input error P ENd Program end output PLN RUN output ALM Integrated Alarm WR i Work bit 1 WR Work bit 24 WR 3 Work bit 3 4 WR Work bit 4 4 WR 5 Work bit 5 4 WR Work bit 6 4 WRT Work bit 7 4 WRH Work bit 84 If L a is assigned for standard control a value equivalent to 0 will be output If heating cooling control is used with an E5CC Controller that does not have control output 2 L a is automatically assigned to auxiliary output 2 If heating cooling control is used with an E5EC Controller that does not have control output 2 L a is automatically assigned to auxiliary output 4
16. Key to set the parameter to 4 The default is AL e Alarm 2 4 6 4 Auxiliary Output Opening or Closing in Alarm e When close in alarm is set the status of the auxiliary output is output unchanged When open in alarm is set the status of the auxiliary output function is reversed before being output e Each auxiliary output can be set independently e These settings are made in the Auxiliary Output 1 to 4 Open in Alarm parameters Advanced Function Setting Level The default is N a Close in Alarm Auxiliary output A Indicators functions 1 to 4 y outp to Gwenmam ON era OFF 4 J OFF X Holt Open in Alarm on or tk t or ON 1 Nit e The alarm output will turn OFF i e the relay contacts will open when power is interrupted and for about two seconds after the power is turned ON regardless of the setting of the Auxiliary Output 1 to 4 Open in Alarm parameter 4 18 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation 4 7 Setting the Set Point SP Operation Level The Operation Level is displayed when the power is turned ON For the default setting the No 1 display shows the PV the No 2 display shows the SP and the No 3 display E5EC only shows the MV The contents that is set in the PV SP Display Screen Selection parameter in the Advanced Function Setting Level are displayed For details refer to 4 13 1 PV SP Display S
17. The same baud rate and communications method are not being used by all of the Controllers host devices and other devices on the same communications line The unit number specified in the command frame is different from the unit number set by the Controller The same unit number as the Controller is being used for another node on the same communications line There is a mistake in programming the host device The host device is detecting the absence of a response as an error before it receives the response from the Controller The host device is detecting the absence of a response as an error after broadcasting a command The host device sent another command before receiving a response from the Controller The host device sent the next command too soon after receiving a response from the Controller The communications line became unstable when Controller power was turned ON or interrupted and the host device read the unstable status as data The communications data was corrupted from noise from the environment Countermeasures Correct the wiring Connect the communications line securely and tighten the screws Heplace the cable The total cable length for RS 485 is 500 m max Use a shielded AWG24 to AWG18 cross sectional area of 0 205 to 0 823 mm twisted pair cable for the communications cable When 1 N communications are used a maximum of 32 nodes may be connected including the host node Set or
18. Lt po ER Lt m I pao E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 15 5 Advanced Operations 5 5 2 Setting Set the set point upper and lower limits in the Set Point Upper Limit and Set Point Lower Limit parame ters in the Initial Setting Level In this example it is assumed that the input type is set to a K thermocou ple with a temperature range of 200 to 1300 C 200 1300 Input setting range Set point limiter 1000 100 Set the upper and lower limits for the set point Set Point Upper Limit 1000 Set Point Lower Limit 100 Operating Procedure e Setting the Set Point Upper Limit Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to 2 Setting Level display 5L H Set Point Upper Limit Set Point Upper limit 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the value to 1000 The default is 1300 e Setting the Set Point Lower Limit Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to 2 Setting Level display 5L L Set Point Lower Limit Set Point Lower Limit 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the value to 100 The default is 200 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations 5 6 Using the SP Ramp Function to Limit the SP Change Rate 5 6 1 SP Ramp The SP ramp function is used to restrict the width of changes in the set point as a rate of ch
19. Operation of Work Bit 1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work Bii gt Operation Type Operation 3 y Input A 4 E vent input 2 extemal input y Input B OAwaysOFF y Input C OAwaysOFF y Input D 0 Always OFF y Work Bit 1 is used by Control Output Assi t Event Input Data Event Input Assignment A Ges i Intemal Event 1 1 Event input 1 extemal input Y MuliSPNo bt v Control Output 1 Control output heating y Internal Event 2 7awork br y nus y Control Output 2 No assignment v Auxiliary Output Assignment Internal Event 3 3 E vent input 3 extemal input Y None A angayDupai Jatami E Intemal Event 4 4 Event input 4 extemal input None aia Dura Am2 z Intemal Event 5 5 Event input 5 extemal input v None AwayOupau3 falam3 Internal Event 6 6 Event input 6 external input y None y Auxiliary Dutput 4 Alarm 4 y A 2 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Advanced Operations The Logic Operation Editor will be displayed Confirm that the screen for work bit 1 is displayed and select Operation 3 from the Operation Type Field Set the operation by selecting one of the following Work bit 1 input assignment A 4 Event input 2 external input Work bit 1 input assignment B 0 Always OFF Work bit 1 input assignment C 0
20. Setting Change Enable Disable Communications Writing Enable Disable Alarm Latch Cancel Multi SP No Switching Bit 0 Multi SP No Switching Bit 1 Multi SP No Switching Bit 2 PRST Program Start can be set even when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled This function can be set only for a Controller that supports a remote SP This function can be set for heating cooling control but the function will be disabled This function can be set only for a Controller that supports communications Also if a work bit is selected as the event input data you cannot select communications writing enable disable The following table shows the relationships between the ON OFF status of multi SP number switching bits O to 2 and the set point Multi SP No switching bits Selected set point pom sito em Bit SP 0 OFF OFF SP 1 OFF OFF SP 2 OFF OFF SP3 OFF SP 4 OFF OFF ON SP5 OFF ON SP6 OFF ON SP7 ON Note Any bits that are not assigned to event inputs are treated as being OFF e Related Parameter SP 0 to 7 Adjustment Level Page 6 25 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters oh KW Extraction of Square Root Enable An analog input must be supported 1 This parameter enables and disables square root extraction Function a Setting range Default aN Enabled aF F Disabled OFF Setting e Related Parameter See Extraction of
21. WR7 Work bit 7 Work bit 8 4 Same as the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter mm PA LU J r J i e a aw Al L AH ee Ly T Ln Ln rQ a 7 px m Li el rt 7a l A mr mm n O m ES J lt lt aa u u a ut a iy M AU rm co Za p L1 Lim r m mmm En M A 1 Same as the None Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter Same as the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter Same as the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter Same as the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment None parameter Same as the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment None parameter 0 to 255 Alarm 1 1 Alarm 2 2 Alarm 3 4 Alarm 4 8 HB alarm 16 HS alarm 32 Input error 64 RSP input error 128 None SP M Ramp set point SP an SP SP Set point 4 20 4 20 mA 0 20 0 20 mA Temperature input Input setting range lower limit to Input setting range upper limit Analog input Scaling lower limit to Scaling upper limit E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A Appendices Setting monitor value Display Default Unit Parameters Remote SP lower limit Minimum Output ON OFF B
22. e T Product V To CT input 17 3A HT CT Product x To CT input Normal Burnout 5 A gt 10 A j f CT Product Product 200V ToCT input E 200V ToCT input Burnout 10A 200 V 200 V 200 V 20 5BA gt CT GI Burnout Product Product To CT input To CT input Current when there is a burnout Current when there is a burnout ZO A 10Ax 1 2 25A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the common is as follows Heater burnout detection current 10 5 2 7 5 A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load is as follows Heater burnout detection current 10 0 2 5 A To enable detection in either case use 7 5 A as the heater burnout detection current E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation 4 13 Customizing the PV SP Display The following table shows the contents of the No 1 2 and 3 displays according to the setting of the PV SP Display Screen Selection parameter Only the E5EC has a No 3 display 4 13 1 PV SP Display Selections The following table shows the contents of the No 1 2 and 3 displays according to the setting of the PV SP Display Screen Selection parameter in the Advanced Function Setting Level Only the E5EC has a No 3 display Set value No 5 display ESEC oni 7 Nothing i displayed Noting i displayed Nothing i displayed Nothing i disp
23. e Input Sensor Types D You can connect the following sensors and signals to the universal input eo Thermocouple K J T E L U N R S B W PLII 5 Resistance thermometer Pt100 JPt100 3 Infrared temperature sensor ES1B si 10 to 70 C 60 to 120 C 115 to 165 C 140 to 260 C d Current input 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 20 mA DC Voltage input 1to 5 VDC 0 to 5 V DC 0 to 10 V DC e Control Outputs e A control output can be a relay voltage for driving SSR or current output depending on the model e Adjusting PID Constants e You can easily set the optimum PID constants by performing AT auto tuning with the limit cycle method or by performing ST self tuning with the step response method e You can also add RT robust tuning to give priority to control stability e Alarms Standard Alarms e You can output an alarm when the deviation process value set point or manipulated value reaches a specified value e You can also output alarms for the PV rate of change and for loop burnouts e f necessary a more comprehensive alarm function can be achieved by setting a standby sequence alarm hysteresis auxiliary output close in alarm open in alarm alarm latch alarm ON delay and alarm OFF delay HB and HS Alarms e With models with the optional HB and HS alarms you can detect heater burnout and heater short alarms based on CT inputs Integrated Alarm e You can output an integrated alarm if a standard alarm HB alarm or H
24. pP oo gt o lt D 5 o O o Tl c 5 o et O 5 o D 5 e D lt o Setting e Related Parameters 228 Alarm 1 to 4 Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 44 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 65 6 Parameters Alarm 1 must be assigned and the alarm 1 type IZE A in Alarm 1 OFF Delay must not be 0 12 or 13 Alarm 2 must be assigned and the alarm 2 type Acat Alarm 2 OFF Delay must not be 0 12 or 13 Alarm 3 must be assigned and the alarm 3 type must not be 0 12 or 13 em Pa L m O t 71 Alarm 3 OFF Delay Alarm 4 must be assigned and the alarm 4 type Du r nint Ar E HENRY must not be 0 12 or 13 The alarm 1 2 3 or 4 output is prevented from turning OFF until after the delay times set in these parameters have elapsed e Set the time for which the OFF delay is to be enabled e To disable the OFF delay set O Function Setting range Unit Default Oto 995 Setting e Related Parameters Dos d Alarm 1 to 4 Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 44 My SE MV at Stop and Error Addition Control must be set to 2 PID control e This parameter sets whether or not the MV at Stop and MV at PV Error parameters are to be displayed Function a Setting range Default aN Displayed aF F Not displayed aFF Setting e Related Parameters ss MV at Stop Adjustment Level Page 6 31 MV at PV Error Adjustment Level Page 6 31 6 66
25. A A 2 5 ESEC D 2 6 insulation block diagrams esses 2 22 MCC Fa iris aere 4 29 integral derivative time unit sssseeeeesssssss 5 9 K KEY operations 5 11 Keys E c 3 6 NEST 3 6 te MOGe IKGY ossi O Dade Peu ean 3 6 e Shift Key PF Key sin 3 6 AIUD REV cU Rn 3 6 L Level Key Key 53 etie n ivt uta cs RR rr Ee Ten TES 3 6 Ineartuning Meer Ud 5 9 lODIG OD CIATION art 5 57 OOD DUNMOLN alati csc aia li 5 28 M maiM TUNGUONS RN an 1 3 Manual Comro uscar aida 5 31 Manual Control Level een 6 36 A 21 manual output method eeeeseeeeessses 5 31 Manual Setup riada 4 28 Memory ENOL uscar da A 12 WIGGDUS A TU sacos eo tremens 1 4 5 53 A 26 Mode Key Ce Key oooooocccccccocococococcncnonococonocnnnnnnononnas 3 6 model number legends eee 1 6 Monitor Setting Item Level 6 35 A 21 mounting the Terminal Covers ESC Oe Em 2 5 A ee nU epi ins 2 6 assem crc 5 11 N INO CISDIAY aran etude rid uec edes 3 4 4 49 6 8 NO 2 dISDIay patitas 3 4 4 49 6 8 NO 3 CISDIAY e 3 4 4 49 6 8 O ON OFF control eeennne 4 13 4 20 6 41 operation indicators occcconccnncnncnccnnccnnnnnnnnnnnconnnanos 3 4 3 5 Operation Level ccccesscceecssseeeceeseeeesnesseeeesees 6 7 A 16
26. Auxiliary Output 1 ON OFF Delay IN T Work Bit 1 f Al our Input A Input B Input C Input D ON OFF 4 HH um 0 Always OFF y 0 41ways OFF y Time Unit es s G C min Control Output Assi t Event Input Data Event Input Assignment CTO Control output heatin Y Internal Event 1 1 Event input 1 external input None Y Control Dutput 1 Dur g zl Internal Event 2 2Event input 2 extemal input y None y Control Qutput 2 Auxiliary Output Assignment Internal Event 3 3 vent input 3 external input y None y Auxiliary Output 1 work bit1 Internal Event 4 4 Event input 4 external input y None y Adis Duput 2 am e Internal Event 5 5 E vent input 5 external input y None y Auxiliary Output 3 alarma M Internal Event 6 6 Event input 6 external input None y Auxiliary Output 4 Alarm 4 suonelado 29107 Buisn 2 22 This completes the procedure for setting parameters using the CX Thermo Transfer the settings to the Controller to set the Controller Refer to CX Thermo help for the procedure to transfer the settings E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 65 5 Advanced Operations E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Parameters 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 Conventions Used in this Section 6 2 Protect Eevel xau e erac ae he
27. E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation 4 1 5 Moving to the Communications Setting Level e Moving from the Operation Level to the Communications Setting Level 1 Press the S Key for at least 3 seconds in the Operation Level CDS p The No 1 display will flash when the keys are pressed for 1 s or longer The display will change from the Operation Level to the Initial Setting Level 2 Press the Key for less than 1 second in the Initial Setting 2 Setting Level Level Input Type The display will change from the Initial Setting Level to the Communications Setting Communications Setting Level Level I L h O S 5 ae o D D D 5 o D 5 ae r O lt D 0 Protocol Setting e Moving from the Communications Setting Level to the Operation Level Communications Setting Level 1 Press the C Key for less than 1 second in the Communications Setting Level The display will change from the Communications Setting Level to the Initial Setting Level 2 Press the Key for at least 1 second in the Initial Setting 1 Setting Level Level Input Type The display will change from the Initial Setting Level to the Operation Level ration Level v o e Bulnes suomneoiunuuuo au 0 BUON S L p E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 7 4 Basic Operation 4 2 Initial Setting Examples Initial hardware setup
28. O gt gt O e 5 Lo c mp o Display temperature Upper limit 95 0 Lower limit 10 096 Input mA 2 In this example scaling is set to display 4 to 20 mA as 10 0 to 95 0 Operating Procedure e Setting the Input Type T Move to the Initial Setting Level N E Input Type will be dis 4 Setting Level played Input Type 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the value to 25 The default is 5 e Setting the Scaling Upper Limit Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to a Setting Level display N H Scaling Upper Limit Scaling Upper Limit 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the value to 950 The default is 100 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 5 5 Advanced Operations e Setting the Scaling Lower Limit Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to a Setting Level display N i Scaling Lower Limit Scaling Lower Limit 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the value to 100 The default is O Luv e Setting the Decimal Point Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to al Setting Level display dF Decimal Point Decimal Point 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the value to 1 The default is O 5 6 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations 5 3 Executing Heating Cooling Control 5 3 1 Heating Cooling
29. Page 6 20 6 84 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 User Calibration A fal User Caliblauion crap 7 2 7 2 Parameter Structure 1 60460 ti a a da la da 7 3 7 3 Thermocouple Calibrati0N 00oooooooorornarn ees 7 4 7 4 Resistance Thermometer Calibration 7 7 7 5 Calibrating Analog Input 00 00 o 7 9 7 6 Calibrating the Transfer Output 7 11 7 7 Checking Indication Accuracy oooccoococoo 7 13 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 7 1 7 User Calibration 7 1 User Calibration The E5CC E5EC is correctly calibrated before it is shipped from the factory Normally it does not need to be calibrated by the user If however it must be calibrated by the user use the parameters for calibrating temperature input and analog input OMRON however cannot ensure the results of calibration by the user Also calibration data is overwritten with the latest calibration results The default calibration settings cannot be restored after user calibration Perform user calibration with care e Calibrating Inputs The input type selected in the parameter is used for calibration The input types are as follows e Registering Calibration Data Thermocouple Infrared temperature sensor Resistance thermometer Current input Voltage input 16 types 4 types 5 types 2 types 3 types The new ca
30. Page 6 51 HB ON OFF Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 58 PF Setting Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 79 _ HB and HS alarms must be supported H H HS Alarm Hysteresis The HS Alarm Use parameter must be set to ON The HS Alarm Latch parameter must be set to OFF e This parameter sets the hysteresis for HS alarms Function Setting range Unit Default 0 1 to 50 0 0 1 Setting e Related Parameters Ses HS Alarm Use Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 68 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 69 pP oo gt o lt D 5 o O o Tl c 5 o et O 5 o D 5 e D lt o 6 Parameters Alarm 1 must be assigned LO i i LON LBA Detection Time The alarm type must be set to 12 LBA This parameter enables or disables the LBA function and sets the detection time interval e To disable the LBA function set O Function Setting range Uni Default 0 to 9999 0 Setting o Related Parameters see Alarm 1 to 4 Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 44 LBA Level Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 70 LBA Band Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 71 Alarm 1 must be assigned L OAL LBA Level The alarm type must be set to 12 LBA The LBA detection time must not be 0 e This parameter sets the LBA level l e f the deviation between the SP and PV exceeds the LBA level a loop burnout is Function detected Setting range
31. Slightly bend the E53 COV24 Terminal Cover in the direction shown by the arrows to attach it to the terminal block Enlarged Illustration of Terminal Section 2 6 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 Preparations 2 2 Using the Terminals The terminal arrangements of the ESCC E5EC are described in this section 2 2 1 E5CC Terminal Block Wiring Example e Terminal Arrangement The terminals block of the E5CC is divided into five types of terminals control outputs 1 and 2 sensor input auxiliary outputs input power supply and options Control outputs 1 and 2 Auxiliary outputs Sensor input Input power supply la Precautions for Correct Use When you purchase the Digital Controller it will be set for a K thermocouple input type 5 by default If a different sensor is used an input error 5 E FF will occur Check the setting of the Input Type parameter I Control Outputs 1 and 2 e Model Numbers The specifications for control outputs 1 and 2 are given in the following location in the model number E5CC OO O O O M LILIE pis Control outputs 1 and 2 Code Output type Specification RX 1 relay output 250 VAC 3 A resistive load aX 12 VDC 21 mA CX 1 current output 4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC with load of 500 Q max QQ 2 voltage outputs for driving SSRs 12 VDC 21 mA E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 7
32. TN ME h FF y Mie _E iv 5 Process Value Input Shift Process Value Slope Coefficient Remote SP Input Shift Remote SP Input Slope Coefficient Proportional Band Integral Time PID settings Derivative Time Proportional Band Cooling Integral Time Cooling Derivative Time Cooling Dead Band Manual Reset Value Clear the offset during stabilization of P or PD control Hysteresis Heating Hysteresis settings Hysteresis Cooling Soak Time Wait Band MV at Stop MV at PV Error SP Ramp Set Value SP Ramp Fall Value Mure Wor KOCIK Starting in manual mode MV Upper Limit MV Lower Limit MV Change Rate Limit Extraction of Square Root Low cut Point Work Bit 1 ON Delay Work Bit 1 OFF Delay Work Bit 2 ON Delay Work Bit 2 OFF Delay Work Bit 3 ON Delay Work Bit 3 OFF Delay Work Bit 4 ON Delay Work Bit 4 OFF Delay Work Bit 5 ON Delay Work Bit 5 OFF Delay Work Bit 6 ON Delay Work Bit 6 OFF Delay Work Bit 7 ON Delay Work Bit 7 OFF Delay Work Bit 8 ON Delay Work Bit 8 OFF Delay Manual Control Leve PID Control only rt c LM Press the Key or the Key for at least 25 c3 Starting in automatic mode Process
33. Uni Default Temperature input 0 1 to 999 9 UT ne 0 01 to 99 99 10 00 e Related Parameters See Process Value Set Point Operation Level Page 6 8 Alarm 1 to 4 Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 44 LBA Detection Time Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 70 LBA Band Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 71 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters Alarm 1 must be assigned L hH h LBA Band The alarm type must be set to 12 LBA The LBA detection time must not be 0 e This parameter sets the LBA band e f a control deviation greater than the LBA band is not reduced when the LBA level is Function exceeded an loop burnout is detected a Setting range Default Temperature input 0 0 to 999 9 id Analog input 0 00 to 99 99 0 20 e Related Parameters See hs Process Value Set Point Operation Level Page 6 8 Alarm 1 to 4 Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 44 LBA Detection Time Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 70 LBA Level Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 70 pP oo gt o lt D 5 o D o Tl c 5 o et O 5 o D zi 5 e D lt o E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 71 6 Parameters a HE Control Output 1 Assignment n LE p Control Output 2 Assignment With control output 2 fs e These parameters set the function to assign to control outputs 1 and 2 Function Setting range Default Disabled Control
34. e Input type O 390 Q e Input type 1 2 3 or 4 280 Q Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the 4 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered e Input types 1 2 3 4 When the Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left Set the 6 dial to 10 Q Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered O E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 7 7 7 User Calibration 7 When the amp Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete Press the 4 Key The No 2 display changes to 4E5 Release the key and wait two seconds or press the Key This stores the temporarily registered calibration data to non volatile memory To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to non volatile memory press the e Key while Na is displayed in the No 2 display without pressing the 4 Key The calibration mode is quit by turning the power OFF For Controllers that have a transfer output y
35. e g a PLC You can send communications command from a host device e g a PLC to the E5CC E5EC to set parameters and monitor values such as writing the SP or reading the PV This function can be used only for a Controller that supports communications PLC Serial Communications Unit RS 485 CompoWay F or Modbus RTU E5CC E5EC Controllers with communications The communications command protocol can be selected from the following protocols Communications protocol Description CompoWay F is OMRON s standard communications format for general serial communications This format uses a standard frame format as well as the well established FINS commands used for OMRON s PLCs Therefore it can simplify communications between components and the host FINS Factory Interface Network service The FINS protocol provides message communications between controllers in OMRON FA networks Modbus is a standard communications control method that conforms to the Modicon Company s RTU mode Modbus Protocol PI MBUS 300 Revision J Modbus RTU Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric It supports functions equivalent to the CompoWay F Read Variable Area Write Variable Area Operation Command and Echoback Test functions CompoWay F An overview on how to use communications is provided below Refer to the E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers Communications Manual Cat No H175 for detailed information on communications
36. 0 Same as heating control 1 Linear l Heating Cooling Tuning Method W mer 000 Advanced Function 2 Air cooling setting Level 3 Water cooling Parameter Setting range d Level T o oF Proportional Band emperature input Dd 099 MA or Cooling Analog input Meee ale O to 9999 Seconds 233 Integral Time Time Unit of 1 s li A y Cooling Integral Derivative 0 0 to 999 9 od 233 0 djustment Time Unit of 0 1 s Level Integral Derivative lina oU ino PS 0 0 to 999 9 Seconds 40 0 Time Unit of 0 1 s The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral Derivative Time Unit parameter The Proportional Band Cooling Integral Time Cooling and Derivative Time Cooling parameters are initialized if the Integral Derivative Time Unit parameter is changed S OO m x D Q c gt D Dd et gt e O O O O gt mp a Air Cooling Water Cooling Tuning Control that is suitable for an application that does not have linear cooling characteristics Such as plastic molding machines is performed The response is fast and the response characteristics are stable o33u02 Buiooo 6uneeH L e S Linear Tuning Control that is suitable for an application that has linear cooling characteristics is performed Water cooling Air cooling 100 Linear Cooling capacity 96 0 MV cooling 96 100 Cooling Characteristics E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 9
37. 2 11 2 2 3 Precautions when Wiring 0 0 eee ee 2 16 2 24 WINO a oie ee ee es ee arar a eee REX EE 2 16 Insulation Block Diagrams eere 2 22 Using the Setup Tool Port cocccococoo 2 23 2b dqeTOGBdHIO s stud ca cago o 2nd dois ea ee ee ded Rie are ed 2 23 2 4 2 Connection Method 0 cc eee e 2 23 2 4 5 MStallng the DEIMBE str ii date wa he be e dca oe be 2 26 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 1 2 Preparations 2 1 Installation 2 1 1 Dimensions Unit mm e E5CC 48 x 48 44 8 x 44 8 0 DUTA RSP MANU n HH TUNE
38. 4 The calibration display for 4 mA will be displayed Press the 4 or 4 Key until the DMM monitor value changes to 4 mA Press the Key The calibration settings will be temporarily registered 5 To cancel saving the temporarily registered calibration data to non volatile memory press the Key without pressing the 4 Key i e while Na is displayed in the No 2 display Press the 4 Key The No 2 display changes to 5 Release the key and wait 2 seconds or press the e Key This saves the temporarily registered calibration data in non volatile memory Co 6 The Calibration Mode is ended by turning OFF the power supply E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 7 11 7 User Calibration Use the following procedure to calibrate the transfer output for 1 to 5 V 1 Connect a DMM to the transfer output terminals E5CC E5EC Input power supply Input power supply 2 Press the Key to display the parameter for the transfer output 3 The calibration display for 5 V will be displayed Press the 4 or 4 Key until the DMM monitor value changes to 5 V Press the Key The calibration settings will be temporarily registered 4 The calibration display for 1 V will be displayed Press the 4 or 4 Key until the DMM monitor value changes to 1 V Press the Key The calibration settings will be temporarily registered 5 To cancel saving the temporarily registered calibration d
39. 4 1 VA max 4 1 VA max 5 5 VA max 24 VDC no polarity 2 3 W max 3 2 W max e These models have reinforced insulation between the input power supply the relay outputs and other terminals e Inputs Refer to 2 2 1 E5CC Terminal Block Wiring Example or 2 2 2 E5EC Terminal Block Wiring Example for the terminal arrangement When extending the thermocouple lead wires be sure to use compensating wires that match the thermocouple type When extending the lead wires of a resistance thermometer be sure to use wires that have low resistance and keep the resistance of the three lead wires the same 2 16 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 Preparations e Control Outputs 1 and 2 The following diagrams show the applicable outputs and their internal equivalent circuits E5CC QX voltage output for QQ 2 voltage outputs for RX relay output driving SSR CX current output driving SSRs n2 N c 5 e gt D D 3 5 a 0 ion n iY IN Output type Specification E RX Relay output SPST NO 250 VAC 3 A resistive load Electrical durability 100 000 operations QX Voltage output for driving PNP 12 VDC 20 21 mA with short circuit protection SSR CX Current output 4 to 20 or O to 20 mA DC Load 500 2 max Resolution Approx 10 000 QQ 2 voltage outputs for driving PNP 12 VDC 20 21 mA with short circuit protection SSRs Control outputs 1 and 2 are not isolated o
40. Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment 6 73 uxiliary Output4 6 73 PV Decimal ssignment Point Display AL ME Integrated Alarm PV Status yq Assignment 6 74 Soak Time Unit SV Status 6 74 Alarm SP Selection 6 75 Period Remote SP Input Move to 6 75 Remote SP Enable 6 75 Remote SP Upper limit 6 76 Remote SP Lower limit 6 76 SP Tracking 6 77 Manual MV Limit Enable 6 77 PV Rate of Change Calculation Period 6 78 Heating Cooling c Tuning Method 6 78 Minimum Output ON OFF Band 6 79 PF Setting 6 79 Display Selection Display Selection Display Function Display Function Display Refresh Calibration Level gt i OOo d oO 6 80 6 80 6 80 6 80 6 81 6 81 6 81 6 82 6 82 6 83 6 83 6 83 P oo gt o lt D 5 o O o Tl c 5 o et O 5 o D 5 e D lt o 6 Parameters L INL E Parameter Initialization e This parameter returns all parameter settings to their defaults e After the initialization the set value automatically turns OFF Function a Setting range Default oF F Initialization is not executed ore Setting E ar t Initializes to the factory settings described in the manual The Controller must not have event inputs or the Event Input Assignment 1 to Event Input M5 P Li Number of Multi SP Points Assignment 6 parameters must not be set to Multi SP No switching bit 0 to Multi S
41. C N e 200101300 3001o 2800 PR 16 owo otosooo s i7 owo 0to3000 B 18 mowo 800 to 8200 W 9 1230 oto3zo Pul 01130 0Oto2300 10 to 70 C 0 to 90 0 to 190 ntrared temperature METRES 0 to 120 0 to 240 Sensor Eus 115 to 165 C 0 to 165 0 to 320 140 to 260 C 0 to 260 O to 500 oa 4 to 20 mA One of the following ranges according to j 0 to 20 mA the scaling 1to5V 1999 to 9999 199 9 to 999 9 Voltage input dud 29 19 99 to 99 99 poe 1 999 to 9 999 e Related Parameters See AE Temperature Unit Initial Setting Level Page 6 40 Set Point Upper Limit Initial Setting Level Page 6 41 Set Point Lower Limit Initial Setting Level Page 6 41 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 39 P N 5 m o D 5 rm O lt o 6 Parameters LN H Scaling Upper Limit LN L Scaling Lower limit The input type must be set for an analog input d J Decimal Point e The Decimal Point parameter specifies the decimal point position of parameters set point etc whose unit is EU Function e Scaling Upper Limit Scaling Lower Limit ci Parameter name Default SE Scaling Upper Limit Scaling lower limit 4 1 to 9999 100 Scaling Lower Limit 1999 to scaling upper limit 1 0 e Decimal Point Parameter name Default Decimal Point 0 Setvalue Setings Example 0 O digits past decimal point 1234 1 1 digits past decimal point 1
42. E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 B 53 q NO O O O 3 3 c 3 O fo O 3 o z F 3 fo I O o pu g O lt O D _ O e fo U r O a 5 Advanced Operations The settings are made in the Communications Setting Level Operating Procedure 1 Press the Key in the Communications Setting Level to Protocol Setting move between the following parameters e PEEL Protocol Setting e L No Communications Unit No rot ali e LP Communications Baud Rate e LEN Communications Data Length 5 Communications 25 Baud Rate e e Ln UNO r Fr Communications Stop Bits Communications Parity Send Data Wait Time Ll Ll e P Fr se LL Communications e Ln ym L1 wv lt Fr 2 Use the 4 or Key to set these parameters Communications Stop Bits Communications Parity The Protocol Setting parameter is displayed only when CompoWay F communications are being used Set the communications parameters to agree with the specifications of the host device e g a PLC If a 1 N connection is being used make sure that the communications specifications for all devices in the system except the communications unit numbers are the same Communications Wiring Connect the host device and the ESCC E5EC with RS 485 wiring Sending Communications Commands Communications commands are sent from the host device to the E5CC E5EC by
43. This error is displayed when the heater current value exceeds 55 0 A Operation Control continues allowing normal operation An error message is displayed when the following items are displayed Heater current 1 value monitor Heater current 2 value monitor Leakage current 1 monitor Leakage current 2 monitor Pu PA F Fr HB Alarm HS Alarm 1 eX jo spem 1 14 Ll e Meaning If there is an HB or HS alarm the relevant parameter will flash on the No 1 display Operation The relevant Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Heater Current 2 Value Monitor Leakage Current 1 Monitor or Leakage Current 2 Monitor parameters in the Operation or Adjustment Level will flash on the No 1 display However control continues and operation is normal E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A Appendices A 5 Troubleshooting Checking Problems If the Digital Controller is not operating normally check the following points before requesting repairs If the problem persists contact your OMRON representative for details on returning the product Timing Status Meaning Countermeasures Page Turning The TUNE indicator will ST self tuning is in This is not a product fault 4 25 ON the flash progress default setting The TUNE indicator flashes during self tuning power for n the first Temperature error is en me large Thermometer i is not Check the thermometer i
44. With any E5CC E5EC model that supports remote SP input you can set the set point with an analog input E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 1 Introduction 1 2 1 0 Configuration and Model Number Legend 9po y pue uonenbijuoy O I Z L puaba7 1equinwN 1 2 1 1 0 Configuration Inputs E5CC E5EC Outputs Input signals Output signals Control Set point SP Local SP Tr Limits Operation e Linear current 5 Es SP mode l e Voltage output Control output 1 emote T for driving SSR MV limit Rela Analog input current voltage e MV Directreverse cad rate of e Auto manual change limit e Linear current e Voltage output Control output 2 for driving SSR e Relay Process value PV input Thermocouple Resistance thermometer Input type e Input shift e Infrared Temperature Sensor l e PID or e Analog input current voltage Input filter Moving average ON OFF control Auxiliary outputs 1 to 4 AAA eee Contact status standard alarms alarms 1 to 4 is med EE mE gt e HS alarm Event inputs EV1 to EV6 RUN STOP switching Auto manual selection input error S ERR External inputs Automatic setting of RSP input error contact or non contact input PID constants with AT Integrated alarm SP mode remote local operation or ST RUN status switching I Ix O O O 2 gt Q pe O 2 Program start
45. dks Invert Direct Reverse Operation ROP SP mode switch 2 At e 100 AT Execute Cancel i 40 AT Execute Cancel 3 WERE Setting Change Enable Disable LMWE Communications Write Enable Disable 4 Alarm Latch Cancel Multi SP No switching bit O Multi SP No switching bit 1 Multi SP No switching bit 2 PRST Program Start can be set even when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled This function can be set only for a Controller that supports a remote SP input This function can be set for heating cooling control but the function will be disabled This function can be set only for a Controller that supports communications Also when a work bit is selected as the event input data Communications Write Enable Disable cannot be assigned Li m Z FT pe i 1 amp amp L1 Lam Lt E m m Li nt Turn event inputs ON and OFF while the power is being supplied Event input ON OFF changes are detected for inputs of 50 ms or longer The functions are described in detail below Executing Run Stop Control When the Event Input Assignment parameter is set to STOP RUN STOP control is started when event input turns OFF Control is stopped when the input turns ON Alarm outputs however will be according to the process value The STOP indicator will light while control is stopped Setting Input contact Status Event input
46. the alarm when the manipulated variable MV is higher than the alarm value X 4 Basic Operation Alarm output operation Set Valle Alarm type When alarm value Whenalarm value Description of function X is positive X is negative 17 MV absolute value Standard Control Standard Control This alarm type turns ON lower limit alarm 9 axe exa the alarm when the ON l i i OFF 7 Mv OFF MV manipulated variable MV is lower than the alarm Heating Cooling Heating Cooling value X Control Cooling Control Cooling MV Always ON 18 RSP This alarm type turns ON absolute value the alarm when the remote upper limit alarm SP RSP is higher than the 10 alarm value X 19 HSP This alarm type turns ON absolute value the alarm when the remote lower limit alarm SP RSP is lower than the 10 alarm value X 1 With set values 1 4 and 5 the upper and lower limit values can be set independently for each alarm type and are expressed as L and H 2 Set value 1 Upper and lower limit alarm Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Always ON m EE lt lt L H SP SP L H H SP L H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L lt 0 ES H0 L0 A lt L IH gt L IH gt L H L SP IH lt L SP H L S Set value 4 Upper and lower limit range Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Always OFF L HSP SP L H H SP L H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L lt 0 H lt 0 L gt 0 IH lt L IH gt L lli IH gt L H L SP IH lt L SP H L 4
47. tings This is particularly effective in the Initial Setting Level and Advanced Function Setting Level where there are many parameters This can also be used to protect the settings by not displaying unnecessary parameters after the required parameters have been changed Change Lil Changed Parameters Only in the Protect Level to ON Parameters in the Setting Level Parameters that have been changed by the user gt Changed Parameters Only Set to ON enabled Only the parameters that have been changed from their default settings are displayed Display Level a Changed Parameters OFF disabled or ON Protect evel iic Only enabled default OFF 5 22 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations LA Precautions for Correct Use Set this parameter to ON only after making the required settings The following parameters are displayed regardless of the setting of the Changed Parameters Only parameter e Monitor parameters including the PV parameters with monitor in the parameter name and the Set Point During SP Ramp parameter e Parameters that switch operation RUN STOP Auto Manual Switch Multi SP Program Start AT Execute Cancel Communications Writing SP Mode and Parameter Initialization e Level displays and parameters to move to other levels such as Adjustment Level Display Move to Advanced Function Setting Level and Move to Calibration Level e M
48. 0 Sening Heating cooling 105 0 to 105 0 o Related Parameters see RUN STOP Operation Level Page 6 13 MV at Stop and Error Addition Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 66 o E gt o A _ The control must be set to 2 PID control 3 MY er MV at PV Error The MV at Stop and Error Addition parameter must be ON 5 lt o e This parameter sets the MV to use when an input error occurs Pp Function AAA IIA Standard 0 0 meni Heating cooling 105 0 to 105 0 e Related Parameters See MV at Stop and Error Addition Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 66 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 31 6 Parameters GEPRE SP Ramp Set Value The ST parameter must be set to OFF 5PRL SP Ramp Fall Value e These parameters set the rate of change during SP ramp operation They set the maximum permissible change width per unit of time as the SP ramp set value and the SP Function ramp fall value The SP ramp function is disabled if this parameter is set to OFF e For a temperature input the decimal point positions of the SP ramp set value and SP ramp fall value depend on the currently selected sensor and for an analog input they depend on the Decimal Point parameter n Parameter Setting range Default SP Ramp Set Value OFF or 1 to 9 999 ET EU min EU h OFF oa SP Ramp Fall Value SAME Same as SP ramp EU s EU min EU h SAME set value OFF or 1 to 9 999 nL E H MV Upper
49. 0 o oooocooocornnrn A 31 A 9 Parameter FlOW xcd durare tee Cena ie dae o eeu ien Rude A 32 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A 1 A Appendices A 1 Specifications A 1 1 Ratings Supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 24 VAC 50 60 Hz 24 VDC Operating voltage range 85 to 110 of rated supply voltage Option number 000 3 1 VA max 1 6 W max Power Other option numbers 6 5 VA max Other option numbers 4 1 VA max 2 3 W max consumption Option number 000 4 1 VA max 2 3 W max Other option numbers 8 3 VA max Other option numbers 5 5 VA max 3 2 W max Thermocouple K J T E L U NR S B W PLII Platinum resistance thermometer Pt100 JPt100 Infrared temperature sensor 10 to 70 C 60 to 120 C 115 to 165 C 140 to 260 C Current input 2 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Input impedance 150 2 max Voltage input 7 11t05V 0to 5 V Oto 10 V Input impedance 1 MQ min ESCC SPST NO 250 VAC 3 A resistive load electrical durability 100 000 operations Relay Sensor input Min applicable load 5 V 10 mA output SPST NO 250 VAC 5 A resistive load electrical durability 100 000 operations E5EC Min applicable load 5 V 10 mA E5CC Output voltage 12 VDC 20 PNP max load current 21 mA with short circuit protection circuit Control Output 1 Control output 1 2 Voltage Output voltage 12 VDC 20 PNP max load current 40 mA with short circuit protection output circuit
50. 1 to Event Input WE P E Setting Change Protect Assignment 6 parameters must not be set to enable disable setting changes Changes to settings using key operations are restricted The shaded cell indicates the default e Change Setting Protect This parameter is not displayed if the Event Input Assignment 1 to Event Input Function Assignment 6 parameters are set to enable disable setting changes Set value Description e Settings can be changed using key operations Setting ON Settings cannot be changed using key operations The protect level settings however can be changed e The all protect indication Omi will light when setting is ON o PFPE PF Key Protect is S D Q PF Key Protect 2 O This parameter enables and disables PF Key operation Function Set value Description PF Key enabled E ON PF Key disabled Operation as a function key is prohibited Setting The shaded cell indicates the default L J itt Changed Parameters Only This parameter allows you to display only the parameters that have been changed from their default settings Function a Setting range Default an Enabled aF F Disabled OFF Setting E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 5 6 Parameters This parameter is displayed only when a parameter Amic Maer ENADE mask has been set from the Setup Tool e This parameter turns the parameter mask function ON and OFF Function a Set
51. 15 2 16 15 A 4 46 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load is as follows Heater burnout detection current 17 3 10 2 13 65 A To enable detection in either case use 16 1 A as the heater burnout detection current b Star Connecting Lines Example Using Three 200 VAC 2 kW Heaters Normal 5 8 A gt 200 V I zi N c o 3 T O fo e o UJ c gt O c an UJ fo gt a L O fo r O o gt O L o gt gt fo 3 o sau Product CT 00 To CT input 5 8 A gt CT Product To CT input D gt The current when each phase is normal is 5 8 A 10 A x 1 V3 y C1 Normal Burnout Q Burnout 5A o a 35 3 3 P 200 V 200 V Burnout Product CT Product CT id To m input SUD To CT input MS e de CT Ba CT Product gi Product To CT input To CT input Current when there is a burnout Current when there is a burnout 10 A x 1 V3 x 3 2 2 5 A 10 A x 1 V3 x V3 2 2 5 A The heater burnout detection current for this connecting line is 5 4 A 5 8 5 2 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 47 4 Basic Operation c V Connecting Lines Example Using Two 200 VAC 2 kW Heaters Normal 10 A gt C
52. 3 12 Alarm 4 13 Control output heating 14 Control output cooling 15 Input error 16 RSP input error 17 HB heater burnout alarm Work Bit 1 Input Assignment A ERA A OS A The event inputs that can be used depend on the Controller model 5 60 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations 5 Switching between Normally Open and Normally Closed for Inputs A to D Click the condition to switch between normally open and normally closed inputs A to D Normally Normally open closed 4 4 6 Switching between Normally Open and Normally Closed for Work Bits Click the condition to switch between normally open and normally closed work bits Normally closed Normally open 7 Setting ON Delay Times When an input with ON delay turns ON the output will turn ON after the set delay time has elapsed The setting range is O to 9 999 The default is O disabled 8 Setting OFF Delay Times When an input with OFF delay turns OFF the output will turn OFF after the set delay time has elapsed The setting range is O to 9 999 The default is O disabled 9 Switching ON OFF Delay Time Unit Select either seconds or minutes for the ON OFF delay time unit The default is seconds If the Work Bit Operation Type is set to anything but OFF the Work Bit ON Delay and Work Bit OFF Delay will be displayed in the Adjustment Level and the settings can be c
53. 34 Detection 1 6 21 un Slope E 6 31 Delay Coefficient Heater Current 2 Remote SP SP Ramp Work Bit 6 ON 5 Value Monitor 6 22 Input Shift Set Value 6 34 SP Ram icu eg 6 22 d 6 27 uc Fall Valle Coefficient Leakage i Y Monitor 4j Band HS Alarm 1 Integral Time E a MV Lower Limit c E Work Bit 7 OFF a 9 6 27 6 32 Delay 6 34 Leakage Derivative Time 6 27 MV Change 6 33 Current 2 Rate Limit Monitor HS Alarm 2 Proportional Extraction of O E Work Bit 8 OFF amp Band Cooling 6 28 Square Root 6 33 20 Delay 6 34 z C oin OW CU l Integral Time Work Bit 1 ON Cooling 6 28 Delay 6 34 Derivative Time I ILE Work Bit 1 OFF Cooling 6 28 ir ee Delay 6 34 Dead Band 1137 nt Work Bit 2 ON 6 28 WI OM ES 6 34 6 18 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters L J ld L Adjustment Level Display This parameter is displayed after moving to the Adjustment Level The four numeric digits to identify the product code are displayed in the No 2 display When a logic operation is set a period will be displayed on the No 2 display e his parameter indicates that the Adjustment Level has been entered The Adjustment Level parameter will not be displayed again even if the Key is emm pressed in the Adjustment Level to scroll through the parameters The E5CC E5EC must be in operation and control must be 2 PID control Event Input Assignment 1
54. 4 45 I zi N c o 3 aq T O fo e o UJ c gt O c p E UJ fo gt Q L O fo o o gt O L o gt gt fo 3 o sen eA ueno uonoejeq Bunejnojpeo y 2 L p 4 Basic Operation Example Using Three 200 VAC 1 kW Heaters Normal Burnout BAT 10A gt f f 200 V 200 V y 15 lt 10A Product Product Y To CT input To CT input The heater power supply provides 15 A when the current is normal and 10 A when there is a burnout so the heater burnout detection current is calculated as follows Normal current Heater burnout current 2 Heater burnout detection current 15 10 5 12 5 A 2 Three phase Heaters a Delta Connecting Lines Example Using Three 200 VAC 2 kW Heaters Normal 173A gt 200 V Product To CT input 17 3A gt 200 V CT Product To CT input The current when each phase is normal is 17 3 A N3 x 10 A Normal Burnout Burnout Burnout 200 V 200 V 200 V PA A 200 V 15A gt t y Product _ CT t y Product CT To CT input To CT input 15A gt 15A gt CT CT Product Product To CT input To CT input Current when there is a burnout Current when there is a burnout 10 Ax V3 x N3 2 2 15 A 10 Ax V3 x 1 3 10A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load line is as follows Heater burnout detection current 17 3
55. 5 Advanced Operations e Three position Control e Set the PID ON OFF parameter to an and set the Standard or Heating Cooling Parameter to H L to perform three position control e A dead band an area where the MV is 0 can be set for either heating or cooling control Heverse operation Dead band Hysteresis heating Hysteresis cooling ON Heating side Cooling side OFF PV A Set point 5 10 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations 5 4 Using Event Inputs 5 4 1 Event Input Settings e The number of event inputs that is supported depends on the model of the Digital Controller E5CC Up to 4 event inputs E5EC Up to 6 event inputs e Event inputs can be used for switching between RUN and STOP switching between automatic and manual operation starting resetting the program inverting direct reverse operation switching the SP mode executing canceling 100 AT executing canceling 40 AT enabling disabling setting changes enabling disabling communications write canceling the alarm latch and switching the multi SP number 5 4 2 How to Use the Multi SP Function The multi SP function allows you to set up to eight set points SP O to 7 in the Adjustment Level The set point can be switched by operating the keys on the front panel or by using external input signals event inputs rt I c v 3 m lt t 5 mp 5 d mp 7 e Using Event Inputs The following
56. 5 V NR None ne N Mn None n UN M Set ia Re Ramp set point Process value Manipulated variable heating Manipulated variable cooling Lr L0 J m wv I l T NONE None STOP RUN STOP MANU Auto Manual Switch PRST Program Start DRS Invert Direct Reverse Operation RSP SP mode switch AT 2 100 AT Execute Cancel AT 1 40 AT Execute Cancel WTPT Setting Change Enable Disable CMWT Communications write enable disable LAT Alarm Latch Cancel MSPO Multi SP No switching bit O MSP1 Multi SP No switching bit 1 MSP2 Multi SP No switching bit 2 Same as Event Input Assignment 1 7 m s T 22 A Q AL A Z gm gm imd 4 mmm mmm mmm gm mmm I Ln Ln lg ze Tr Pr orn ir a q 553 gm gm q mm mm qa mm wn zz D lt Fr Eu KO LI J STOP None Event Input Assignment 1 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A Appendices Parameters Setting monitor value Display Default Unit Event Input ri Same as Event Input Assignment 1 Same as NONE None Assignment 3 Event Input Assignment 1 Event Input E Same as Event Input Assignment 1 Same as NONE None Assignment 4 Event Input Assignment de Event Input EV 5 Same as Event Input Assignment 1 Same as NONE None Assignment 5 Event Input Assignment 1 Event Input Er B Sam
57. 9 0 8 Analog input 0 01 to 9 99 0 20 Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 5 0 to 50 0 20 0 When the temperature unit is F the default is 1 4 e Related Parameters See AT Execute Cancel Adjustment Level Page 6 19 LNF Input Digital Filter e This parameter sets the time constant for the input digital filter The following diagram shows the effect on data after passing through the digital filter Function PV before passing through filter PV after passing through filter 0 63 A Time constant Input digital filter Setting range Unit Default 10 to 999 9 30 Setting E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 61 6 Parameters MH y Moving Average Count e This parameter sets the number of inputs to include in the moving average The data after moving average processing is illustrated in the following figure Function Input data Operation result Time e Use a moving average to suppress rapid changes in the input Setting range Unit Default OFF 2 4 8 16 32 OFF Setting n 7 dP MV Display This parameter is used to display the manipulated variable MV The manipulated variable is displayed when the MV Monitor Heating and MV Monitor Function Cooling parameters are set to ON and not displayed when these parameters are set to OFF a Setting range Default an Displayed aF F Not displayed Setting e Related Parameters EL MV Monitor Heat
58. Auxiliary outputs 1 2 and 3 O Reinforced insulation Functional insulation e Models with 4 Auxiliary Outputs Sensor input CT inputs and remote SP input Communications and event inputs Voltage outputs for driving SSRs current outputs and transfer output Relay outputs Auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 Auxiliary outputs 3 and 4 Reinforced insulation Functional insulation Power supply 2 22 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 Preparations 2 4 Using the Setup Tool Port Use the Setup Tool ports to connect the computer to the Digital Controller when using CX Thermo ver sion 4 4 or higher EST2 2C MV4 or later or other Support Software The E58 CIFQ2 USB Serial Conversion Cable is required for the connection For information on the models that can be used with CX Thermo contact your OMRON sales representative 1 The E58 CIFQ2 E is required to connect to the Setup Tool port on the front panel of the E5EC 9 I c o 5 e mp gt D o D mp c 3 o o Y O e 2 1 1 Procedure When the USB Serial Conversion Cable is connected to the Digital Controller the following operations are possible even if the power supply to the Digital Controller is not turned ON e Setting up the Digital Controller from a computer Special software is required e Changing settings by using key operations on the Digital Control
59. Control Heating cooling control can be used with control output 2 and auxiliary outputs 1 to 4 Heating cooling control operates when H i heating cooling is selected for the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter The following functions are assigned to outputs in the default status Parameter name Display Initial status Ono aes ro Control output for heating Assignment Contre eave aue Not assigned Assignment Auxiliary Output 1 E Aes Assignment Auxiliary Output 2 Sue Aen Assignment Auxiliary Output 3 suba Maia Assignment Auxiliary Output 4 Assignment E5EC only EN MRNA If the Controller is equipped with HB HS alarm detection it is set by default to HH Heater Alarm Each output assignment is automatically initialized as shown below when changing between standard and heating cooling control Assigned Output Functions Controllers with Three or Fewer Auxiliary Outputs Without control output 2 With control output 2 Parameter name Display Standard Heating cooling Standard Heating cooling Control Output 1 Control output Control output Control output Control output Assignment heating heating heating heating Control Output 2 Norassigned Control output Assignment cooing Assignment Auxiliary Output 2 Ain Control output Aint Alarm 2 Assignment cooing Assignment Controllers with Four Auxiliary Outputs Without control output 2 With control output 2 Parameter name Display Standard Heating co
60. DUE EU lower limit alarms 1 999 to 9 999 MV absolute value upper limit or lower limit alarms LP 199 9 to 999 9 o 0 EU Alarm Value Upper Limit2 ALZH 1 999 to 9 999 Alarm Value Lower Limit2 AicL 1 999 to 9 999 JO EU Alarm Value 3 All alarms except for MV absolute value upper limit or EU lower limit alarms 1 999 to 9 999 MV absolute value upper limit or lower limit alarms 199 9 to 999 9 Alarm Value Upper Limit 3 ALIH 1 999 to 9 999 Alarm Value Lower Limit 3 Ai 3L 1 999 to 9 999 le Cu EU Alarm Value 4 All alarms except for MV absolute value upper limit or SEMEN EU lower limit alarms 1 999 to 9 999 MV absolute value upper limit or lower limit alarms MEN LENI 199 9 to 999 9 JO EU Alarm Value Upper Limit 4 ALHH 1 999 to 9 999 Alarm Value Lower Limit 4 AL4L 1 999 to 9 999 Jo EU MV Monitor Heating 5 0 to 105 5 standard 0 0 to 105 0 heating cooling UV Monitor Cooling 0 010 105 E A 1 A 16 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A Appendices A 6 2 Adjustment Level Parameters Setting monitor value Display Default Unit Adjustment Level Display AT Execute Cancel OFF AT Cancel OFF None AT 2 100 AT Execute AT 1 40 AT Execute Communications Mii OFF ON None Writing Heater Current 1 Value ma M o to 55 0 Monitor Heater Burnout 0 0 to 50 0 Detection 1 He
61. Derivative Time D Proportional Band Cooling C P Integral Time Cooling C l and Derivative Time Cooling C D gt o g D e D 3 2 5 ae Y g O O 5 D F 9 5 7 E o n1 D 5 c D o D c Adjustment Level Proportional Proportional Band Band Cooling Bulun oyny IV 1 6 7 Integral Integral Time 3 Time 4 Cooling Derivative Derivative Time Time Cooling e AT Operations AT is started when either HE 2 100 AT or HE 40 AT is specified for the AT Execute Cancel parameter The TUNE indicator will light during execution Only the Communications Writing RUN STOP AT Execution Cancel and Program Start parameters can be changed during AT execution Other parameters cannot be changed AT Calculated Gain The AT Calculated Gain parameter sets the gain for when PID values are calculated using AT When emphasizing response decrease the set value When emphasizing stability increase the set value AT Hysteresis The AT Hysteresis parameter sets the hysteresis when switching ON and OFF for the limit cycle operation during auto tuning E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 23 4 Basic Operation Limit Cycle MV Amplitude The Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter sets the MV amplitude for limit cycle operation during auto tuning This setting is disabled for 100 AT e 40 AT e The width of MV variation in the limit cycle can be ch
62. Display Disabled PV SP MV Can be set z a PV SP Soak time remain Can be set La O al J I COIN Oo A GW N a m a r ir rr 9 Alarm value lower limit 1 Can be set Hl L 10 Alarm value 2 Can be set HL d Lt m n 12 13 14 15 18 7 18 19 PV SP Internal SP 2 z 22 23 1 With the E5CC only the PV and SP can be displayed 2 The Alarm Value 1 parameter is displayed even if the Alarm 1 Type parameter is set for no alarm However any value that is set is not valid Li Lt m mi mj rm Lt L Lt m L i Li Li Li n p I r E P e M 6 80 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters SPd Pw sSP No 1 Display Selection oc PV SP No 2 Display Selection These parameters set the items to display on the No 1 display No 2 display and No 3 dis play Only the E5EC has a No 3 display Function A Set value No 3 display ESEC only Nothing is displayed Nothing is played Nothing s displayed Nothing s displayed Manipuated value Set point Multi SP No Set point Soak time remain terna se point ramp SP 8 Set point Alarm value 1 The Alarm Value 1 parameter is displayed even if the Alarm 1 Type parameter is set for no alarm How
63. E5EC 21 mA if there are two control outputs Control Output 2 Control output 2 12 VDC 20 PNP max load current 21 mA with short circuit protection circuit 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 20 mA DC Load 500 Q max Current output 3 Resolution Approx 10 000 Two Auxiliary Outputs SPST NO 250 VAC 3 A resistive load electrical durability 100 000 operations Auxiliary output Relay outputs MID app earl dad sn TOTA Three Auxiliary Outputs E5CC or Four Auxiliary Outputs E5EC SPST NO 250 VAC 2 A resistive load electrical durability 100 000 operations Min applicable load 5 V 10 mA Control method 2 PID or ON OFF control Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys Indication method 11 segment digital displays and individual indicators Other functions Depend on the model Ambient temperature 10 to 55 C with no condensation or icing with 3 year guarantee 10 to 50 C Ambient humidity 25 to 85 Storage temperature 25 to 65 C with no condensation or icing Altitude 2 000 m max Recommended fuse T2A 250 VAC time lag low shut off capacity Installation environment Installation Category II Pollution Class 2 IEC 61010 1 compliant 1 Forinput setting ranges refer to A 7 Sensor Input Setting Range Indication Range Control Range 2 When connecting the ES2 HB THB connect it 1 1 3 With the E5CC you cannot select a relay output or current output for control output 2 A 2 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperat
64. Function Set fur ting Level to display H5 HS Alarm Use HS Alarm Use The default is a enabled 2 Set the set value to a enabled 4 42 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation e Setting the Leakage Current Value Monitor 1 Press the Key several times in the Adjustment Level to dis ACUS IMENLLCVGI play LL F Leakage Current 1 Value Monitor Leak Curent Value Monitor 2 Check the leakage current from the CT input that is used to detect heater short The monitoring range is 0 0 to 55 0 A e Setting Heater Short Alarm Detection Press the Key several times in the Adjustment Level to dis de play 45 HS Alarm 1 HS Alarm 1 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the set value to 2 5 Refer to 4 12 4 Calculating Detection Current Values when you set the value I zi N c o 3 aq T O fo e o UJ c gt O c p E UJ fo gt Q L O fo o o gt O L o gt gt fo 3 o e f there is little difference between the current in normal and abnormal states detection may be unstable To stabilize detection set a current difference of at least 1 0 A for heaters lower than 10 0 A and at least 2 5 A for heaters of 10 0 A or higher If the heater current is too low loop the load line several times through a CT as shown in the following diagram Looping it through once will double the detected current Load
65. Heater Burnout Latch parameter must be set to OFF HB and HS alarms must be supported H hi Heater Burnout Hysteresis e This parameter sets hysteresis for heater burnout detection Function Setting range Unit Default 110500 x Setting e Related Parameters Ses HB ON OFF Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 58 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 59 P oo gt o lt D 5 o O o Tl c 5 o et O 5 o D 5 e D lt o 6 Parameters Temperature input standard control 2 PID control GE B h ST Stable Range must be set The ST parameter must be set to ON e The setting of this parameter determines when ST operates This parameter cannot be used when ST is set to OFF Function n Setting range Unt Detaui 0 1 to 999 9 15 0 o Related Parameters see Input Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 39 PID ON OFF Initial Setting Level Page 6 41 ST Initial Setting Level Page 6 42 Setting Hi ro 2 PID control must be set The ST parameter must be set to OFF e Normally use the default for this parameter e This parameter sets the 2 PID control a constant Function a Setting range Default 0 00 to 1 00 0 65 Setting e Related Parameters Sec PID ON OFF Initial Setting Level Page 6 41 ST Initial Setting Level Page 6 42 E L d Li Integral Derivative Time Unit Control must be set to 2 PID control This parameter sets the time unit for t
66. Lower Limit 1 aE Oho A L p L Alarm Value Lower Limit 2 H L j L Alarm Value Lower Limit 3 Pi O Lo D fo H L HL Alarm Value Lower Limit 4 o 3 EV V lll UIS25 DPI DEI dm These parameters individually set the alarm value upper and lower limits when a mode for setting the upper and lower limits is selected for the Alarm 1 to 4 Type parameter Initial Setting Level e These parameters set the upper and lower limits for alarms 1 to 4 e During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the currently selected Function sensor and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting n Setting range Unit Default 1999 to 9999 0 e Related Parameters See Input Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 39 Scaling Upper Limit Initial Setting Level Page 6 40 Scaling Lower Limit Initial Setting Level Page 6 40 Decimal Point Initial Setting Level Page 6 40 Alarm 1 to 4 Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 44 Alarm 1 to 4 Hysteresis Initial Setting Level Page 6 48 Standby Sequence Reset Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 57 Auxiliary Output 1 to 4 Open in Alarm Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 58 Alarm 1 to 4 Latch Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 63 Setting E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 15 6 Parameters a MV Monitor Heating The MV Display parameter must be set to ON This parameter is used to monitor the manipulated variable fo
67. O O o O O Z O Tl Tl O O o e ON OFF Control In ON OFF control the control output is turned ON when the process value is lower than the current set point and the control output is turned OFF when the process value is higher than the current set point reverse operation E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 13 4 Basic Operation 4 6 Setting Output Specifications 4 6 1 Control Periods e Set the output periods control periods Though a shorter period provides Control Period better control performance it is recommended that the control period be set to Heating ws 20 seconds or longer for a relay output to preserve the service life of the relay Control Period After the settings have been made in the initial setup readjust the control Cooling period as required by means such as trial operation e Set the control periods in the Control Period Heating and Control Period Cooling parameters in the Initial Setting Level The default is 20 seconds for a relay output and 2 seconds for a voltage output for driving SSR e The control periods are used only for PID control e The Control Period Cooling parameter is used only for heating cooling control e When control output is used as a current output the Control Period parameter cannot be used 4 6 2 Direct and Reverse Operation e Direct operation increases the manipulated variable whenever the process value
68. OFF Operating Procedure e Setting 2 PID Control Initial Setting Level p N o O i gt e mp gt O a mp gt O lt S af fo E O 3 1 Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to display L NEL PID ON OFF PID ON OFF 2 Press the 4 or Key to select P d PID The default is aa ON OFF control e Turning OFF Self tuning Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to a Setting Level display 5E ST self tuning o 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the value to of F The default is al e Setting the MV Change Rate Limit Adjustment Level n MV Change Rate Limit 1 Press the Key several times in the Adjustment Level to dis play ofi MV Change Rate Limit gt n ri Li me ent 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the value to 5 0 The default is 0 0 s jur ajey ebueyo AW L Z1 S E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 47 5 Advanced Operations 5 18 Setting the PF Key 5 18 1 PF Setting Function Key PF Setting Advanced e Pressing the PF Key for at least one second executes the operation set in the Function Setting Level PF Setting parameter The default is 5HF digit shift Set value Display Setting Function OFF RUN STOP R S AT 2 AT 1 LAT A M PFDP SHFT GFF Disabled Does not operate as a function key Pn RUN Species RUN status 5S
69. Operation Parameters Display Application Level 5 HL Standard or Specifying control Initial Setting Level CNEL PID ON OFF Specifying control Initial Setting Level WENN ae are Direct Reverse Specifying control Initial Setting Level L dh Dead Band Heating cooling Adjustment Level NN dE H Hysteresis Heating ON OFF control Adjustment Level LH 35 Hysteresis Cooling ON OFF control Adjustment Level 4 8 2 Settings To execute ON OFF control set the Set Point PID ON OFF and Hysteresis parameters co c 2 5 O O Tl Tl O O 5 mp o Setting the PID ON OFF Parameter Confirm that the PID ON OFF parameter is set to a ias in the Initial Set ting Level Operating Procedure Initial Setting Level mn 1 Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to display L NEL PID ON OFF The default is a a ON OFF control sumas z 8 r Setting the SP In this example the set point is set to 200 C The set value i e the SP is shown at the bottom of the display Operating Procedure Select PV SP in the Operation Level Operation Level PV SP The default is O The new set value can be saved by pressing the 2 Key or it will go into effect after 3 seconds has elapsed 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the SP to 200 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 21 4 Basic Operation Setting the Hysteresis Set the hysteresis to 2 0 C Op
70. Output Lower Limit Event Input Assignment 1 Event Input Assignment 2 Event Input Assignment 3 Event Input Assignment 4 Event Input Assignment 5 Event Input Assignment 6 Extraction of Square Root Enable Move to Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 49 co 6 4 6 50 6 50 6 51 6 51 6 51 6 53 6 53 6 Parameters LN E Input Type e This parameter sets the type of sensor e When this parameter is changed the set point limiter is changed to the defaults If the Function limiter must be specified set the SP Upper Limit and SP Lower Limit parameters Initial Setting Level again e Set one of the set values from the following table The default is 5 e f a resistance thermometer is eee connected while a setting for other than a resistance thermometer is in effect 5 E A will be displayed To clear the 5 F display check the wiring and then cycle the power ensor Temperature Temperature Q Input type sen Set value P P i range in C range in F SEIN 20010850 300to 1500 Pt100 a 199 9 to 500 0 199 9 to 900 0 ERES 2 00to1000 0 0 to 210 0 thermometer 8 1999105000 1999109000 JPt100 0 0 to 210 0 300 to 2300 6 200105000 0 010 900 0 7 10010850 100to 1500 8 200104000 00107500 Ls f 9 40 2001070 199 9 to 700 0 r 300 to 1100 thermocouple Lb 2 10010850 10019 1500 300 to 700 199 9 to 700 0
71. Output 1 Assignment a Control output heating Control Output 2 Assignment NaNE 9 Control output cooling Alarm 12 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 2 Alarm 4 Heater alarm HB alarm HS alarm 2 Input error E Setting gt gt F n nm am E n ra n e J r e 2 nu a r es Lut bue I Ij Li y r _ a 2 d crc UN na e L9 Bae 2 SER RSP input error P ENd Program end output FUN RUN output EM Integrated Alarm Work bit 124 Work bit 224 Work bit 3 24 Work bit 4 2 Work bit 5 24 Work bit 6 24 Work bit 72 4 Work bit 8 24 AU Pu Ltt Li El rE gt a a Lt bin 1 IfL nis assigned for standard control a value equivalent to 0 is output 2 Can be selected for relay and voltage outputs for driving SSR only 3 Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled 4 WR1 to WRE are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used 5 f the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter is set to heating cooling control control automatically switches to a E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters Lm c
72. PLII 10 to 70 C 60 to 120 C 115 to 165 C 140 to 260 C Analog input 4 to 20 mA None O to 20 mA 1to5V Oto5V 29 0to 10 V Scaling Upper Limit PENSA F Scaling lower limit 1 to 9 999 000 OS None Scaling Lower Limit INCL 1 999 to scaling upper limit 1 rT io None Decimal Point qp CC 1 CA Ni HCCRKAR zuomzccrmu4 A 18 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Parameters Temperature Unit SP Upper Limit SP Lower Limit PID ON OFF Standard or Heating Cooling ST Program Pattern Control Period Heating Control Period Cooling Direct Reverse Operation Alarm 1Type Alarm 1 Hysteresis Alarm 2 Type E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A Appendices Setting monitor value Display Default Unit LERNEN Temperature input SP lower limit 1 to Input setting 1300 EU range upper limit Analog input SP lower limit 1 to scaling upper limit 000 OS Temperature input Input setting range lower limit to SP upper limit 1 Analog input Scaling lower limit to SP upper limit 1 p Seconds Standard or heating cooling OFF ON OFF STOP CONT ON OFF 2 PID aNoF Pid ON OFF None 0 1 0 2 0 5 or 1 to 99 output 20 Voltage output for driving SSR 2 0 1 0 2 0 5 or 1 to 99 i Relay output 20 Voltage output for driving SSR 2 nREV Reverse operation direct operation Reverse N
73. PV or specified parameter No 2 display SP or specified parameter value Top panel Setup Tool port fr Ba 6 o Top View of E5CC 6 6 e 000 000 YO e 8 i c A 000 a Use the A Keys to set the 00 a parameter p a dl Press S Key once to go to Adjustment Level o Use P9 Key to change the digit default s Press Key for at least 3 seconds to go to Initial Setting Level gt Use the Key to change to another parameter E5EC Front panel Top View of E5EC Temperature unit Bic No 1 display i PV or specified parameter 0 No 2 displa SP or specified parameter value anne No 3 display DD BD Manipulated value or other value DT ds 0 ansat Use the Keys to set E mm the parameter Dan R e Use P9 Key to change the digit default setting Use the Key to change to another parameter Front panel Setup Tool port Press Key once to go to Adjustmen
74. STOP Event input OFF RUN Switching between Auto and Manual Control When the Event Input Assignment parameter is set to MANU auto manual manual control will start when event input turns ON Auto control will start when the input turns OFF The MANU indicator will light during manual control E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations Setting input contact Status Event input OFF Automatic Event input Manual e Controlling the Start of the Simple Program Function When the Event Input Assignment parameter is set to PRST program start the program will start when the event input turns ON The program will be reset when the input turns OFF and the RUN STOP status will automatically switch to STOP mode If the program END output is ON the program END output will turn OFF Setting Input contact Status Event input OFF Reset Event input Start e Control by Inverting Direct Reverse Operation When the Event Input Assigment parameter is set to DRS Invert Direct Reverse Operation and the Direct Reverse Operation parameter is set for reverse operation control starts with direct operation cooling control when the event input turns ON and control starts with reverse operation heating control when the event input turns OFF 7 Direct Reverse Setting 3 U Status Operation parameter Event input OFF Direct operation cooling Direct operation cooling Reverse operation Reverse
75. Set Point Upper Limit Set Point Lower Limit or Temperature Unit If the MV for heating or MV for cooling is selected the Transfer Output Lower Limit and Transfer Output Upper Limit parameters will be initialized to 100 0 and 0 0 respectively when a switch is 5 34 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations made between standard control and heating cooling control using the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter e The output current when transfer output signal is set to 4 to 20 mA the transfer output upper limit is set to 90 0 and the transfer output lower limit is set to 10 0 is shown in the following graph e For scaling from 0 0 to 100 0 the output for 5 0 to 0 0 will be the same value as for 0 0 and the output for 100 0 to 105 0 will be the same value as for 100 0 Output current mA DOH ld O 10 a dag MVA Transfer output Transfer output lower limit upper limit The above graph is for when transfer output signal is set to 4 to 20 mA T b C2 c e 3 e mp gt O fo 3 0 O O c mp Lo c mp uonoun J 1ndino 4eJsueJ L E L S E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 35 5 Advanced Operations The following procedure sets the transfer output for an SP range of 50 to 200 Operating Procedure e Setting the Transfer Output Type Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to a S
76. Setting Level You can use the Transfer Output Signal parameter to specify whether to output a current or voltage from the transfer output Terminal Arrangement E5CC E5EC Option number 006 Option number 011 012 013 or 014 um He IO wees Transfer output e Transfer Output Type Initial Setting Level You can use the Transfer Output Type parameter to specify any of five types of data to output Transfer output type Setting range OFF F Set point 5P SP lower limit to SP upper limit Set point during SP ramp SP lower limit to SP upper limit PV py Input setting range lower limit to input setting range upper limit or Scaling lower limit to scaling upper limit MV monitor heating My 5 0 to 105 0 heating cooling control 0 0 to 105 0 MV monitor cooling LoM 0 0 to 105 0 The default is OFF e Transfer Scaling e Reverse scaling is possible by setting the Transfer Output Lower Limit parameter larger than the Transfer Output Upper Limit parameter If the Transfer Output Lower Limit and Transfer Output Upper Limit parameters are set to the same value the transfer output will be output continuously at 0 e f the SP SP during SP ramp or PV is selected the Transfer Output Upper Limit and Transfer Output Lower Limit parameters will be forcibly initialized to the respective upper and lower setting limits if any of the following parameters is changed Input Type Scaling Upper Limit Scaling Lower Limit
77. Square Root Low cut Point Adjustment Level Page 6 33 2 DIM 7 I Move to Advanced Function The Initial Setting Communications Protect mio 5 Setting Level parameter must be set to 0 m o o e Set the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter set value to 169 a e Move to the advanced function setting level either by pressing Key or S Key or by 2 Function waiting or two seconds to elapse e Related Parameter See Initial Setting Communication Protect Protect Level Page 6 4 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 53 6 Parameters 6 8 Advanced Function Setting Level The Advanced Function Setting Level is used for optimizing Controller performance To move to this level input the password 169 from the Initial Set ting Level To be able to enter the password the Initial Set ting Communications Protect parameter in the Pro tect Level must be set to O Moving to Advanced Function Setting Level 1 2 6 Move from the Operation Level to the Protect Level Display the Initial Setting Communications Protect parameter lt lt Communications Protect Change the set value to 0 Initial Setting Move from the Protect Level to the Operation Level to the Initial Setting Level Display the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter _ Move to Advanced May lt Function Setting Level H Set 169 Default O Change the set value to
78. TIME rt 6 27 Integral Time Cooling 4 13 5 9 6 28 Integral Derivative Time Unit 6 27 6 28 6 60 Integrated Alarm Assignment 5 24 6 74 LBA Bald ecc dientes bus 5 29 6 71 LBA Detection Time 5 29 6 70 EBA CVG ET PP 5 29 6 70 Leakage Current 1 Monitor 6 11 6 23 Leakage Current 2 Monitor 6 12 6 24 Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 4 24 6 61 Loop Burnout Alarm LBA 5 28 Manual Control Level sseeeesssssse 5 32 Manual MV Initial Value 5 32 6 67 Manual MV Limit Enable 5 32 6 77 Manual Output Method esesssssse 6 67 Manual Reset Value cccccseccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 6 29 Minimum Output ON OFF Band 6 79 Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 sssssseeee 6 80 Monitor Setting Item Display 1 to 5 6 35 Move to Advanced Function Setting Level 6 53 Move to Calibration Level 6 83 Move to Protect Level eeeeeeeeesseeesss 6 3 Move to Protect Level Time 6 64 Move to the Protect Level ssse 5 20 Mov
79. The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions 4 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Safety Precautions Safety Precautions Definition of Precautionary Information The following notation is used in this manual to provide precautions required to ensure safe usage of the product The safety precautions that are provided are extremely important to safety Always read and heed the information provided in all safety precautions The following notation is used Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided PN CAUTI O N may result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage Symbols Symbol Meaning e General Caution Indicates non specific general cautions warnings and dangers Caution e Electrical Shock Caution Indicates possibility of electric shock under specific conditions e General Prohibition Prohibition Indicates non specific general prohibitions e General Caution Mandatory Indicates non specific general cautions warnings and dangers Caution E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Safety Precautions e Safety Precautions CAUTION Minor injury due to electric shock may occasionally occur Do not touch the terminals while power is being supplied Electric shock fire or mal
80. UJ D D 5 O D 5 e Q sJojeueJed paBueyo Buike dsiq L 8 S 5 Advanced Operations 5 9 OR Output of Alarms 5 9 1 Integrated Alarm You can use an integrated alarm to output an OR of alarms 1 to 4 the HB alarm the HS alarm the input error and the RSP input error Set the Integrated Alarm Assignment parameter ALMA and then assign the integrated alarm FL M to an auxiliary output or a control output e Parameters Parameter bass Value da Level display display ALM Integrated alarm The Integrated Advanced Control Output v Alarm Assignment parameter must be LH Function Setting Assignment set separately Level Auxiliary ALM Integrated alarm The Integrated Advanced Output 1 to 4 Alarm Assignment parameter must be ALM Function Setting Assignment set separately Level Set the sum of the following values for the alarms and errors to include in the OR output 0 to 255 Alarm 1 1 Alarm 2 2 Integrated Alarm 3 4 Advanced Alarm Alarm 4 8 O to 255 Function Setting Assignment HB alarm 16 Level HS alarm 32 Input error 64 RSP input error 128 Default 49 i e an OR of alarm 1 the HB alarm and the HS alarm Operating Procedure The following procedure outputs an OR of the following alarms on auxil iary output 2 e Alarm 1 e HB alarm Hh The settings are made in the Advanced Function Setting Level Operating Procedure e Assigning the Integrated Alarm to an Auxiliary O
81. Value Set Point 1 9 ye S co Process Value Set Point 2 9 ic O_m 1711 Auto Manual Switch PID control only Added when Press the Key for at least 3 s auto manual select addition is ON M 1 for a Multi SP Set Point Selection la RGP nn Remote SP Monitor Zm M 5P eT n u Set Point During SP Ramp ya r LE r3 ES lt Heater Current 1 Value Monitor FA Fr lt ru 9 r3 Ea Heater Current 2 Value Monitor J 3 O r r Leakage Current 1 Monitor mi e wA co Leakage Current 2 Monitor Ar PR 5 a on Lm mer 4 Program Start Ln rr 7 Soak Time Remain he OIE Li RUN STOP Press the and Keys for at least 3 s Press the and Keys for at least 1 s Protect Level The time taken to move to the protect level can be adjusted by changing the Move to protect level time setting LM 1 PIC a GAPE n Lu 1 ye FO LLPE ic 1 L WEPE aFF Fur c LI LP ye TIME a PMSK aN r PRLP a nu a Move to Protect Level Displayed only when a password is set Restricts moving to protect level Ope
82. Write Enable Disable cannot be assigned to an event input 12 Changing Control Output and Auxiliary Output Settings Control output and auxiliary output assignments can be changed The items that can be changed depend on the Controller model For details refer to 4 6 Setting Output Specifications Assigning a work bit to either a control output or to an auxiliary output is also considered to be the same as assigning an alarm For example if work bit 1 is set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter then alarms 1 to 4 have been assigned 13 Displaying Parameter Guides A description of the parameters can be displayed 14 Displaying the Work Bit Use Destinations Display a list of destinations where the work bits are used Operating Procedure This procedure uses event input 2 to change to RUN or STOP Event input 2 ON RUN Event input 2 OFF STOP Work bit 1 o Event 2 Always OFF Always OFF Always OFF zox 1 Select Logic Operation File Edit View Communications TrendMonitor Options Help E di tor from the CX Thermo D GE Ge 5 K3 ViewMode Advanced Level 7 RBPe 2EB amp a tara HAT banal tree and click the Start New rojec feta Parameter Name Logic Operation Editor B utto n CH1 Channel 1 Setting Range F 01 ESEC O0445M 000 Offline mpg Adjustment Level H Manual Control Level 3 Control Stopped Parameters Edit Form H Initia
83. a different Cable 2 Installation of the driver will not be completed if the installation is canceled before it is completed Normal communications will not be possible unless the driver is installed completely If the driver is not installed completely uninstall it and then install it correctly 4 Setting Setup Tool Communications Conditions Set the communications port COM port number to be used for the CX Thermo Setup Tool to the COM port number assigned to the USB Serial Conversion Cable Refer to the E58 CIFQ2 USB Serial Conversion Cable Instruction Manual and Setup Manual for details on how to check the COM port assigned to the USB Serial Conversion Cable The communications conditions for Setup Tool COM ports are fixed as shown in the table below Set the communications conditions for the CX Thermo Setup Tool according to the following table Parameter Set value Communications Unit No 01 Communications baud rate 38 4 kbps Communications data length 7 bits Communications stop bits 2 bits Communications parity Even E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Part Names and Basic Procedures AAA 3 1 Basic Applicaton FIOW asia iaa 3 2 322 POWECON ia e ERNA a Rc i x e hc eed 3 3 3 3 Part Names Part Functions and Setting Levels 3 4 3 3 1 Part Names and Functions 0 ccc eee hrs 3 4 3 3 2 Entering Numeric Values 0 eee 3 7 d 9 3 oetting ESve
84. alarm latches A M Am Auto Manual Specifies reversing Auto Manual status PFDP PFdP Monitor Setting Item Specifies the monitor setting item display Select the monitor setting item using the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters Advanced Function Setting Level SHFT SHFE Digit Shift Operates as a Digit Shift Key when settings are being changed 1 When AT cancel is specified it means that AT is cancelled regardless of whether the AT currently being executed is 100 AT or 40 AT 2 Alarms 1 to 4 the HB alarm and the HS alarm are cancelled 3 For details on auto manual operations using the PF Key refer to 5 12 Performing Manual Control e Related Parameters See Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 80 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 79 pP oo gt o lt D 5 o D o Tl c 5 o et O 5 o D zi 5 e D lt o 6 Parameters PF di Monitor Setting Item 1 HF dc Monitor Setting Item 2 HF d 3 Monitor Setting Item 3 The PF Setting parameter must be set to PFDP PF d Monitor Setting Item 4 HF d Monitor Setting Item 5 e When the PF Key is set to display monitor setting items pressing the PF Key will display in order the contents of the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters The contents of these Function parameters are shown in the following table Refer to the relevant parameters for the setting monitor ranges Set Remarks value
85. alarm value The alarm output is ON while the PV is equal to or lower than the alarm value This alarm provides a standby sequence The alarm output is ON while the PV is equal to or higher than the alarm value This alarm provides a standby sequence The alarm output is ON while the PV is equal to or lower than the alarm value The alarm output turns ON when the control loop is broken E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Operation Example ON OFF Temperature Upper limit alarm point e g 100 C Alarm value e g 100 C Example ON OFF Temperature Lower limit alarm point e g 100 C Alarm value e g 100 C Example ON OFF Temperature Upper limit alarm point e g 100 C Alarm value e g 100 C Example ON OFF Temperature Lower limit alarm point e g 100 C Alarm value e g 100 C There is assumed to be a loop burnout alarm if the control deviation SP PV is greater than the threshold set in the LBA Level parameter and if the PV is not reduced by at least the value set in the LBA Band parameter within a specific period of time The LBA detection time and LBA band are set in parameters PV LBA level SP ___ LBA band 4 LBA detection time Time MV 10096 096 Time LBA Alarm Output C mil OFF Time e U O o O o c 0 D ct O c 5
86. and hunting are reduced Overshooting and undershooting occur Hunting occurs Decreased The Controller starts up faster dnjes enuen 6 v Overshooting undershooting and stabilization times are reduced but fine hunting occurs on changes in the Increased curve itself Overshooting and undershooting increase and it takes time to return to the set point Decreased E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 29 4 Basic Operation 4 10 Alarm Outputs e Alarms can be used on either two or three auxiliary outputs on the E5CC or on two or four auxiliary outputs on the E5EC For relay outputs or voltage outputs for driving SSRs alarms can also be used by setting the Control Output 1 Assignment or Control Output 2 Assignment parameter to any of the alarms from alarm 1 to 4 The alarm output condition is determined by a combination of the alarm type alarm value alarm hysteresis and the standby sequence For details refer to 4 77 Alarm Hysteresis e This section describes the Alarm Type Alarm Value Upper limit Alarm and Lower limit Alarm parameters 4 10 1 Alarm Types e Select one of the following eight alarm types for the alarm 1 type Alarm 1 Type Deviation deviation range absolute value LBA PV change rate SP MV or RSP alarm e Select one of the following seven alarm types for the alarm 2 type alarm 3 Alarm 2 Type type and alarm 4 type Deviation deviation range absolute value PV c
87. are automat ically set according to the Heating Cooling Tuning Method parameter when AT or ST is exe Function Cuted a Parameter Setting range Unit Default Proportional Band Temperature input 0 1 to 999 9 8 0 Senno Cooling 10 0 Integral Time Integral Derivative O to 9999 Seconds 233 Integral Derivative 0 0 to 999 9 Seconds 233 0 fimeunterors e Ime Time integral Derivative O to 9999 Seconds Integral Derivative 0 0 to 999 9 Seconds LHP TH A The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral Derivative Time Unit parameter The Proportional Band Cooling Integral Time Cooling and Derivative Time Cooling parameters are initialized if the Integral Derivative Time Unit parameter is changed e Related Parameters ELE AT Execute Cancel Adjustment Level Page 6 19 Integral Derivative Time Unit Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 60 The control system must be set to heating coolin L dh Dead Band Monde y g g This parameter sets the output dead band width for heating cooling control A negative setting sets an overlapping band e This parameter sets an area in which the control output is O centering around the set point for a heating cooling control Function a seine ange Unt Default Temperature input 199 9 to 999 9 a 19 99 to 99 99 0 00 Analog input 6 28 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters B The control must be stan
88. are displayed in the No 2 display 5 22 2 Using Logic Operations Logic operations are set using the CX Thermo e Starting Logic Operations There are two ways to start logic operations e Select Logic Operation Editor from the CX Thermo tree and click the Start Button e uneitied lolx File Edit View Communications TrendMonitor Options Help Cc Wl 5E View Mode Advanced Level Ime Um Em En mia z xl Channel Name Channel 1 NewProject Parameter Name Logic Operation E ditor ni CH1 Channel 1 xf 01 ESEC OO4A 5M O00 Offline H E Adjustment Level mcg Manual Control Level Control Stopped Parameters H Initial Setting Level Setting Range Edit Form H E Communications Setting Level Eg Advanced Function Setting Level The logic operation function logically handles outputs and operation combining the AND OR logic e Select Logic Operation Editor from the CX Thermo Options Menu o untitied lol xi File Edit View Communications TrendMonitor Options Help D E Al View Mode Advances Recover Temporary Settings y AAN i peer aria i ke Ie eL ed Parameter Name Setting Range Edit Form mg Adjustment Level H Q Manual Control Level 71 423 Control Stopped Parameters 4 3 Initial Setting Level 23 Communications Setting Level mcg Advanced Function Setting Level The logic operation function logically handles outpu
89. change to the Initial Setting Communications Protect parameter Press the or Key at the Initial Setting Communications Protect parameter to change the set value to 0 enable moving to Advanced Function Setting Level Now the Ala Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter can be displayed in the Initial Setting Level The default is disable moving to Advanced Function Setting Level Press the and Keys simultaneously for at least 1 second in the Protect Level The display will change from the Protect Level to the Operation Level E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Protect Level OE OIE Operation Adjustment Li Protect pem Initial Setting Communications Protect o e 8Bumes uonoun peoueApy eui 0 DUMON v L p i Moving to Advanced Function Setting Level is disabled Protect Level Initial Setting Communications Protect Operation Level PV SP I L h O S 5 Q o D D D 5 o D 5 ae r O lt D 0 4 Basic Operation Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level after Clearing Protection After you have set the L PLE Initial Setting Communications Protect parameter to enable moving to Advanced Function Setting Level select AMar Initial Setting Level e Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level 1 Press the C Key for at least 3 seconds in the Operation Level The No 1 display will f
90. classified into levels according to their applications These lev els are called setting levels The setting levels consist of some basic setting levels and other setting lev els Setting levels Basic setting levels Other setting levels Monitor Setting Item Level The setting levels are described in more detail in the following tables e Basic Setting Levels The basic setting levels are the levels that are used most frequently m ration Application of the parameters Setting level name eden Level that is used for operation Operating Level that is used for adjustments Operating Level that is used for initial settings Stopped e Other Setting Levels The other setting levels are used as required T l ration Application of the parameters Setting level name P Level that is used for communications settings Stopped Level that is used for manual operation Operating Level that is used to set protection Operating Level that is used for calibration Stopped Level that is displayed when the XP Key is Monitor Setting Item Level Operating pressed The Operation Level Adjustment Level Initial Setting Level and Advanced Function Setting Level are used most commonly They are therefore described separately from the other setting levels under Basic Setting Levels below To use the Key to display the Monitor Setting Items change the setting of the PF Setting parameter to Or IC Fre E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers U
91. connect terminating resistance at each end of the line If the E5CC EBEC is the end node 120 Q 1 2 W terminating resistance is used Be sure that the combined resistance with the host device is 54 2 minimum Supply the specified power supply voltage Supply the specified power supply voltage Set the same values for the baud rate protocol data length stop bits and parity on all nodes Use the same unit number Set each unit number for only one node Use a line monitor to check the commands Check operation using a sample program Shorten the send data wait time in the Controller or increase the response wait time in the host device T e O c o D 0 O O ct 5 e The Controller does not return responses for broadcast commands The response must always be read after sending a command except for broadcast commands After receiving a response wait at least 2 ms before sending the next command Initialize the reception buffer in the host device before sending the first command and after turning OFF the power to the Controller Try using a slower baud rate Separate the communications cable from the source of noise Use a shielded twisted pair cable for the communications cable Use as short a communications cable as possible and do not lay or loop extra cable To prevent inductive noise do not run the communications cable parallel to a power line If noise countermeasures are difficult to impl
92. display e When executing self tuning turn ON power for the load e g heater at the same time as or before supplying power to the Digital Controller If power is turned ON for the Digital Controller before turning ON power for the load self tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved 8 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Precautions for Safe Use e A switch or circuit breaker should be provided close to Digital Controller The switch or circuit breaker should be within easy reach of the operator and must be marked as a disconnecting means for Digital Controller e Do not use paint thinner or similar chemical to clean with Use standard grade alcohol e Design the system e g control panel considering the 2 seconds of delay in setting the Digital Controller s output after the power supply is turned ON e The output will turn OFF when you move to the Initial Setting Level Take this into consideration when performing control e The number of non volatile memory write operations is limited Therefore use RAM write mode when frequently overwriting data during communications or other operations e Use suitable tools when taking the Digital Controller apart for disposal Sharp parts inside the Digital Controller may cause injury e Do not connect cables to both the front panel Setup Tool port and the top panel Setup Tool port at the same time The Digital Controller may be da
93. displayed PV SP Nothing displayed PV Nothing displayed Nothing displayed SP SP character display Nothing displayed PV SP MV PV SP Multi SP No PV SP Soak time remain PV SP Internal SP ramp SP PV SP Alarm value 1 SP Tracking SPEF OFF ON laFF aN OFF None Heating Cooling Tuning 0 Same as heating control None 3 Water cooling RUN RUN AT 2 100 AT execute cancel A M Auto manual 1 None PV SP Alarm value 1 Derivative Time Cooling C D Monitor Setting Item 4 Prag al Same as Monitor Setting Item 1 OO None Selection 0 JO ci ON PV SP No 2 Display Selection MV Display Selection O MV Heating C O MV Cooling E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A 25 a o U AY e 3 D mp D O o O 9 et O 5 E 0 mp 0 9 97 Bunjes UoNOUNY peoueApy 9 9 v A Appendices Parameters Setting monitor value Display Default Unit PV Decimal Point Py de OFF ON ON None Display OFF PV Status Display OFF OFF None Function MANU Manual STOP Stop ALM1 Alarm 1 ALM2 Alarm 2 ALMs Alarm 3 ALMA Alarm 4 ALM OR of alarms 1 to 4 HA Heater alarm SV Status Display Gr SE OFF OFF Function MANU Manual STOP Stop ALM1 Alarm 1 ALM2 Alarm 2 ALMs Alarm 3 ALM4 Alarm 4 ALM OR of alarms 1 to 4 HA Heater alarm Display Refresh Period eal OFF 0 25 0 5 1 0 Second Move to Calibration 1999 to 9999 None Level 1 If the Manual MV Limit E
94. displayed in the No 2 display without pressing the 4 Key The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF For Controllers that have a transfer output you can continue by calibrating the transfer output For detailed setting methods refer to 7 6 Calibrating the Transfer Output E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 7 User Calibration 7 4 Resistance Thermometer Calibration In this example calibration is shown for Controller with a resistance thermometer set as the input type Use connecting wires of the same thickness 1 Connect the power supply 2 Connect a precision resistance box called a 6 dial variable resistor in this manual to the resistance thermometer input terminals as shown in the following diagram Input power supply 6 dial variable resistor Input power supply 6 dial variable resistor uoneJqi e 49j1euroul9u SDUBISISSY p Z 7 3 Turn the power ON 4 Move to the Calibration Level This starts the 30 minute aging timer This timer provides an approximate timer for aging After 30 minutes have elapsed the No 2 display changes to 0 You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if 0 is not displayed e Input type O 5 Execute calibration for the main input Press the lt 2 Key to display the count value for each input type The No 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in hexadecimal Set the 6 dial as follows
95. e O mp 3 D U O o c o lt oJnpeooJg 9ISeg C Vp 3 Part Names and Basic Procedures Alarm 1 PV change rate alarm H SP absolute value upper limit alarm 5 SP absolute value lower limit alarm MV absolute value upper limit alarm n a m MV absolute value lower limit alarm A RSP absolute value upper limit alarm IH HSP absolute value lower limit alarm The alarm output turns ON if the change in the PV within the specified calculation period exceeds a specific width The alarm output is ON while the SP is equal to or higher than the alarm value The alarm output is ON while the SP is equal to or lower than the alarm value The alarm output is ON while the MV is equal to or higher than the alarm value The alarm output is ON while the MV is equal to or lower than the alarm value The alarm output is ON while the HSP is equal to or higher than the alarm value The alarm output is ON while the HSP is equal to or lower than the alarm value E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 PV Operation Change rate width Time PV rate of change calculation period PV Change Rate Alarm Output ON OFF o Po Time The PV rate of change calculation period and the alarm value are set in parameters Example ON OFF Upper limit alarm point e g 100 C Alarm value e
96. e The MV to be output for input errors can be set The MV at stop takes priority when stopped and the manual MV takes priority in manual mode Parameter name Setting range Ui Default MV at PV ERROR 5 0 to 105 0 for standard control 105 0 to 105 0 for heating cooling con 0 0 trol Note The order of priority is as follows Manual MV MV at stop MV at PV error e The order of priority of the MVs is illustrated in the following diagram MV upper limit MV at PV Error Manual MV RUN STOP PID calculations Auto manual switch Y zi Y O c mp o c mp gt 2 c 0 mp 3 D 5 mp TI c 5 o et O 5 o MV at Stop MV lower limit When the Manual MV Limit Enable parameter is set to ON the setting range will be the MV lower limit to the MV upper limit 1041 Ad 1 AW SI G E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 43 5 Advanced Operations 5 16 Using the Extraction of Square Root Parameter 5 16 1 Extraction of Square Roots e For analog inputs the Extraction of Square Root parameter is provided for Extraction of Square Root inputs so that differential pressure type flow meter signals can be directly Enable input The default setting for the Extraction of Square Root parameter is OFF The Extraction of Square Root Enable parameter must be set to ON in order to use this function Even cavar Bot If the PV input i e the input before extracting the s
97. executing communications instructions The E5CC E5EC returns responses o Communications Parameters Parameter Parameter Display Setting Display Settings Default Level Protocol Setting P5EL CWF Mad CompoWay F Modbus CHF Communications 0 to 99 010 00 Unit No Communications 9 6 19 2 38 Bate es 4 57 6 kbps 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 kbps Om MUNI SHON 7 8 bits 7 8 bits Communications Data Length l T Setting Level Communications Communications Parity Send Data Wait Time E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations 5 21 Using a Remote SP A remote SP uses a remote SP input that is scaled between the remote SP upper and lower limits as the SP The remote SP can be 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 20 mA DC 1 to 5 VDC 0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10 VDC Set the Remote SP Enable parameter Advanced Function Setting Level to ON and select a remote SP in the SP Mode parameter Adjustment Level to enable using a remote SP You can also use an event input to switch to SP Mode Parameter Setting range Unit Default Level Remote SP Enable F5P11 OFF Disable ON Enable mene Orr Tm bin Remote SP Input F5 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 20 mA DC 1 t0 5 4to 20 mA Advanced Function m VDC 0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10 VDC DC Setting Level Temperature input Input setting Mud Advanced Function range lower limit to Input setting Setting Level range upper limit id Advanced Function R
98. for 1 s or longer The key pressing time can be changed in the Move to Protect Level Time parameter in the Advanced Function Setting Level The display will change to the Protect Level Protect Level Operation Adjustment Protect Moving from the Protect Level to the Operation Level Protect Level 1 Press the C and Keys simultaneously for at least 1 second in the Protect Level The display will change from the Protect Level to the Operation Operation Level Level Bice 4 4 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation 4 1 4 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level for the First Time i e with the Default Settings To enter the Advanced Function Setting Level you must first enter the Protect Level and change the setting of the LFE Initial Setting Communications Protect parameter to enable moving to Advanced Function Setting Level to clear the protection e Clearing Protection Operation Level 1 Press the and Keys simultaneously for at least 3 seconds in the Operation Level The No 1 display will flash when the key is pressed for 1 s or longer The key pressing time can be changed in the Move to Protect Level Time parameter in the Advanced Function Setting Level The display will change to the Protect Level Press the Key once at the Operation Adjustment Protect parameter The display will
99. g 100 C Example ON OFF Lower limit alarm point e g 100 C Alarm value e g 100 C Example for Standard Control ON OFF Upper limit alarm point e g 60 Alarm value e g 60 Example for Standard Control ON OFF Lower limit alarm point e g 80 Alarm value e g 80 Example ON OFF RSP Upper limit alarm point e g 100 C Alarm value e g 100 C Example ON OFF RSP Lower limit alarm point e g 100 C Alarm value e g 100 C 3 Part Names and Basic Procedures 9 Set the set point Operation Display Set point 500 C example Press the 4 Up and Down Keys and the eS Shift _Key to change the value e I U O le O o c O o fo ct D c 3 3 e O gt O U O D o c Le lt Hold the 4 Up or 4 Down Key to increment or decrement the value quickly 6 Set the alarm set value or values Change the parameter that is displayed with the 2 Mode Key Alarm Type 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 or 11 Alarm Type 1 4 or 5 Upper limit and Upper limit Alarms and Lower limit Alarms Operation Level Lower limit Alarms or Upper limit and Lower limit Range Alarms oJnpeooJg 9ISeg C Vp To set the alarm value upper limit press the Mode Key several times to
100. has been entered The default setting is 5 5 K thermocouple at 200 to 1 300 C Initial Setting Level M j N L Pv LN E IN T Indicates the Input Type parameter nput Type O Pt100 resistance thermometer at 200 to 850 C example Press the 4 Up and Down Keys to change the value When you are finished press the C Level Key for at least 1 second to return to the operation display E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 3 13 3 Part Names and Basic Procedures i List of Input Types Input type Specifications Setvalue Temperature range in C Temperature range in F Resistance Pt100 0 200 to 850 300 to 1500 thermometer 199 9 to 900 0 2 00 to 100 0 0 0 to 210 0 JPt100 199 9 to 900 0 4 6010 100 0 0 0 to 210 0 Thermocouple K 300 to 2300 CC 20 0 to 500 0 0 0 to 900 0 J 100 to 1500 A Ec 20 0 to 400 0 0 0 to 750 0 T 9 200to400 300t0700 199 9 to 700 0 200 to 600 300 to 1100 L pe 0000850 100to 1500 200 to 400 300 to 700 A B 199 9 to 700 0 N 15 J 200to 1300 300 to 2300 R te 0 to 8000 0 to 1700 0 to 3000 B 18 100to 1800 300 to 3200 A 0 to 2300 0 to 3200 0 to 1300 0 to 2300 Infrared temperature 0 to 90 0 to 190 sensor ES1B 60 to 120 C 0 to 120 0 to 240 0 to 165 0 to 320 0 to 260 0 to 500 Current input One of the following ranges according to th
101. in the Adjustment Level to dis AS Level play SWAP Extraction of Square Root Low cut Point Extraction of Square Root Low cut Point 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the value to 10 0 The default is 0 0 96 rh Oo c o gt D m gt lt ta O c O O a 7 Q c ta y O O U e te 3 S OOY e1enbg jo uonoeJx3 L 91 S E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 45 5 Advanced Operations 5 17 Setting the Width of MV Variation 5 17 1 MV Change Rate Limit e The MV change rate limit sets the maximum allowable width of change in the MV per second If the change in the MV exceeds this setting the MV will be changed by the MV change rate limit until the calculated value is reached This MV Change Rate function is disabled when the setting is 0 0 Limit e The MV change rate limit does not function in the following situations e In manual mode e During ST execution Cannot be set when ST is ON e During AT execution e During ON OFF control e While stopped during MV at Stop output e During MV at PV Error output Parameter name Setting rage Unit Default Level MV Change Rate Limit 0 0 to 100 0 ls 00 Adjustment Level 5 46 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations This procedure sets the MV change rate limit to 5 0 s The related parameters are as follows PID ON OFF PID ST
102. in unex pected events Use the product within the specifications e The product is designed for indoor use only Do not use or store the product outdoors or in any of the following locations Locations directly subject to heat radiated from heating equipment Locations subject to splashing liquid or oil atmosphere Locations subject to direct sunlight Locations subject to dust or corrosive gas in particular sulfide gas and ammonia gas Locations subject to intense temperature change Locations subject to icing and condensation Locations subject to vibration and large shocks e Use and store the Digital Controller within the rated ambient temperature and humidity Gang mounting two or more Digital Controllers or mounting Digital Controllers above each other may cause heat to build up inside the Digital Controllers which will shorten their service life In such a case use forced cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the Digital Controllers e To allow heat to escape do not block the area around the product Do not block the ventilation holes on the product e Be sure to wire properly with correct polarity of terminals e Use the specified size of crimped terminals M3 width of 5 8 mm or less for wiring To connect bare wires to the terminal block use copper braided or solid wires with a gage of AWG24 to AWG18 equal to a cross sectional area of 0 205 to 0 8231 mm The stripping length is 6 to 8 mm Up t
103. increases Reverse operation decreases the manipulated variable whenever the process value increases Manipulated variable Manipulated variable 100 100 0 0 Low Set Value High Low Set Value High temperature temperature temperature temperature Direct operation Reverse operation For example when the process value PV is lower than the set point SP ina heating control system the manipulated variable increases according to the difference between the PV and SP Accordingly reverse operation is used in a heating control system Direct operation is used in a cooling control system in which the operation is the opposite of a heating control system The Control Output 1 Assignment is set to a control output heating for either direct or reverse operation e Direct reverse operation is set in the Direct Reverse Operation parameter in the Initial Setting Level The default is aF F reverse operation 4 14 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation In this example direct reverse operation and control period heating parameters are checked Direct reverse operation aF F reverse operation Control period heating 20 seconds Operating Procedure e Setting the Control Period Heating Parameter Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to al Setting Level display LF Control Period Heating 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the value to 20 The def
104. infrared temperature sensor 7 13 three position control eeeeeeeseeeeeereeee 5 10 trarisfer Output a ds ead eta dee oe 2 20 5 34 transter output Signal usarse 5 34 tanslerscalhg eio cuca oes ay ad 5 34 MOLIDIGSMOOUMG atico lila A 13 U A O em ccr DET 3 6 USB Serial Conversion Cable 2 23 2 25 A 8 user cambia toas drid 7 2 USING the terminals si ttrotiiro icons 2 7 W Wilton 2 16 Wing PICCAUTIONS amasar 2 16 WOIK DICT AO Duero 5 60 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Index 6 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Authorized Distributor
105. input 0 1 to 999 9 C F Default 8 0 TON C F Advanced e Analog input 0 01 to 99 99 Default 10 00 Function Setting FS FS Level Temperature input 0 0 to 999 9 C F Default 3 0 LBA Band Ee Analog input 0 00 to 99 99 Default 0 20 FS FS e A loop burnout alarm can be output by setting the alarm 1 type to 12 LBA e A setting of 12 LBA can be set for alarms 2 to 4 but the setting will be disabled e Loop burnouts are not detected during SP ramp operation e Loop burnouts are not detected during auto tuning manual operation or while stopped e If the alarm 1 latch is set to ON the latch will be effective for the loop burnout alarm a A b r O O o UJ c 5 O c mp gt D 3 e Automatically Setting the LBA Detection Time e The LBA detection time is automatically set by auto tuning It is not set automatically however for heating cooling control e f the optimum LBA detection time is not obtained by auto tuning set the LBA Detection Time parameter Advanced Function Setting Level e Determining the LBA Detection Time e To manually set the LBA detection time set the LBA Detection Time parameter to twice the LBA reference time given below vg uuejy 1nouing doo LL S 1 Set the output to the maximum value 2 Measure the time required for the width of change in the input to reach the LBA band Measurement time Tm l PV Temperat
106. lights when wiring with communications is enabled writing control This indicator is lit in Manual Mode This indicator is lit while operation is stopped AT ST in This indicator is lit during autotuning progress This indicator flashes during self tuning suon9uny pu SOWEN Hed oO OO S cic EN ON ec a E Z O 2 mii 10 Z Remote SP This indicator is lit while the SP Mode parameter is set to Remote SP RSP Mode This indicator flashes when there is an RSP input error in Remote SP Mode O Setting change This indicator is lit while setting change protection is ON protection E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 3 5 3 Part Names and Basic Procedures Keys Key gt K Name Overview Selects the setting Level Key Mode Key Down Key and Up Key Shift Key PF Key level The next setting level depends on how long the key is pressed Changes the parameter that is displayed within a setting level Set the value Operates as a user defined function key Description In Operation Level e Press once for less than 1 second to go to Adjustment Level e Press for at least 3 seconds to go to Initial Setting Level In Adjustment Level e Press once for less than 1 second to go to Operation Level e Press for at least 3 seconds to go to Initial Setting Level In Initial Setting Level e Press for at least 1 second to go to Opera
107. lower limit alarm Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Always ON El E H lt 0 L lt 0O L H SP SP L H H P L H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L lt 0 H lt 0 L gt 0 HI lt L IH gt L HE IH gt L H L SP IH lt L SP H L S Set value 4 Lower limit range hase Case 2 Case 3 Always OFF m m dst L H SP SP L H H SP L a Med Ll ers HI lt L IH gt L H L SP H 0 L 0 IH lt LI SP H L E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters 4 Set value 5 Upper and lower limit with standby sequence e For the lower limit alarms in cases 1 and 2 above the alarm is normally OFF if upper and lower limit hysteresis overlaps e Incase 3 the alarm is always OFF g Set value 5 The alarm is always OFF if upper and lower limit alarm hysteresis with standby sequence overlaps 6 Refer to Standby Sequence on page 6 57 for information on the operation of the standby sequence 7 Refer to Loop Burnout Alarm LBA on page 3 14 8 Refer to PV Change Rate Alarm on page 3 14 9 When heating cooling control is performed the MV absolute value upper limit alarm functions only for the heating operation and the MV absolute value lower limit alarm functions only for the cooling operation 10 This value is displayed only when a remote SP input is used It functions in both Local SP Mode and Remote SP Mode e Set the alarm type independently for each alarm in the Alarm 1 to 4 Type parameters in the initial sett
108. mode Balanceless bumpless operation will be performed for the MV when switching from manual operation to automatic operation If a power interruption occurs during manual operation manual operation will be restarted when power is restored using the same MV as when power was interrupted Switching between automatic and manual operation is possible for a maximum of one million times Manual operation can be used only for PID control In balanceless bumpless operation the MV before switching is used initially after the switch and then gradually changed to achieve the proper value after switch to prevent radical changes in the MV after switching operation The manual operation is illustrated in the following figure when Manual Output Method parameter is set to HOLD MV 0 A A A Time IMV switched OFF ON 1 Power interrupted e Related Displays and Parameters Parameter name Display Remaks Leve PV MV Manual MV Changes the manual MV Manual Control Level 5 0 to 105 0 heating cooling control 105 0 to 105 0 Auto Manual Switch H M Switches between automatic and manual Operation Level modes Auto Manual Select Addi Hd Enables switching between automatic and man Advanced Func tion ual modes tion Setting Level For Manual MV Limit Enable this value will be between the MV upper limit and the MV lower limit Note Refer to 5 15 Output Adjustment Functions for information on the
109. ne N c o 3 e gt D o 3 3 a 0 ejdurex3 Buu xolg Puwa 2293 L 2 2 2 Preparations e Terminal Details Do not connect anything to the terminals that are shaded gray Control output 1 Control output 1 Sensor Input Current output Control output 1 Control output 1 Control output 2 L mp Voltage output for driving SSR Voltage output e Model Numbers All E5CC models have universal sensor inputs so the code in the model number is always M E5CC LILI O O E M L ue input e Terminal Details Do not connect anything to the terminals that are shaded gray Pt resistance TC thermocouple hide I current c la Precautions for Correct Use V voltage e a nas e When complying with EMC standards the line connecting the sensor must be 30 m or less If the cable length exceeds 30 m compliance with EMC standards will not be possible E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 Preparations I Auxiliary Outputs N e Model Numbers c The number of auxiliary outputs on the E5CC is given in the following location in the model number 2 ESCC LILI OOO MOO o No of auxiliary outputs Ly j Code Auxiliary outputs Specification D 0 None None 2 Model with 2 auxiliary outputs SPST NO 250 VAC 3A 3 Model with 3 auxiliary outputs SPST NO 250 VAC 2 A These cannot be selected if 5 screw terminal
110. or Ji Ds 9 i K Adapter Terminal Cover E53 COV17 Enlarged Illustration of Sold separately Terminal Section E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 5 2 Preparations e E5EC Adapter Adapter el E53 COV24 LO Terminal Cover E53 COV24 illc Terminal Cover i d The Terminal Cover is provided only with the following models EBEC IL 1111 1IB5M ET T Waterproof packing Mounting to the Panel 1 For waterproof mounting waterproof packing must be installed on the Controller Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers Waterproof packing is not necessary when there is no need for the waterproofing function Insert the E5EC into the mounting hole in the panel SS Push the adapter from the terminals up to the panel and temporarily fasten the E5EC E Tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter Alternately tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a balance Tighten the screws to a torque of 0 29 to 0 39 N m Mounting the Terminal Cover Slightly bend the E53 COV24 Terminal Cover to attach it to the terminal block as shown in the following diagram The Terminal Cover cannot be attached in the opposite direction SS DUE VAN iG NP JF ZW AN i C ey
111. p r jum This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting SSR short circuits This parameter measures and displays the heater current value e The HS alarm is not detected if the OFF time for the control output for heating is 100 ms Function or less 35 ms or less if the control period is 0 1 or 0 2 s b Monitor range Unit 0 0 to 55 0 A Monitor e FFFF is displayed when 55 0 A is exceeded e f an alarm is output for the HS Alarm 2 parameter the No 1 display will flash the Leakage Current 2 Monitor parameter e Related Parameters See HS Alarm 1 Adjustment Level Page 6 23 HS Alarm 2 Adjustment Level Page 6 24 HS Alarm Use Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 68 Error Display L L A2 Page A 12 The Program Pattern parameter must not be set to ODEL J Hh Ac Program Start OFF This parameter starts and stops the simple program function e The RUN STOP status will automatically switch to RUN when this parameter is set to sm Function The simple program will stop when this parameter is set to RSET e This parameter will function as a monitor display for the start stop status of the simple program if an event input is selected to start the simple program Default Setting range Stops the simpler program Starts the simpler program o Related Parameters see Soak Time Remain Operation Level Page 6 13 RUN STOP Operation Level Page 6 13 Soak Time Adjustme
112. position depends on input type 50 ms 20 MQ min at 500 VDC 2 300 VAC 50 60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge 10 to 55 Hz 20 m s for 10 min each in X Y and Z directions 10 to 55 Hz 20 m s for 2 hr each in X Y and Z directions 100 m s 3 times each in X Y and Z directions 300 m s 3 times each in X Y and Z directions Approx 120 g Adapter Terminal cover Approx 210 g Adapter Terminal Cover Front panel IP66 rear case IP20 terminals IPOO Non volatile memory number of writes 1 000 000 The indication accuracy of K T and N thermocouples at a temperature of 100 C or less is 2 C 1 digit maximum The indication accuracy of U and L thermocouples is 2 C 1 digit maximum The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 C or less is not specified The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 to 800 C is 8 C maximum The indication accuracy of R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200 C or less is 3 C 1 digit maximum The indication accuracy of W thermocouples is 0 3 of PV or 3 C whichever is greater 1 digit maximum The indication accuracy of PLII thermocouples is 40 3 of PV or 2 C whichever is greater 1 digit maximum 2 Ambient temperature 10 C to 28 C to 55 C Voltage range 15 to 10 of rated voltage 3 The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral Derivative Time Unit parameter E5CC E5EC Digital Tem
113. settings 1 9 Release protection and then E f enter the password 169 for E the Aar Move to Advanced Key for at least 1 s Function Setting Level parameter 1 Advanced Function Setting Level Advanced settings Operation Level This level is displayed automatically when the power supply is turned ON This level is used for the SP alarm values and other basic settings and monitoring Normally select this level for operation Adjustment Level This level is used to set the PID constants and to perform tuning such as autotuning In Adjustment Level the settings of the parameters can be changed during operation This is not possible in the Initial Setting Level or Advanced Function Setting Level Initial Setting Level This level is used for the most basic settings It is used to set the input type and other parameters Use it to set the input type alarm type and other basic settings Advanced Function Setting Level This level is used for advanced settings Use it to assign functions to the control outputs and auxiliary outputs You will not be able to enter the Advanced Function Setting Level with the default settings To enter the Advanced Function Setting Level first disable Initial Setting Communications Protection and then enter the password 169 at the Aar Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter in the Initial Setting Level E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174
114. the Key for at least 3 s Control stops Input Type 5 ON OFF NaF control H PID control P d Alarm 1 Type 2 Press the Key for at least 1 s Control starts Running Stopped StaP Alarm Value 1 27 Start operation If the Controller is equipped with HB HS alarm detection the Alarm 1 Type is not displayed for the default settings To use alarm 1 set an output assignment to alarm 1 For details refer to 4 6 3 Assigned Output Functions 4 8 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation I Example 2 Input type 9 T thermocouple 200 C to 400 C Control method PID control PID constants found using auto tuning AT Alarm type 2 upper limit Alarm value 1 30 C Set point 150 C Setup Procedure An 5 FF error will be displayed if the power supply is turned ON before the sensor is connected 4 Operation Level d5 PV SP ri G Press the Key for at least 3 s Control stops Initial Setting Level Initial Setting Level Set input Use the A and Input Type g specifications Keys to select the input type Use the and ENE ON OFF control ZN For PID set P d Set control Keys to select Prd specifications PID control PID control Peo e Kos oed El GEN Toexecute ST AN SFE pla UL On To cancel ST AFE Check the Control Period Heat control period Unit Seconds It is recommended that 20 sec
115. the remote SP input The alarm point is set in the corresponding alarm value parameter The corresponding alarm hysteresis setting is also valid RSP absolute value upper limit alarm Example ON OFF RSP Upper limit alarm point e g 100 C Alarm value e g 100 C The alarm output is ON while the remote SP is equal to or higher than the set value RSP absolute value lower limit alarm Example ON OFF RSP Lower limit alarm point e g 100 C Alarm value e g 100 C The alarm output is ON while the remote SP is equal to or lower than the set value E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation 4 11 Alarm Hysteresis e The hysteresis of alarm outputs when alarms are switched ON OFF can be set as follows Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm Alarm hysteresis Alarm hysteresis ON ON dA ll OFF OFF Alarm value Alarm value e Alarm hysteresis is set independently for each alarm in the Alarm Hysteresis 1 to Alarm Hysteresis 4 parameters Initial Setting Level e For all alarms except for MV alarms the default is 0 2 C F for temperature inputs and 0 02 FS for analog inputs The default is 0 50 for MV alarms E gt Q 3 T lt o on ad D O 0 o0 4 11 1 Standby Sequence e The standby sequence can be used so that an alarm will not be output until the process value leaves the alarm range once and then
116. the setting is changed Example The PV will be displayed as 420 C Find the difference between the anticipated PV i e the PV after shifting and the PV that you read off in step 5 Example 550 C 420 C 130 C Set the Process Value Input Shift parameter to the value that you found in step 6 Example Set the Process Value Input Shift parameter to 130 C E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations 5 2 Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits for Analog Inputs e Analog Input l e When an analog input is selected scaling can be performed as needed by the iens Upper control application Scaling is set in the Scaling Upper Limit Scaling Lower Limit and Decimal Scaling Lower Point parameters Initial Setting Level These parameters cannot be used Limit when a temperature input is selected e The Scaling Upper Limit parameter sets the physical quantity to be expressed Decimal Point by the upper limit value of input and the Scaling Lower Limit parameter sets the physical quantity to be expressed by the lower limit value of input The Decimal Point parameter specifies the number of digits below the decimal point The following figure shows a scaling example for a 4 to 20 mA input After scaling the temperature can be directly read Here one place below the decimal point is set p N o O i 3 e o Oo zi e c Le Lo O fo 3 o r O O m 3 o
117. to Event Input Assignments 6 parameters must be other than 100 or 40 AT Execute Cancel Ne AT Execute Cancel o I This parameter executes auto tuning AT gt 2 o e The MV is forcibly increased and decreased around the set point to find the 3 characteristics of the control object From the results the PID constants are automatically Function set in the Proportional Band P Integral Time I and Derivative Time D parameters lt e Both 100 AT and 40 AT are supported for AT Only 100 AT can be executed for heating and cooling control e For heating cooling control select the tuning methods that is suitable for the cooling control characteristics in the Heating Cooling Tuning Method parameter e f autotuning is performed with the default settings the cooling PID constants i e Proportional Band Cooling Integral Time Cooling and Derivative Time Cooling parameters have the same values as the heating PID constants e This parameter will not be displayed when either 100 or 40 AT execute cancel is set to be executed using an event input Setting rage Default OFF AT Cancel Operation AT 2 100 AT Execute OFF AT 1 40 AT Execute e This parameter is normally aF F Press the Key and select HF amp or HE to execute AT AT cannot be executed when control is stopped or during ON OFF control e The TUNE indicator will light during autotuning e When AT execution ends the parameter setting automatica
118. to 20mA l 57 1 to 5V H eli Li 5 0to 5V O IR O to 10V IC CI Function E3 Setting E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Remote SP Enable The ST parameter must be set to OFF This parameter is set to ON to enable setting SP Mode You can set the SP Mode parameter to LSP to select a local SP or to RSP to select a remote SP If this parameter is set to OFF only a local SP can be used Default SEE ors Setting range oN Enabled or oF F Disabled e Related Parameters SP Mode Adjustment Level Page 6 20 P oo gt o lt D 5 o O o Tl c 5 o et O 5 o D 5 e D lt o 6 Parameters Dco imi ROPA Remote SP Upper Limit The ST parameter must be set to OFF The Remote SP Enable parameter must be set to PEPL Remote SP Lower Limit om You can scale the remote SP input for the PV input range with the values that are set for the Remote SP Upper and Lower Limit parameters Function Remote SP Input of 4 to 20 mA RSP Remote SP Upper Limit 10 Phas OT Remote SP Upper Limit p is Remote SP Lower Limit p gt Remote SP Lower Limit 10 aa E a ie rata Input mA 4 0 20 0 2 4 10 21 6 110 e The remote SP input can be from the remote SP lower limit 10 to the remote SP upper limit 10 Input values outside of this range are treated as out of range input values RSP input errors and clamped to the upper or lower l
119. to 99 99 Analog input MV Alarms Setting range Unt Unit 0 01 to 99 99 0 50 o Related Parameters Alarm Value 1 to 4 Operation Level Page 6 14 Alarm Upper Limit 1 to 4 Operation Level Page 6 15 Alarm Lower Limit 1 to 4 Operation Level Page 6 15 Alarm 1 to 4 Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 44 Standby Sequence Reset Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 57 Auxiliary Output 1 to 4 Open in Alarm Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 58 Alarm 1 to 4 Latch Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 63 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters o GE Control Output 1 Signal Control output 1 must be a current output ac Sk Control Output 2 Signal Control output 2 must be a current output These parameters set the output signal for linear current outputs e Select 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA for the signal Function a Setting range Default H cli 4 to 20mA soting 0 20 0 to 20mA c E KR GE Transfer Output Signal There must be a transfer output This parameter sets the output signal for the transfer output e Select 4 to 20 mA or 1 to 5 V Function Setting range Default 4 20 4 to 20mA ue Peng I 5 11t05V bon E R E Transfer Output Type There must be a transfer output e This parameter sets the transfer output type Function Transfer output type Default L OFF arr eH S9 Set point se Set point during SP ramp 5P h PV Py MV heating Mi MV c
120. value to add to the remote SP input to compensate it The compensated value is displayed as the process value and used in control Function Setting range Uni Default Temperature input 199 9 to 999 9 0 0 eee Analog input 1 999 to 9 999 0 The decimal point position depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting e Related Parameters See Input Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 39 6 26 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters w 5 H E Remote SP Input Slope Coefficient This parameter sets a factor to apply to the remote SP input to compensate it The resulting value is displayed as the remote SP input value and used in control Function a Setting range Default 0 001 to 9 999 1 000 Setting O j Proportional Band L Integral Time The control must be set to 2 PID control d Derivative Time These parameters set PID control constants PID constants are automatically set when AT or ST is exe cuted P Refers to control in which the MV is proportional to the deviation control error action Sening j Refers to a control action that is proportional to the time integral of the deviation action With proportional control there is normally an offset control error Proportional action is thus used in combination with integral action As time passes this control error disappears and the control temperature process value comes to agree with the set point D Refers
121. when the SP is LSP1 will result in switching to RSP2 2 The operation will proceed according to remote SP inputs 3 If the SP tracking function is enabled the SP will become LSP2 after switching to local SP If the SP tracking function is disabled the SP will remain as LSP1 e f the SP ramp function is enabled when switching from local SP to remote SP SP tracking will operate e Remote SP Input Compensation You can set a remote SP input shift and an SP input slope compensation coefficient to compensate the remote SP input 5 56 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations 5 22 Logic Operations 5 22 1 The Logic Operation Function CX Thermo e The logic operation function logically calculates as 1 or O the Controller status alarms SP ramp RUN STOP auto manual etc and the external event input status and outputs the results to work bits The work bit status can be output to auxiliary or control outputs and operating status can be switched according to the work bit status e Work bit logic operation can be set from 1 to 8 Set them to No operation Always OFF the default when the work bits are not to be used e When logic operations are being used a dot will be displayed between the first two digits on the No 2 display of the Adjustment Level display Adjustment Level Adjustment level display Dot displayed Note The four numeric digits to identify the product code
122. 0 C Example ON OFF Temperature Set point Upper limit alarm e g 100 C point e g 120 C Alarm value upper limit e g 20 C Example ON OFF Temperature Lower limit alarm point Set point e g 80 C e g 100 C Alarm value lower limit e g 20 C Example ON OFF Temperature Lower limit alarm Setpoint Upper limit alarm point e g 80 C e g 100 C Point e g 130 C ktl Alarm value lower Alarm value upper limit e g 20 C limit e g 30 C Example ON OFF Temperature Lower limit alarm Set point Upper limit alarm point e g 80 C e g 100 C point e g 130 C kl Alarm value lower Alarm value upper limit e g 20 C limit e g 30 C Example ON OFF Temperature Set point Upper limit alarm e g 100 C point e g 120 C Alarm value upper limit e g 20 C Example ON OFF Temperature Lower limit alarm point Set point e g 80 C e g 100 C Alarm value lower limit e g 20 C E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Alarm type No Ci Li 73 1 nu Absolute value upper limit alarm Absolute value lower limit alarm Absolute value upper limit alarm with standby sequence Absolute value lower limit alarm with standby sequence Loop Burnout Alarm LBA Valid only for alarm 1 3 Part Names and Basic Procedures The alarm output is ON while the PV is equal to or higher than the
123. 0 to 500 F 20 to 300 C 40 to 580 F 260 C Current input 4 to 20 Any of the following ranges by scaling 5 to 105 of setting range The display shows 1999 to 9999 1999 to 9999 numeric range with decimal point 199 9 to 999 9 omitted mA 19 99 to 99 99 Voltage input 1 999 to 9 999 e The default is 5 e The applicable standards for each of the above input ranges are as follows K J LE N R S B JIS C1602 1995 IEC 60584 1 L Fe CuNi DIN 43710 1985 U Cu CuNi DIN 43710 1985 W W5Re W26Re ASTM E988 1990 JPt100 JIS C 1604 1989 JIS C 1606 1989 Pt100 JIS C 1604 1997 IEC 60751 PLII According to Platinel I Electromotive Force Table by Engelhard Corp A 30 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A Appendices A 8 Setting Levels Diagram This diagram shows all of the setting levels To move to the Advanced Function Setting Level and Cali bration Level you must enter passwords Some parameters are not displayed depending on the protect level setting and the conditions of use Control stops when you move from the Operation Level to the Initial Setting Level Press the 2 Keys for Protect Level at least 1 s Only when Manual Mode was used Used to set protection just before power OFF Power ON for operations Press the C Key for atleast 1 sor Level changes the Key for at automatically least 1 S sans a ss Press the S Key
124. 1 Protection e To move to the Protect Level press the S and Keys simultaneously for at least three seconds in Operation Level or Adjustment Level The key pressing time can be changed in the Move to Protect Level Time parameter Advanced Function Setting Level e The Protect Level protects parameters that are not changed during Controller operation until operation is started to prevent them from being modified unintentionally There are four types of protection operation adjustment protect initial setting communications protect setting change protect and PF Key protect e The protect level settings restrict the range of parameters that can be used o Operation Adjustment Protect The following table shows the relationship between set values and the range of protection o 1 2 3 Can be dis Can be dis Can be dis Can be dis PV played played played played PV SP Can be dis Can be dis Can be dis Can be dis played and played and played and played Operation changed changed changed Level Can be dis Can be dis Cannot be dis Cannot be dis played and played and played and played and Others changed changed moving to moving to other levels is other levels is not possible not possible Can be dis Cannot be dis Cannot be dis Cannot be dis played and played and played and played and Adjustment Level changed moving to moving to moving to other levels is otherlevels is other levels is not possible not pos
125. 169 The Advanced Function Setting Level is displayed TM CUI LiL E INIT will be displayed e The parameters in this level can be used when the Initial Setting Communications Protect parameter is set to O e To switch between setting levels press the Key e To change set values press the A and Keys Wo mimm mu mo ml m as mo um ue m um Uu ma m Rm RR Rm m Am CR RC CRURA ay Operation Adjustment Level Level I Press the yt Key for less than 1 s Press the Press the gd bed ast1s Key for 8 6 NLL 7 Press the O Key for at at least 1 s to flash _acL EA least 3 s the BA display Control stops Communi cations Setting Level Initial Setting Level Press the S Key for less than 1 s _e mm mom mom mo mom mm m omo omo om omo omo m omo ommo ommo omo ommo om6 omo omoom omo omo omo omo om momo om A Press the S Key for at least 1 s Password input set value 169 Control in progress Control stopped Advanced Function Setting Level E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Advanced Function Setting Level D 5 Q D Parameter rr Initialization Alarm 1 Latch r Fr gt O1 O umber of ulti SP Points Alarm 2 Latch 6 63 Alarm 3 Latch 6 63 Alarm 4 Latch 6 63 Move to Protect uxiliary Output Level Time Open in Alarm 6 64 hc N Auxiliary Output
126. 23 4 2 2 digits past decimal point 12 34 3 3 digits past decimal point 1 234 o Related Parameters See Input Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 39 d m Li Temperature Unit The input type must be set for a temperature input e Set the temperature input unit to either C or F Function a Setting range Default L 9 FE L Setting e Related Parameters See Input Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 39 6 40 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters SL A SP Upper Limit SL ZL SP Lower Limit e These parameters set the upper and lower limits of the set points A set point can be set within the range defined by the upper and lower limit set values in the SP Upper Limit and Function SP Lower Limit parameters If these parameters are reset any set point that is outside of the new range will be forcibly changed to either the upper limit or the lower limit e When the temperature input type and temperature unit have been changed the set point upper limit and set point lower limit are forcibly changed to the upper and lower limits of the sensor e For a temperature input the decimal point position depends on the currently selected sensor and for an analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting Parameter name Setting range G X Default n Set Point Upper Temperature SP lower limit 1 to Input setting 1300 sening Limit input range upper limit Analog input SP lower
127. 3 O c 2 gt fo 3 O I z Lo O e e 19 a eae EAT LU ree f p eo Ld it al Si i a dl eo ad a ak o Mn O ae E MON e LJ es eL ww ESAS XL pen er e GERNE E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 959 12910Jd O 9AO N O1 puomssed e A 27 soDueu5 J9 2WeJeg 0 amp uipioooy uonezi eniu 6 9 Y o U y e 3 D e D O o O 9 et O 5 E 0 mp 0 A Appendices Changed 5 I NN NW IOoO I J zi J 5 gt 00 VD parameter E 3 88 22 FIE E T RSS le das gs 8 SE B 2 938 25 o E O og 3 N 2 y gt 2ASN ra Related 3 EE 22 S S 4 S gt 55 ves 0 Oo 33 o zt mg lt E initialized Ss S D z gt 3 parameters 55 a 5 9 aa 3 o 3 D c r Dead Band Ma EA IE ESA Hysteresis Heating AAA Hysteresis Cooling EA Wait Band DEN ESSEN E Alarm 1 to 4 Hysteresis Po fo et fm E AA IEA OR EA 18 LBA Level AA E AAA AAA AA A A LBA Band AAA AAA SA AA Se 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Initialized to input setting range upper and lower limits or scaling upper and lower limits Clamped by SP upper and lower limits This parameter is initialized only when the input type is changed to analog input when the RT parameter is ON The RT parameter turns OFF Initialization is performed as shown below according to the transfer output type setting The initialization d
128. 4 1 MSP SLUTS UNT sessir e A di baaa 4 12 Selecting PID Control or ON OFF Control ccccsccseecceesseeeeeesseeeseenseeseenseessoeaseessonnneeeees 4 13 Setting Output SpecifICallOfiS ui iii dao 4 14 4 6 1 CONTO REMOS iaa 4 14 4 6 2 Direct and Reverse Operation icc aes ats ks eee rie Ron LL adii Ue EAM ede MP eH RUE 4 14 4 6 3 Assigned Output FUNGCHONG sita b edi tu ate a ideo edt aes reece 4 15 4 6 4 Auxiliary Output Opening or Closing in Alarm eessseeeeeeeeeennreennn enn 4 18 Setting the Set PoIBE SP uini eode ice cuoc toes e oe 4 19 4 7 1 Changing Ahe NE LE PEE 4 19 BI ggen felgen 4 20 4 8 1 ON OFF CONTO occa seca tr E clas 4 20 4 8 2 STEL AS E udis mre nr MM M ene nen ee 4 21 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup 4 23 4 9 1 A DUE 4 9 2 ST CSO MULAN is a 4 9 3 Mental Setups ic dai a E Alarm OIM Srta uode visse teu a a dues uxo coUe a Ue Rui Sd Duc cE cUbV d MU uS A SIL Alar TYDE APA PP UNo 0 0OEPEPP P PP 410 2 Alani VallOS RESET LUTTE Alarm HyStEreS leet 4 11 1 Standby Sequence cc ceecccceeecececeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeaseeeeeeasececeuaeeeeceeeeeseeauseesseaueeeesssseeeessageeeseseaess Jele Alami ECN eter E M Using Heater Burnout HB and Heater Short HS Alarms 2r MEE LP inttr A E e e A 4 12 3 Installing Current Transformers CT oooooocccncononncnnnononcnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnonnnncnnnnnn
129. 4 Basic Operation 4 12 Using Heater Burnout HB and Heater Short HS Alarms 4 39 A cM FAB PAI curia as dao hale ew a a lia cata Aces 4 39 Alera TIS AIGUITE 6 veut od oie ee Ide eee toate bog website 4 41 4 12 3 Installing Current Transformers CT 0 000 e ee eee eee 4 43 4 12 4 Calculating Detection Current Values 0 0000 cc eee 4 45 4 12 5 Application Examples 0 ccc BIS 4 45 4 13 Customizing the PV SP Display 0 0 cee eee ees 4 49 4 13 1 PV SP Display Selections 0 0 0 ees 4 49 4 2 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation 4 1 Moving between Setting Levels The Operation Level is displayed first when the power supply to the Digital Controller is turned ON To display the parameters you must move to the following setting levels e Operation Level Entered when the power supply is turned ON e Initial Setting Level e Adjustment Level e Protect Level e Advanced Function Setting Level e Communications Setting Level The procedures to move between the setting levels starting from the Operation Level are provided below I L h O S 5 Q o D D D 5 o D 5 ae r O lt D 0 4 1 1 Moving to the Initial Setting Level Moving from the Operation Level to the Initial Setting Level Press the Key for at least 3 seconds in the Operation Level Operation Level The No 1 display wil
130. 9 6 Move to the Calibration Level This starts the 30 minute aging timer This timer provides an approximate timer for aging After 30 minutes have elapsed the No 2 display changes to 0 You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if 0 is not displayed When the Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The No 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in hexadecimal Set the STV as follows e nputtype270r28 5V e Input type 29 10V Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the Y Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered When the 9 Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left Set the STV to 1 V Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the Y Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered When the 9 Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete Press the A Key The No 2 display changes to YE 5 Release the key and wait two seconds or press the Key This stores the temporarily registered ca
131. 999 Note1 The defaults are O i e the ON and OFF delays are disabled 2 The parameters are displayed when alarm functions are assigned and when the alarm type is set to any type but O none 12 LBA or 13 PV change rate alarm 5 26 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations Use the following procedure to set ON and OFF delays for the alarm 1 An ON delay of 5 seconds and an OFF delay of 10 s will be set Operating Procedure e Setting the Alarm 1 ON Delay Press the Key several times in the Advanced Function Set Advanced Function Setting ting Level to display A al Alarm 1 ON Delay Alarm 1 ON Delay 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the value to 5 The default is O D lt D e Setting the Alarm 1 OFF Delay on l o 1 Press the Key several times in the Advanced Function Set ipn pion SUN ting Level to display A iof Alarm 1 OFF Delay 3 H tor Alarm 1 OFF D n Delay lt 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the value to 10 The default is O 1 a y 7 a E al un O x 2 pe 3 OU C fo lt o E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 27 5 Advanced Operations 5 11 Loop Burnout Alarm 5 11 1 Loop Burnout Alarm LBA Set point e With a loop burnout alarm there is assumed to be an error in the control loop if the control deviation SP PV is grea
132. Always OFF Work bit 1 input assignment D 0 Always OFF Invert work bit 1 Click Normally open to change it to lt gt Normally closed Assign RUN STOP to event input 2 Set 5 Work bit 1 for the event input data for event input 2 and set HUN STOP for the assignment function Closing the Logic Operation Editor Dialog Box Click the Close Button This completes the procedure for setting parameters using the CX Thermo Transfer the settings to the Controller to set the Controller Refer to CX Thermo help for the procedure to transfer the settings T N N r O e o O 9 O D et O 5 D G suonelado 29107 Buisn 2 22 5 Advanced Operations 5 64 Operating Procedure This procedure outputs alarm 1 status to auxiliary output 1 during operation RUN A library object is used to make the setting Work bit 1 Alarm 1 RUN STOP Always OFF Always OFF CX Thermo Untitled En C x 1 Select Logic Operation File Edit View Communications TrendMonitor Options Help Editor from the CX Thermo CREER tree and click the Start Parameter Name Logic Operation Editor B u tto n D oc b amp View Mode Advanced Level y p me E amp amp xi NewProject Channel name m CH1 Channel 1 Um En fe tl a Channel Name Setting Range xl 01 ESEC 00445M 000 Offline Adjustment Level 3 Manual Control Level 5 3 Cont
133. Assigment parameter is set to WIPT Setting Change Enable Disable the setting change will be disabled when the event input turns ON and will be enabled when the input turns OFF Setting input contact Status Event input OFF Enabled Event input Disabled Switching Communications Write Enable Disable When the Event Input Assigment parameter is set to CMWT Setting Change Enable Disable writing with communications will be enabled when the event input turns ON and writing with communications will be disabled when the event input turns OFF Setting Input contact Status Event input OFF Disabled Event input Enabled Switching Alarm Latch Cancel When the Event Input Assigment parameter is set to LAT Alarm Latch Cancel all alarm latches alarms 1 to 4 heater burnout HS alarm latch will be cancelled when event input turns ON Setting Input contact Status Event input OFF Event input Cancelled Parameters Display Leve EV Initial Setting Level Eb Initial Setting Level Ey 4 ion Initial Setting Level y 5 Initial Setting Level MEP Number of Multi SP Points Initial Setting Level Initial Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations 5 5 Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values 5 5 1 Set Point Limiter The setting range of the set point is limited by the set point limiter This function can be used to pre
134. B and HS alarms Alarm 1 If the Program Pattern parameter is not set to OFF the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter is initialized to the pro gram end output If the Program Start parameter is assigned when the program pattern is changed to OFF the Program Start parameter will be initialized to not assigned For a temperature input the Integral Derivative Time Unit parameter is initialized only when the RT parameter is turned ON The default is as follows e Integral Derivative Time Unit 0 1 s The PID parameters are also initialized when the Integral Derivative Time Unit parameter is initialized 19 This parameter is initialized to the new Password to Move to Protect Level password When the ST parameter is turned ON the SP Mode parameter is initialized to LSP and the Remote SP Enable parameter is initialized to OFF When the Remote SP Enable parameter is turned OFF the SP Mode parameter is initialized to LSP A 28 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 A Appendices These parameters are initialized when the Input Type parameter is changed from a temperature input to an analog input or from an analog input to a temperature input This parameter is initialized when the Input Type parameter is changed from a temperature input to an analog input or from an analog input to a temperature input However it is not initialized if the applicable alarm is an MV absolute value
135. Burnout Detection 1 Adjustment Level Page 6 21 Heater Burnout Detection 2 Adjustment Level Page 6 22 HB ON OFF Advenced Function Setting Level Page 6 58 Error Displays L Page A 12 ri I gt amp c m 3 D 5 F r O lt o HB and HS alarms must be supported LL dg i Pict MEALEN SUFNOUL OEIECUHON The HB ON OFF parameter must be set to ON This parameter sets the current for the heater burnout alarm to be output e The heater burnout alarm is output when the heater current value falls below the setting go of this parameter Function When the set value is 0 0 the heater burnout alarm output is turned OFF When the set value is 50 0 the heater burnout alarm output is turned ON Setting range Unit Default 0 0 to 50 0 0 0 Setting e Related Parameters See Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Adjustment Level Page 6 21 Heater Burnout Detection Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 58 Heater Burnout Latch Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 59 Heater Burnout Hysteresis Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 59 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 21 6 Parameters HB and HS alarms must be supported two CTs The HB ON OFF parameter must be set to ON Le p Heater Current 2 Value Monitor This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting heater burnout This parameter measures and displays the heater current value e
136. C E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Sections in this Manual Sections in this Manual Introduction Preparations Part Names and Basic Procedures Basic Operation Advanced Operations Parameters User Calibration Appendices E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 19 CONTENTS N A o e a M 1 Read and Understand this Manual oonconncconnncnnnncnnnnenaccnnnncnnancnnnnonancnnarenanrnnanrnnannns 2 Safety PRECAUTIONS 20 5 Definition of Precautionary Information ooonccccncconnncccnncnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnonnnrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnrnnnnrennnnnns 1 5 gt Eme Tcr c 1 5 Precat tions for sale USC uidit iii iii 8 Installation dg e ibliler e X 10 Precautions for Operation uiuis qoia iaa linia Vous 12 Prepara Ons TO USO T 13 ROVISION HISTO coria E 14 Conventions Used in This Manual cccsssseccesseeecenseecenseesenseeseensessenseesseaes 15 Model NotatoN cra E E 1 15 Meanings or AD DNC VI ATOMS uri a 1 15 Flow t Read Display Symbols e est ihe acta heaviest ee eee 1 16 How This Manual is Organized ata as 1 16 Related Manuals it a E EEE A 1 17 Sections in this Mandala 19 Section 1 Introduction 1 1 Appearance Features and Functions of the EBCC EBEC eere enne 1 2 1 1 1 Noise NH TEC
137. Control Output 1 Assignment Control Output 1 Assignment 2 Set the parameter to o Control Output Heating The default is a Control Output Heating suonouny nd no paubissy 9 p e Setting Control Output 2 Advanced Function Setting 1 Press the Key several times in the Advanced Function Level Setting Level to display ailt e Control Output 2 Assignment Control Output 2 Assignment 2 Set the parameter to L a Control Output Cooling As soon as you select H L Heating Cooling for the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter the setting of this parameter is automatically changed to a Control Output Cooling e Setting Auxiliary Output 1 Advanced Function Setting 1 Press the Key several times in the Advanced Function Level Setting Level to display 5i b I Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment i ell Auxiliary Output LL HM 1 Assignment 2 Press the Dor Key to set the parameter to AL i chm The default is ALM Alarm 1 ILI If the Controller is equipped with HB HS alarm detection this parameter is set by default to HA heater alarm E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 17 4 Basic Operation e Setting Auxiliary Output 2 Advanced Function Setting Level 1 Press the Key several times in the Advanced Function Setting Level to display 5 52 Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment M A He 2 Press the 4 or
138. Control Range A 30 Setting Levels Diagr aN PNE teens ERE A 31 Parameter Plinio ans A 32 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Introduction DENEN 1 1 Appearance Features and Functions of the ESCC E5EC 1 1 1 Appearance 1 2 1 0 Configuration and Model Number Legend 1 2 1 I O Configuration 1 2 2 Model Number Legends E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 22 cBeat leS a A ed ee eee 1 1 3 Main Functions 1 Introduction 1 1 Appearance Features and Functions of the E5CC E5EC 1 1 1 Appearance e A stylish design that gives a new look to control panels e Large display characters and white backlight for better visibility e Acompact size to help downsize control panels t e Much faster sampling and greater expandability than expected in this class of Controller 0 O 0 Sum a e Even easier to use than previous models SUB3 SUBA o OUTT OUTA RSP C MANU El Om AJO E EE Sem D al E5CC 1 1 2 Features This section compares the features of the E5CC E5EC with the previous ESCN E5EN Controllers High speed Control Capability Input sampling cycle 50 ms Control period 0 1 s an
139. Cooling Control that is suitable for an application that does not have linear cooling characteristics such as plastic molding machines is performed The response is fast and the response characteristics are stable e Linear Control that is suitable for an application that has linear cooling characteristics is performed Water cooling Air cooling Linear Cooling capacity 76 0 MV cooling 96 100 Cooling Characteristics 6 78 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters aMPW Minimum Output ON OFF Band Control must be set to 2 PID control This parameter sets the minimum ON OFF width of the outputs that are assigned for the heating and cooling control outputs You can set this parameter to prevent deterioration of a Function relay output A Setting range Uni Default 0 0 to 50 0 1 0 Setting PF PF Setting e This parameter sets the function of the PF Key Function e The default is SHFT Digit Shift a p Set value Seting Function ettn pe OFF arr Disabled Does not operate as a function key RUN RUN Specifies RUN status STOP Sta STOP Specifies STOP status R S 5 Reversing RUN STOP Specifies reversing RUN STOP operation status operation AE HESE 100 AT Specifies reversing 100 AT Execute Cancel status Execute Cancel AT 1 HE f 40 AT Specifies reversing 40 AT Execute Cancel status Execute Cancel LAT LHE Alarm Latch Cancel Specifies canceling
140. D ON OFF Standard or Heating Cooling Program Pattern Control Period Heating for at least 3 s Control stops Initial Setting Page 6 39 6 40 6 40 6 40 6 40 6 41 o gt C2 6 43 Press the C Key for at Press the C Key alarm modes and perform other operations Control in progress Control stopped To move from the Operation Level to the Initial Set ting Level press the Key for at least three sec onds with any parameter displayed except for the Auto Manual Switch parameter e The Initial Setting Level is not displayed when the Initial Setting Communications Protect parameter is set to 2 It can be used when the Initial Setting Communications Protect parameter is set to O or 1 e f the Input Type parameter is set for an analog input the following parameters will be set Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit and Decimal point Control Period Cooling Direct Reverse Operation Alarm 1 Type Alarm 1 Hysteresis Alarm 2 Type Alarm 2 Hysteresis Alarm 3 Type Alarm 3 Hysteresis Alarm 4 Type Alarm 4 Hysteresis Control Output 1 Signal LL Control Output 2 D D D 6 43 6 44 6 44 6 48 6 44 6 48 6 44 6 48 6 44 6 48 6 49 6 49 EE E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Transfer Output Signal Transfer Output Type Transfer Output Upper Limit Transfer
141. Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 51 5 Advanced Operations Set value Display Function Alarm 4 ALM4 is alternately displayed during Alarm 4 status al Lit Alarm 1 to 4 OR status ALM ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1 2 3 or 4 is set to ON Heater Alarm HA HA is alternately displayed when an HB alarm or HS alarm is ON Note The default is OFF Example When ALM1 Is Selected for the SV Status Display Function Normal When ALM1 Is ON a E Alternating rib Mot pay gt ITI Br EL LILI xu cq PV SP EN Additional Information Priority of Flashing and Alternating Displays on No 2 Display The priority for flashing and alternating displays is as follows 1 Alternating display with SV status display 2 Alternating display during program end output The following procedure sets the PV Status Display Function parameter to ALM1 Operating Procedure Advanced Function Setting 1 Press the Key several times in the Advanced Function Set Letal ting Level to display P5t PV Status Display Function PV Status Display Function 2 Press the A or Key to select ALM alarm 1 The default is af F 3 ifthe Alarm 1 status is ON in Operation Level the PV and ALI Operation Level Alarm 1 will be alternately displayed ELM E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations 5 20 Communications with a Host Device
142. E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters ni H na Auto Manual Select Addition Control must be set to 2 PID control e This parameter sets whether the Auto Manual Select Addition parameter is to be displayed Function a Setting range Default on Displayed aF F Not displayed Orr Setting o Related Parameters see Auto Manual Switch Operation Level Page 6 9 MH N E Manual Output Method Control must be set to 2 PID control If this parameter is set to HOLD when control moves from automatic mode to manual mode the final MV from automatic mode will be used as the initial manual MV If this parameter is Function Set to INT the setting of the Manual MV Initial Value parameter will be used as the initial P co gt o lt S 5 O o Tl c 3 ct O 5 o D 5 O lt o manual MV a Setting range Default Hal d HOLD NL E INIT Hold Setting e Related Parameters See Manual MV Initial Value Advanced Function Setting Level 6 67 M DIN ITUN Manual MV Initial Value Control must be set to 2 PID control This parameter sets the initial value of the manual MV to use after control moves from auto matic mode to manual mode Function Setting range Unit Default Standard control 5 0 to 105 0 0 0 dis Heating cooling control 105 0 to 105 0 0 0 If the Manual MV Limit Enable parameter is set to ON the setting range will be the MV lower limi
143. EC Conversion Cable to connect the E5EC to the computer i e the CX Thermo only Support Software e e U y E 3 D p U 9 pu Tl c 5 et O 5 p 9 5 2 o D 5 ro gt O lt D 0 3 3 2 Entering Numeric Values Applying Changes to Numeric Values After you change a numeric value with the Keys the changes are applied 1 when 3 seconds elapses 2 when the Key is pressed or 3 when the level is changed with the Key la Precautions for Correct Use Alway make sure that any changes to numeric values are applied for one of the three methods that are given above before you turn OFF the power supply to the E5CC E5EC If you only change the values with the Keys and turn OFF the power supply before 3 seconds has elapsed the changes will not be applied Moving between Digits Digit Shift Key Press the Shift Key PF Key to select the digit to change This is useful when entering a numeric value with many digits Use this key to change levels The digit to change will move as follows 1s digit 10s digit 100s digit 1000s digit and then back to the 1s digit Press the Keys to change the value of a digit IN Press the PP Key sone oueuinN unag 2 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 3 7 3 Part Names and Basic Procedures 3 3 3 Setting Levels I What Are Setting Levels On the E5CC E5EC the parameters are
144. EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters Event Input Assignment 1 There must be event inputs Event Input Assignment 2 Event Input Assignment 3 Program Start Invert Direct Reverse Operation SP Mode Switch 100 AT Execute Cancel 40 AT Execute Cancel Setting Change Enable Disable Communications Writing Enable Disable Alarm Latch Cancel Multi SP No Switching Bit O Multi SP No Switching Bit 1 Multi SP No Switching Bit 2 E y 4 Event Input Assignment 4 E y 5 Event Input Assignment 5 E y h Event Input Assignment 6 o N s 5 e The following functions can be assigned to event inputs 1 to 6 RUN STOP T Function Auto Manual Switch z e O lt o X a J d C Lim i E E e Default Event Input Assignment 1 L9 Fr n t J Event Input Assignment 2 Event Input Assignment 3 Event Input Assignment 4 Event Input Assignment 5 Event Input Assignment 6 Nar N Fr n t Ni N Ni a r N Ni LU I _ Pr n Lj h I h J h h V L E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 51 6 Parameters ES Setting se 1 2 3 4 5 Setting NIT NE IOUN Function None RUN STOP Auto Manual Program Start Invert Direct Reverse Operation SP Mode Switch 10096 AT Execute Cancel 40 AT Execute Cancel
145. ED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 3 Read and Understand this Manual Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
146. F Key PF Setting LAT Alarm Latch Cancel c The latch is cancelled by an event input Event Input Assignment 1 to Event Input Assignment 6 LAT Alarm Latch Cancel e The output is turned OFF when switching to the Initial Setting Level Communications Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level or Calibration Level e f an auxiliary output is set to close in alarm the output is kept closed If it is set to open in alarm it is kept open Default SE Lis Setting range an Enabled af F Disabled Cc I e Related Parameters Alarm Value 1 to 4 Operation Level Page 6 14 Alarm Value Upper Limit 1 to 4 Operation Level Page 6 15 Alarm Value Lower Limit 1 to 4 Operation Level Page 6 15 Alarm 1 to 4 Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 44 Standby Sequence Reset Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 57 Event Input Assignment 1 to 6 Initial Setting Level Page 6 51 Auxiliary Output 1 to 4 Open in Alarm Initial Setting Level Page 6 58 Alarm 1 to 4 Hysteresis Initial Setting Level Page 6 48 HB ON OFF Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 58 PF Setting Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 79 T oo gt o lt D 5 o O o Tl c 5 o et O 5 o D 5 e D lt o 6 Parameters P Pp L E Move to Protect Level Time e This parameter sets the key pressing time required to move to the Protect Level from the Operation Level the Adjustment Level or Monitor Setting Item Le
147. F Setting parameter to the Monitor Setting Item makes it possible to display monitor setting items using the 9 Key The following table Item 5 shows the details of the settings For setting monitor ranges refer to the applicable parameter Remarks Set value ix Monitor Setting Display O B O N Disabled pa PV SP MV Can be set SP PV SP Soak time remain Can be set SPY Proportional band P Canbe set TP E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations Remarks Set value En ag Monitor Setting Display integral time n Li Li m l ud e 1 r 1 Po 9 Alarm value lower limit a m Alarm value 1 Alarm value upper imi mu jm amay ni 10 Alarm value 2 11 Alarm value upper limit 2 12 Alarm value lower limit 2 _ Li m Mal nu _ Ll m m m LL 13 Alarm value 3 14 Alarm vale upper Wi 15 Alarm value lower limit 3 LL A lt Li gt m l ro Li po i Li m 16 Alarm value 4 17 Alarm value upper iit 4 Li L L m L i Li m m L IL 18 Alarm value lower limit 4 19 PV SP Internal SP Can be set SP 20 PV SP Alarm Value 1 Can be s
148. Heater burnout is not detected if the ON time for the control output for heating is 100 ms Function or less 30 ms or less if the control period is 0 1 or 0 2 s L Monitor range Unit 0 0 to 55 0 A Monitor e FFFF is displayed when 55 0 A is exceeded e f an alarm is output for the Heater Burnout Detection 2 parameter the No 1 display will flash the Heater Current 2 Value Monitor parameter o Related Parameters see Heater Burnout Detection 1 Adjustment Level Page 6 21 Heater Burnout Detection 2 Adjustment Level Page 6 22 Error Displays Lic Page A 12 HB and HS alarms must be supported two CTs y i noc peer UIC UU Mele uote The HB ON OFF parameter must be set to ON This parameter sets the current for the heater burnout alarm to be output e The heater burnout alarm is output when the heater current value falls below the setting pp of this parameter Function When the set value is 0 0 the heater burnout alarm output is turned OFF When the set value is 50 0 the heater burnout alarm output is turned ON Setting range Unit Default 0 0 to 50 0 0 0 Setting e Related Parameters See Heater Current 2 Value Monitor Adjustment Level Page 6 22 HB ON OFF Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 58 Heater Burnout Latch Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 59 Heater Burnout Hysteresis Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 59 6 22 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Par
149. I Derivative time D Control Period Manual reset value Alarm setting range Sampling cycle Insulation resistance Dielectric strength Malfunction vibration Vibration resistance Malfunction shock Shock resistance Weight Degree of protection Memory protection 1 Thermocouple Resistance thermometer Analog input CT input Thermocouple Resistance thermometer Analog input CT input Remote SP input Temperature input Analog input Temperature input Analog input E5CC E5EC 0 3 of PV or 1 C whichever is greater 1 digit max 0 2 of PV or 0 8 C whichever is greater 1 digit max 0 2 FS 1 digit max 5 FS 1 digit max Thermocouple R S B W PLII 1 of PV or 10 C whichever is greater 1 digit max Other thermocouples 1 of PV or 4 C whichever is greater 1 digit max K thermocouple at 100 C max 10 C max 1 of PV or 2 C whichever is greater 1 digit max 1 FS 1 digit max 5 FS 1 digit max 1 FS 1 digit max 0 1 to 999 9 C or F in units of 0 1 C or F 0 0196 to 99 9996 FS in units of 0 0196 FS 0 1 to 999 9 C or F in units of 0 1 C or F 0 1 to 999 9 FS in units of 0 1 FS O to 9 999 s in units of 1 s 0 0 to 999 9 s in units of 0 1 s O to 9 999 s in units of 1 s 0 0 to 999 9 s in units of 0 1 s 0 1 0 2 0 5 or 1 to 99 s in units of 1 s 0 0 to 100 0 in units of 0 1 1 999 to 9 999 decimal point
150. Invert direct reverse Program end e 100 AT execute cancel 40 AT execute cancel e Standard control or e Work bits 1 to 8 e Setting change Communications Heating cooling enable disable write enable disable control Analog status e Alarm latch cancel e Multi SP No e Set point Linear current e Set point during SP ramp Input voltage from CT e HB alarm e Process value MS Alarni e CompoWay F Communications Modbus RTU in Transfer output Functions can be assigned individually for each output by changing the set values for the Control Output 1 and 2 Assignments and the Auxiliary Output 1 to 4 Assignments in the parameters in the advanced function setting level Note Not all models support these functions For details refer to 1 2 2 Model Number Legends Power supply A 100 to 240 VAC or D 24 VAC DC E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 1 5 1 Introduction 1 2 2 Model Number Legends e E5CC Esicic JLA L 0 e 9ooodo N Lo c q o ji Q p O O O No of auxiliary outputs Power supply voltage Terminal type Input type Aa o SS o LLL OL o TIT TAI Conwoowpu2 ray x Peowpu Ne ee E T PATA ELETE Voltage output for driving SSR Voltage output for driving SSR CX one Fb mVAGBG S Screw terminals 5 Screwterminals with cover M U
151. LUN chao A MO NTHTNEUN 5 15 5 5 2 A a 5 16 Using the SP Ramp Function to Limit the SP Change Rate 5 17 5 6 1 elu uis Ree ee MN ENS 5 17 Using the Meier 5 19 5 7 1 iioii OP 5 19 5 7 2 Entering the Password to Move to the Protect Level oocccoccccocccccnnncconncconnononononannnnnnnnos 5 20 Displaying Only Parameters That Have Been Changed 5 22 5 8 1 Displaying Changed Paratm e lers x tee oti e oe de Che cr ead a et ck a ea 5 22 OR Output oL AIarms ii a 5 24 5 9 1 Integrated Al untar arrabal 5 24 Alarm Delays ice edis EE ERREUR ePi 5 26 S101 Alarm Delays stunt epa Ec a 5 26 Loop BUQUE Ala ieu o E T T T 5 28 ST Loop Burnout AlarmuibbA O LS eee eee 5 28 Performing Man al COnIFol oon ced ias 5 31 912 5 Manual ODGlIdllOlis s cde Reece re aede e did 5 31 Using the Transfer OUIDUE ii ca Qu De 5 34 5 19 1 Transfer Output Function irse tio ities etr ote sn d ees n Rb aiii iberica x EROR SRaR USD SRRR TRE EORR 5 34 Using the Simple Program Function Leeees leere ieee eese eene nennen nnn nnn nnn 5 37 S 14 12 Simple Program FUNCOM sia e e o csosseimen cand 5 37 5 14 2 Operation at the Program End ceti it A A ere sotto Deeds 5 39 5 14 3 Application Example Using a Simple PrograM occccoonnnncccnconccnnccnnccnnnononnnnconnnnnnnnononcnnnnnnnnrnnennnn
152. Level and display the top parameter in the Operation Level Note1 Priority of Manual MV and Other Functions Even when operation is stopped the manual MV is given priority Auto tuning and self tuning will stop when manual mode is entered 2 Manual MV and SP Ramp If operating the SP ramp function will continue even when manual mode is entered Moving to the Manual Control Level with an Event Input e f an event input is set to MANU auto manual you can use the event input to switch between automatic mode and manual mode Auto Manual Selection Display e When the C Key is pressed for at least 3 seconds in the Operation Level s auto manual switching display the manual mode will be entered and the Manual Control Level will be displayed It is not possible to move to any displays except for the PV MV parameter during manual operation Press the Key for at least one second from the PV MV parameter display in Manual Control Level to return to automatic mode and display the top parameter in the Operation Level e To enable using the Auto Manual Switch parameter Operation Level you must set the Auto Manual Switch Display Addition parameter Advanced Function Setting Level to ON The default is of F E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations Operation Level if the Key is pressed l l l l l H display flashes l for at least 1 s l l l l l We will set the
153. Level Communications Used to set the input Setting Level type and other basic Communications settings settings Press C Key once Release protectione then enter the password 169 UO for the Aar Move to Key for at least 1 s Dd Advanced Function Setting O Level parameter o fo Advanced Function o Setting Level Advanced settings Enter the password 1201 for the Move to Calibration Level parameter Calibration Level Used to calibrate the E5CC EBEC 1 To use a key procedure to move to Manual Control Level set the Auto Manual Select Addition parameter to ON and set the PF Setting parameter to 4 1 Auto Manual 2 The No 1 display will flash when the keys are pressed for 1 s or longer 3 Set the PF Setting parameter to FF dF monitor setting items E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 3 9 3 Part Names and Basic Procedures I Basic Setting Levels The following figure shows the basic setting levels shaded 0 Power ON o D C Level changes automatically O O ek E Press ey once Operation Level Adjustment Level Used to change c Used for SP alarm qu adjustment parameters O values and other basic PID constants control per settings and Press Key once hysteresis etc U monitoring D A ECRANS MEE O 3 s No 1 display will flash after 1 s Initial Setting Level Used to set the input E m 1 type and other basic 1 O E
154. Limit The control must be set to 2 PID control The ST parameter must be set to OFF L MV Lower Limit e The MV Upper Limit and MV Lower Limit parameters set the upper and lower limits of the manipulated variable When the calculated manipulated variable exceeds the upper or lower limit value the upper or lower limit value will be the output level E Function e MV Upper Limit a The setting ranges during standard control and heating cooling control are different Control method Setting range m Default Standard MV lower limit 0 1 to 105 0 100 0 Heating cooling 0 0 to 105 0 e MV Lower Limit The setting ranges during standard control and heating cooling control are different The manipulated variable for the cooling control output side during heating cooling control is expressed as a negative value Control method Unit Default Setting Control method Standard 5 0 to MV upper limit 0 1 0 0 Heating cooling 105 0 to 0 0 100 0 e Related Parameters See PID ON OFF Initial Setting Level Page 6 41 ST Initial Setting Level Page 6 42 6 32 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters 2 PID control must be used l nhu MV Change Rate Limit The ST parameter must be set to OFF e The MV Change Rate Limit parameter sets the maximum allowable variation in the MV per second If the change in the MV exceeds this setting the MV will be changed by the Fu
155. Lit Lower limit alarm LL Upper and lower limit range alarm Lim Upper and lower limit alarm with standby sequence Upper limit alarm with standby sequence Jmm m r z d Lower limit alarm with standby sequence The alarm output is ON while the PV is equal to or higher than the upper limit alarm point or while the PV is equal to or lower than the lower limit alarm point The alarm output is ON while the PV is equal to or higher than the upper limit alarm point The alarm output is ON while the PV is equal to or lower than the lower limit alarm point The alarm output is ON while the PV is equal to or lower than the upper limit alarm point or equal to or higher than the lower limit alarm point This alarm provides a standby sequence The alarm output is ON while the PV is equal to or higher than the upper limit alarm point or while the PV is equal to or lower than the lower limit alarm point This alarm provides a standby sequence The alarm output is ON while the PV is equal to or higher than the upper limit alarm point This alarm provides a standby sequence The alarm output is ON while the PV is equal to or lower than the lower limit alarm point Operation Example ON OFF Temperature Lower limit alarm Set point Upper limit alarm point e g 80 C e g 100 C point e g 130 C kl Alarm value lower Alarm value upper limit e g 20 C limit e g 3
156. Modbus RTU The communications protocol is CompoWay F or Modbus RTU Transfer output Current 4 to 20 mA DC Voltage 1 to 5 VDC Remote SP input Current 4 to 20 or 0 to 20 mA DC Voltage 1 to 5 O to 5 or O to 10 VDC The communications protocol is CompoWay F or Modbus RTU Transfer output Current 4 to 20 mA DC Voltage 1 to 5 VDC Remote SP input Current 4 to 20 or 0 to 20 mA DC Voltage 1 to 5 0 to 5 or 0 to 10 VDC Transfer output Current 4 to 20 mA DC Voltage 1 to 5 VDC Remote SP input Current 4 to 20 or 0 to 20 mA DC Voltage 1 to 5 O to 5 or O to 10 VDC The communications protocol is CompoWay F or Modbus RTU Transfer output Current 4 to 20 mA DC Voltage 1 to 5 VDC Remote SP input Current 4 to 20 or 0 to 20 mA DC Voltage 1 to 5 0 to 5 or 0 to 10 VDC These cannot be selected if 5 screw terminals with cover is selected for the terminal type E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 Preparations e Terminal Details Do not connect anything to the terminals that are shaded gray 004 008 ta B E Communications RS 485 Communications RS 485 a Event inputs et AQ AC A 2 HI EN 3 Event inputs Event inputs Event inputs E D EV1 EV1 o EV2 cr er EV2 009 011 Communications RS 485 Event inputs Transfer Ma no m m O o 3 5 m UD O O Q 3 e m x e o D Event Event i
157. N g 2 Open in Alarm Cold Junction Compensation Method 6 64 Alarm 1 ON Delay ay Output 6 58 6 65 Open in Alarm uxiliary Output Open in Alarm Alarm 2 ON Delay 6 58 6 65 Alarm 3 ON HB ON OFF 5 x 6 58 Delay 6 65 Heater Burnout Alarm 4 ON Latch 6 59 Delay 6 65 Heater Burnout Alarm 1 OFF Hysteresis 6 59 Delay ST Stable Alarm 2 OFF Range Delay OL Alarm 3 OFF Delay Integral Derivative Alarm 4 OFF Time Unit Delay AT Calculated 6 61 MV at Stop and Gain E Error Addition Auto Manual AT Hysteresis 6 61 Select 6 67 Addition Limit Cycle MV Amplitude Manual Output Method 6 61 6 67 Manual MV Initial Value Input Digital 8 0 Filter 6 61 6 67 Moving Average RT 6 62 MV Display 6 62 HS Alarm Use 6 68 Automatic Display Return HS Alarm Latch 6 62 HS Alarm Displa ie Hysteresis Brightness 6 63 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters Page 6 70 Monitor Setting Item 1 Monitor Setting Item 2 6 70 Monitor Setting Item 3 LBA Band 6 71 ontrol Output 1 Monitor Setting ssignment Item 4 6 72 ontrol Output 2 ssignment Monitor Setting Item 5 6 72 Auxiliary Output 1 PV SP No 1 Assignment 6 73 uxiliary Output 2 PV SP No 2 ssignment 6 73 MV Display Selection
158. N me 3 3 Part Names Part Functions and Setting Levels esee eese 3 4 3 3 1 FariNames and FUNCION Sii oer bc Dane louie atts ee aie ireland riendo rasi s 3 4 3 3 2 Entering Numeric Values a ear 3 7 3 3 3 eisaeaE cp T aa Oe ante 3 8 3 3 4 ESOU ESECG Setting LV Sula 3 9 Procedures after Turning ON the Power Supp ly ccccssseesssseeeseseeeeesseeeesneeeeesseeeenseesenees 3 13 3 4 1 Basie meEoBer cue n EIE LT 3 13 3 4 2 BASIGar FOC OCUNG P PEERS 3 13 Basic Operation Moving between Setting Levels cccsssssessesseecesseecesseeeeeneeeeeaeeeeenseenenseeneeseeneeseesenseeenenseesons 4 3 4 1 1 Moving to the Initial Setting Level ccooonccccocnnnnnnocononocononononononanonnnnnoncnnnonanncnnconnnnnnnnnnos 4 3 4 1 2 Moving to the Adjustment EeVOl eonun akt re beo redd ne ce ciat io over eC vex Con ex pita e eet hg iua Sau sea node 4 4 4 1 3 Moving tothe Protect Level ccs 4 4 4 1 4 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level oooooooooooncccccccnnnccccnnccnnnnaccnnncnnnnnnconnnonnnnnnccnnnnnos 4 5 4 1 5 Moving to the Communications Setting Level oooncocccccnnonncccncccnnnnccnnnnnnnnnncccnncnnonnncnnncnnnonancrnnnnnss 4 7 Initial Setting Examples cui adn 4 8 Seino the Input TYDE riria a a ida 4 10 4 3 1 IMNPUEIYDO surta rs 4 10 selecting the Temperature Uni cccesccccdsatesceicasssaecasiicciassccace eanan iasan auia diain aa oaia iiini 4 12 4
159. O o o Q e gt O 5 D c a D o ed indu p 4 Basic Operation 4 4 Selecting the Temperature Unit 4 4 1 Temperature Unit e Either C or F can be selected as the temperature unit e Set the temperature unit in the Temperature Unit d i parameter of the Initial Setting Level The default is C The following procedure selects C Operating Procedure Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to a Setting Level display d Temperature Unit Temperature Unit 2 Press the A or Key to select C E EFI E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation 4 5 Selecting PID Control or ON OFF Control Two control methods are supported 2 PID control and ON OFF control Switching between 2 PID con trol and ON OFF control is executed by means of the PID ON OFF parameter in the initial setting level When this parameter is set to Pi d 2 PID control is selected and when set to aaf ON OFF control is selected The default is a ar e 2 PID Control PID control is set by AT auto tuning ST self tuning or manual setting For PID control set the PID constants in the Proportional Band Integral Time and Derivative Time d parameters For heating and cooling control also set the Proportional Band Cooling L F Integral Time Cooling L and Derivative Time Cooling i d KH al N o D O E a U J
160. O 5 o D 5 e D lt o e This parameter sets whether the MV Upper Limit and MV Lower Limit parameters are to be enabled for manual MV in manual mode Function a Setting range Default an Enabled af F Disabled aFF Setting e Related Parameters 535 MV Upper Limit Adjustment Level Page 6 32 MV Lower Limit Adjustment Level Page 6 32 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 77 6 Parameters ooo PV Rate of Change Calculation Alarms 1 2 3 and 4 must be assigned The alarm ea Period type must be set to 13 e The change width can be found for PV input values in any set period Differences with previous values in each set period are calculated and an alarm is output if the results Function exceed the alarm value e The PV rate of change calculation period can be set in units of 50 ms sampling period Setting range Unit Default 1 to 999 Sampling cycle 20 1 s Setting e Related Parameters See rec Process Value Set Point Operation Level Page 6 8 Alarm 1 to 4 Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 44 Il LM i li trol LEI Heating Cooling Tuning Method The control must be set to heating cooling contro and 2 PID control This parameter sets the tuning method that is suitable for the cooling control characteristics Function A Setting range Default 0 Same as heating control Sening 1 Linear 2 Air cooling 3 Water cooling e Air Cooling Water
161. OFF control If the detected current is greater than the specified heater short detection current even though the control output is OFF a heater short will be assumed and an alarm will be output uJdelv SH ccri v E5CC E5EC Temperature Input Temperature sensor Current value fo gt Auxiliary output assigned to an HS alarm Voltage output for driving SSR An HS alarm is separate from alarms 1 to 4 The HS Alarm Use parameter and other parameters must be set in the Advanced Function Setting Level With the default settings the HS alarm is output on auxiliary output 1 You can use the output assignment parameters to change the output You can use an integrated alarm to output an OR of alarms 1 to 4 and the other alarms For details on the integrated alarm refer to 5 9 OR Output of Alarms e Parameters Parameter Level HS Alarm Use OFF or ON Advanced Function HS Alarm Latch OFF or ON Peor 0s HS Alarm Hysteresis 0 1to50 0 A 0 1 to 50 0 A SI E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 41 4 Basic Operation Parameter No 1 display No 2 display Level HS Alarm 1 or 2 alarm 0 0 to 50 0 A 0 0 to 50 0 Adjustment Level Leakage Current 1 or 0 0 to 55 0 A 0 0 to 55 0 2 Monitor iep Memes A Auxiliary Output 1 to 4 HS HS alarm or HS or HH Advanced Function Assignment e A heater short is detected by measuring the leakage current while the control output for heating is OFF Heater burnout detec
162. OMRON Introduction Preparations Digital Temperature Controllers Part Names and Basic Procedures 4 User s Manual Bersm 5 ESCC Advanced E 5 E C Operations Parameters User Calibration Appendices H174 E1 01 Preface Preface The E5CC and E5EC are Digital Controllers The main functions and characteristics of these Digital Controllers are as follows e Any of the following types of input can be used thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer infrared sensor analog voltage or analog current e Either standard or heating cooling control can be performed e Both auto tuning and self tuning are supported e Event inputs can be used to switch set points multi SP function switch between RUN and STOP status switch between automatic and manual operation start reset the simple program function and perform other operations e Heater burnout detection and heater short HS alarms functions are supported Applicable models with heater burnout detection function e Communications are supported Applicable to models with communications e User calibration of the sensor input is supported e User calibration of the transfer output is supported Applicable to models with a transfer output e The structure is waterproof IP66 e Conforms to UL CSA and IEC safety standards and EMC Directive This manual describes how to use the E5CC E5EC Read this manual thoroughly and be sure you understand
163. P No switching bit 2 This parameter sets the number of Multi SP points that will be used with key operations none or 2 to 8 Function a Setting range Default OFF 2 to 8 OFF Setting Cools IRL SP Ramp Time Unit The ST parameter must be set to OFF e This parameter sets the time unit for the rate of change during SP ramp operation f Function a Setting range Default 5 EU s M EU min H EU h M Setting e Related Parameters See docs Ramp SP Monitor Operation Level 6 10 SP Ramp Set Value Adjustment Level Page 6 32 SP Ramp Fall Value Adjustment Level Page 6 32 6 56 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters RESE Standby Sequence Reset Alarm 1 to 4 type must be 5 6 7 10 or 11 e This parameter selects the conditions for enabling reset after the standby sequence of the M alarm has been canceled Function Output is turned OFF when switching to the Initial Setting Level Communications Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level or Calibration Level e Condition A Control started including when the power supply is turned ON and an alarm value alarm value upper lower limit the process value input shift the process value slope coefficient or the SP changed e Condition B Power ON e The following example shows the reset action when the alarm type is lower limit alarm with standby sequence SP change y Condition A only Alarm after change H
164. PF Setting parameter to A M auto manual 7 ol N U h O 3 5 D 5 c O O 5 mp e Operating Procedure e Setting PID Control Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to al Setting Level display L NEL PID ON OFF PID ON OFF 2 Press the 4 or Key to set PID CNEL e Setting Auto Manual Selection Advanced Function Setting 1 Press the Key several times in the Advanced Function Set Level ting Level to display FF PF Setting uoneJjedo Jenueln L zL G PF Setting 2 Press the 4 or Key to select A M auto manual e Setting the Manual MV with the KP Key Press the Key in the Operation Level to enter the Manual 0Pe tion Level Control Level PV MV 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the manual MV In this example the MV is set to 50 E 1 The manual MV setting must be saved see page Applying Changes to Numeric Values on page 3 7 but values changed with key operations are reflected in the control output immediately E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 33 5 Advanced Operations 5 13 Using the Transfer Output 5 13 1 Transfer Output Function A transfer output can be used on Controllers that have a transfer output e Precision and User Calibration Precision User calibration 0 3 FS Supported A For details on calibration refer to Section 6 Parameters Transfer Output Signal Initial
165. Parameters in This Section Parameters are described level by level The first page of each level describes the parameters in the level and the procedure to switch between parameters e Alarms It will be specified in this section when alarms are set for the Control Output 1 or 2 Assignment parameters or for the Auxiliary Output 1 to 4 Assignment parameters For example when alarm 1 is set for the Control Output 1 Assignment parameter it will be specified that alarm 1 is assigned Assigning a work bit to either control output 1 or 2 or to auxiliary output 1 to 4 is also considered to be the same as assigning an alarm For example if work bit 1 is set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter then alarms 1 to 4 have been assigned 6 2 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters 6 2 Protect Level Four levels of protection are provided on the E5CC E5EC operation adjustment protect initial set ting communications protect setting change protect and PF key protect These protect levels prevent unwanted operation of the keys on the front panel in varying degrees esteem ee Pees ses ese es mom om om oum om eee eee cm om om Gm om m ee ee E Press the keys Protect Level Operation Adjustment Level Level display will flash Press the om m m um um mw mm m mom m mom G9 i 4 dr Displ h See NEUEN Key for ee ane p o m Press the U due LA QU Press the K
166. Press the 6 Level Key for at least 3 seconds Initial Setting Level Hit i ALT1 Indicates the Alarm 1 Type parameter The default setting is 7 2 Upper limit alarm Press the Mode ao several times to display Hi E ALT1 Initial Setting Level Alarm type 7 Lower limit alarm with standby sequence example Press the A Up and Down Keys to change the value If the Controller is equipped with HB HS alarm detection the Alarm 1 Type is not displayed for the default settings To use alarm 1 set an output assignment to alarm 1 For details refer to 4 6 3 Assigned Output Functions If required use the Mode Key and the 4 Up and G2 Down Keys to repeat the procedure to set alarm types for HL Er ALT2 Alarm 2 Type and FL EW ALT3 Alarm 3 Type The number of alarms that is supported depends on the model of Digital Controller Some of the alarm parame ters may not be displayed When you are finished press the Level Key for at least 1 second to return to the operation display E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 3 15 3 Part Names and Basic Procedures I Alarm Type Numbers Alarm Alarm function There will be no alarm outputs seis OFF m Upper and lower limit alarm e Upper limit alarm
167. S alarm turns ON o Event Inputs e With any E5CC E5EC model that supports event inputs you can use external contact or non contact inputs to achieve any of the following functions Switching set points Multi SP No Switch 8 points max switching RUN STOP switching between automatic and manual operation starting resetting the program inverting direct reverse operation switching the SP mode100 AT execute cancel 40 AT execute cancel setting change enable disable communications write enable disable and canceling the alarm latch E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 1 3 y Introduction e Communications Functions With any E5CC E5EC model that supports communications you can use communications via CompoWay F or Modbus RS 485 Interface 1 CompoWay F is an integrated general purpose serial communications protocol developed by OMRON It uses commands compliant with the well established FINS together with a consistent frame format on OMRON Programmable Controllers to facilitate communications between personal computers and components 2 Modbus is a communications control method conforming to the RTU Mode of Modbus Protocol Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric e Transfer Output With any E5CC E5EC model that supports a transfer output you can output the set point process value manipulated variable or other values as a 4 to 20 mA or 1 to 5 V transfer output e Remote SP
168. Set value 5 Upper and lower limit with standby sequence e For the upper and lower limit alarms in cases 1 and 2 above the alarm is always OFF if upper and lower limit hysteresis overlaps e In case 3 the alarm is always OFF 5 Set value 5 Upper and lower limit with standby sequence e The alarm is always OFF if upper and lower limit hysteresis overlaps 6 Refer to Standby Sequence Reset on page 6 57 for information on the operation of the standby sequence 7 Refer to Loop Burnout Alarm LBA Valid only for alarm 1 on page 3 17 8 Refer to PV change rate alarm on page 3 18 9 When heating cooling control is performed the MV absolute value upper limit alarm functions only for the heating operation and the MV absolute value lower limit alarm functions only for the cooling operation 4 32 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation 10 This value is displayed only when a remote SP input is used It functions in both Local SP Mode and Remote SP Mode e Set the alarm type independently for each alarm in the Alarm 1 to 4 Type parameters in the Initial Setting Level The default is 2 Upper limit alarm e f the Controller is equipped with HB HS alarm detection the Alarm 1 Type is not displayed for the default settings To use alarm 1 set an output assignment to alarm 1 Refer to 4 6 3 Assigned Output Functions gt mk o gt 3 O c m c o sed we
169. Setting Display Disabled PV SP MV Can be set SP dd SP E O megal me Cambeset 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 SP di n LL L I m m m CO NIO O1 A O N Jl m J r _ m I Li r i m a na n im J I Lit m i L1 m Lid Lt 1 me i _ Li m mM J me m Li r m a 1 z 23 Derivative Time Cooling 1 With the E5CC only the PV and SP can be displayed 2 The Alarm Value 1 parameter is displayed even if the Alarm 1 Type parameter is set for no alarm However any value that is set is not valid ri I rm L rm Li ra Q E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 35 6 Parameters 6 6 Manual Control Level The manipulated variable can be set in manual mode while the PV MV parameter is displayed If the Manual Output Method parameter is set to HOLD when control moves from automatic mode to manual mode the final MV from automatic mode will be used as the initial manual MV If Manual Output Method parameter is set to INT the setting of the Manual MV Initial Value parameter will be used as the initial manual MV In manual mode the change value will be saved immediately and ref
170. Soak Time pa Program Pattern parameter must not be set to e This parameter sets the time for the control operation when using the simple program function Function Setting range Unt Ut 1 1o 9999 Setting e Related Parameters See Sa Program Start Operation Level Page 6 12 Soak Time Remain Operation Level Page 6 13 Wait Band Adjustment Level Page 6 30 Program Pattern Initial Setting Level Page 6 43 Soak Time Unit Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 74 The Program Pattern parameter m not HE b Wait Band es ogra attern parameter must not be set to e This parameter sets the stable band within which the soak time is measured for the simple program function Function A Setting range a Temperature input OFF or 0 1 to 999 9 off Setting Analog input o Related Parameters see Program Start Operation Level Page 6 12 Soak Time Remain Operation Level Page 6 13 Soak Time Adjustment Level Page 6 30 Program Pattern Initial Setting Level Page 6 43 Soak Time Unit Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 74 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters The control must be set to 2 PID control MY 7 5 MV at Stop The MV at Stop and Error Addition parameter must be ON e This parameter sets the MV to use when the RUN STOP status changes from RUN to STOP Function Control method Setting range m Default Standard 5 0 to 105 0 0
171. This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point SP is higher than the alarm value X This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point SP is smaller than the alarm value X 6 Parameters Set value Standard Control ON EE OFF MV 0 Heating Cooling Control Heating MV 16 MV absolute value upper limit alarm 17 MV absolute value lower limit alarm Heating Cooling Control Cooling 18 RSP absolute value 0 upper limit alarm 19 RSP absolute value lower limit alarm Alarm output operation hen alarm value When alarm value Alarm type W X is positive X is negative Standard Control ON E aine OFF mv Heating Cooling Control Heating MV Always ON Standard Control X ON OFF 0 Heating Cooling Control Cooling MV Always ON Description of function This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated variable MV is higher than the alarm value X This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated variable MV is lower than the alarm value X This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the remote SP RSP is higher than the alarm value X This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the remote SP RSP is lower than the alarm value X 1 With set values 1 4 and 5 the upper and lower limit values can be set independently for each alarm type and are expressed as L and H 2 Set value 1 Upper and
172. This level is used to calibrate the Digital Controller You can move to the Calibration Level from the Advanced Function Setting Level Monitor Setting Item Level To use the Key to display the Monitor Setting Items change the setting of the PF Setting parameter to PF HP The items that will be displayed in the Monitor Setting Item Level are set using the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 3 Part Names and Basic Procedures 3 4 Procedures after Turning ON the Power Supply 3 4 1 Basic Flow of Operations The basic flow of operations after you turn ON the power supply is shown below l 2 Set the input type y l 4 5 Set the set point i 6 Set the alarm set values e U O o O o c 0 D ct O c 5 e O mp 3 D U O o c o lt 3 4 2 Basic Procedure The basic procedure is given below suoneJedo JO Mo J DISEG L p 1 Turn ON the power supply L5LERR input error flashes on the display if a sensor is not connected or if the connected sensor is different from input type Connect a sensor if one is not already connected The display flashes Press the S Level Key for at least 3 seconds Initial Setting Level lt t IN T will be displayed to show that the Initial Setting Level
173. V Monitor range Unit Process value Temperature According to indication range for each sensor EU Analog Scaling lower limit 5 FS to Scaling upper limit 5 FS Refer to A 7 Sensor Input Setting Range Indication Range Con trol Hange Set point SP lower limit to SP upper limit EU Setting range Unit MV Manual MV Standard control 5 0 to 105 0 Heating cooling control 105 0 to 105 0 When the Manual MV Limit Enable parameter is set to ON the setting range will be the MV lower limit to the MV upper limit P fo D 5 c D O O 5 9 r O lt o e Related Parameters 5935 Standard or Heating Cooling Initial Setting Level Page 6 42 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 37 6 Parameters 6 7 Initial Setting Level This level is used to set up the basic Digital Controller specifications In this level you can set the Input Type parameter to set the sensor input to be connected limit the setting range of set points set the Operation Level Press the S Key for at least 1 s Initial Setting Level TML LN I Ilar 7M Li hd LIN I E3 ca o NEL LN L q EJ oF LL C D r3 9 LL ne D J JE 9 Ds Ts co co o 1 ru ot r3 m co Input Type Scaling Upper Limit Scaling Lower Limit Decimal Point Temperature Unit SP Upper Limit SP Lower Limit PI
174. VAC 24 VAC DC Screw terminals Screw terminals with cover HB alarm For RX NN E LA m EE Universal input u Remote Transfer 000 Communications and HS QX RR For CX or 2E Input alarm OUIRUE QQ or QR Selectable Selectable Selectable i Selectable Selectable Selectable O O X RS 485 NL NL ME _ EAE RS 485 2 for 3 phase ha heaters m Provided m 1 The options that can be selected depend on the type of control output 2 The control output cannot be used as a transfer output 8 These cannot be selected if 5 screw terminals with cover is selected for the terminal type 8 O al Co e O 00 O 0 O 4 4 oO O N O O I E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 1 N epojy pue uoneanBijuo O I Z L puaba7 1equinwN I n NO I O oa D Z c 3 o D E D D 2 a o y Introduction E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Preparations 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 InstallallOli sitiada aro qox Dae bnc om ee tee ae s 2 2 2 1 1 Dimensions Unit mm 0 00 n 2 2 2 1 2 Panel Cutout Uni Mm 100 2h eed AA ERO 2 3 estes MOUNT ts Es 2 5 Using th Terminals aid IS A a 2 7 2 2 1 E5CC Terminal Block Wiring Example llle 2 7 2 2 2 E5EC Terminal Block Wiring Example llle
175. a current of less than 10 0 A Normal current value Burnout current value gt 1 A When the difference is less than 1 A detection is unstable Heater with a current of 10 0 A or more Normal current value Burnout current value gt 2 5 A When the difference is less than 2 5 A detection is unstable e The setting range is 0 1 to 49 9 A Heater burnouts and heater shorts are not detected when the set value is 0 0 or 50 0 When the set value is 0 0 the HB alarm is always OFF and the HS alarm is always ON When the set value is 50 0 the HB alarm is always ON and the HS alarm is always OFF e Set the total current value for normal heater operation to 50 A or less When a current value of 55 0 A is exceeded FF FF is displayed in the Heater Current 1 or 2 Value Monitor and Leakage Current 1 or 2 Monitor parameters HS Alarm 1 2 set value 4 12 5 Application Examples 1 Single phase Heaters Example Using a 200 VAC 1 kW Heater Normal Burnout 5A AC line AC line 200 V 200 V Burnout Load such as a heater 5 A OA CT 40 CT Product A Product To CT input To CT input The heater power supply provides 5 A when the current is normal and O A when there is a burnout so the heater burnout detection current is calculated as follows Normal current Heater burnout current Heater burnout detection current a 7 5 0 2 5 A E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174
176. a standard DC current voltage source e Use the compensating conductor designed for the selected thermocouple When thermocouples R S E B W or PLII or an infrared temperature sensor is used the cold junction compensator and the compensating conductor can be substituted with the cold junction compensator and the compensating conductor for thermocouple K EN Additional Information Connecting the Cold Junction Compensator Correct process values cannot be obtained if you touch the contact ends of the compensating conductor during calibration of a thermocouple Accordingly short circuit enable or open disable the tip of the thermocouple inside the cold junction compensator as shown in the figure below to create a contact or non contact state for the cold junction compensator Cold junction compensator Cold junction compensator Short circuit O O _O 0 C 32 F O O E5CC E5EC 0 C 32 F E5CC E5EC O 0O mpensatin nductor Compensating conducto Compensating conductor E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 7 User Calibration In this example calibration is shown for a Controller with thermocouple infrared temperature sensor set as the input type 1 Connect the power supply 2 Connect a standard DC current voltage source STV precision digital multimeter DMM and contact junction compensator e g a zero controller as in the figure to the thermocouple in
177. aches the preset set point When the manipulated variable turns OFF the temperature begins to fall and the con trol turns ON again This operation is repeated over a certain temperature range At this time how much the temperature must fall before control turns ON again is determined by the Hysteresis Heating parameter Also what direction the manipulated variable must be adjusted in response to an increase or decrease in the process value is determined by the Direct Reverse Operation parameter 4 8 1 ON OFF Control e Switching between 2 PID control and ON OFF control is performed using the PID ON OFF parameter in the Initial Setting Level When this parameter is set to PL d 2 PID control is selected and when it is set to nNaF ON OFF control is selected The default is a af O Hysteresis e With ON OFF control hysteresis is used to stabilize operation when switching between ON and OFF The control output heating and control output cooling functions are set in the Hysteresis Heating and Hysteresis Cooling parameters respectively e n standard control heating or cooling control the setting of the Hysteresis Heating parameter in the Adjustment Level is used as the hysteresis regardless of whether the control type is heating control or cooling control Reverse operation Temperature Hysteresis 0 Time Heater ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 4 20 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic
178. age current Also investigate the errors detected by the HS alarm function Select either forward or reverse operation depending on the required control Reverse operation is used for heating operations Check whether heater burnout or deterioration have occurred Also investigate the errors detected by the heater burnout alarm Insufficient heater Check whether the heater s heating capacity is sufficient capacity Cooling system in Check whether a cooling system is operating operation Set the heating prevention temperature setting to a value higher than the set temperature of the Digital Controller E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 T e O c y D 0 O O ct 5 e A Appendices Timing Seus Meaning Countermeasures Page Output will not turn ON During operation continued After long service life Temperature Controller will not operate Temperature error is large Input error S err display Set to STOP default RUN Specified operation is unsuitable for required control default Reverse operation A high hysteresis is set for ON OFF operation default 1 0 C The specified power is not being supplied from the terminals Set to STOP default RUN Set the RUN STOP mode to RUN If STOP is lit on the 5 12 display control is stopped Select either forward or reverse operation depending on 4 14 the required control Reverse operat
179. ak time gt END display RSET 5 STRT aispay END output RUN mode continues e Starting Method Any of the following three methods can be used to start the simple program e Setting the Program Start parameter to STRT e Turning ON an event input The program start must be assigned to an event input e Starting with an Operation Command using communications When the program start is not assigned to an event input When the simple program is started and reset writing is performed to non volatile memory Be sure to consider the write life 1 million writes of the non volatile memory in the system design When the program start is assigned to an event input the Program Start parameter will function as a monitor display and the RSET STRT displays can be used to check when the event input has started or reset the simple program When this is done the Program Start parameter functions as a monitor display only and cannot be changed using key operations If the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF the event input assignment setting will be initialized to None e Soak Time and Wait Band Wait band o ende e M Reemi Wait band RSET gt STRT l l l l l l Soak time remain i i i i i l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l Set point Set point The wait band is the band within which the process value is stable in respect to the set point The soak time is measured within the wait band Th
180. alue Set value Ti Time Start of control MIB Start of control e When the manipulated variable MV is saturated the amount of overshooting may be somewhat higher in comparison to PID control based on AT or ST in normal mode This procedure selects RT mode Operating Procedure Advanced Function Setting 1 Press the Key several times in the Advanced Function Level Setting Level to display RT robust tuning Bulun 199 LS 2 6 7 RT The default is oF F 2 Press the 4 or Key to select aN RT ON E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 27 4 Basic Operation 4 9 3 Manual Setup Individual PID constants can be manually set in the Proportional Band Integral Time and Derivative Time parameters in the Adjustment Level In this example the Proportional Band parameter is set to 10 0 the Inte gral Time parameter to 250 and the Derivative Time parameter to 45 Operating Procedure e Setting the Proportional Band 7 Press the Key several times in the Adjustment Level to 7US ment Level display the Proportional Band parameter Proportional Band 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the value to 10 0 The default settings are as follows e Temperature input C or F 8 0 e Analog input FS 10 0 e Setting the Integral Time 7 2 Press the Key several times in the Adjustment Level to Adjustment Level display the Integral Time parameter In
181. ameters HB and HS alarms must be supported roy LII Leakage Current 1 Monitor The HS Alarm Use parameter must be set to ON po This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting SSR short circuits This parameter measures and displays the heater current when the heater is OFF e The HS alarm is not detected if the OFF time for the control output for heating is 100 ms Function or less 35 ms or less if the control period is 0 1 or 0 2 s L Monitor range Unit 0 0 to 55 0 A Monitor e FFFF is displayed when 55 0 A is exceeded e If an alarm is output for the HS Alarm 1 parameter the No 1 display will flash the Leakage Current 1 Monitor parameter o Related Parameters see HS Alarm 1 Adjustment Level Page 6 23 HS Alarm 2 Adjustment Level Page 6 24 HS Alarm Use Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 68 Error Displays LiF i Page A 12 HB and HS alarms must be supported The HS Alarm Use parameter must be set to ON HS H HS Alarm 1 This parameter sets the current for the HS alarm to be output e An HS alarm is output when the leakage current value exceeds the setting of this parameter Function When the set value is 50 0 the HS alarm output is turned OFF When the set value is 0 0 the HS alarm output is turned ON Setting range Unit Default 0 0 to 50 0 50 0 Setting e Related Parameters See Leakage Current 1 Monitor Adjustment Level Page 6 23 HS Alarm Adva
182. and PF Setting UN S m Lit Fr UN 7a pa Lim L1 Fr p Jl I crc Zu n I n Uu a a Lit SHFT Digit Shift Key Disabled PV SP Multi SP PV SP MV PV SP Soak time remain Proportional band P Integral time I Derivative time D Alarm value 1 Alarm value upper limit 1 Alarm value lower limit 1 Alarm value 2 Alarm value upper limit 2 Alarm value lower limit 2 Alarm value 3 Alarm value upper limit 3 Alarm value lower limit 3 Alarm value 4 Alarm value upper limit 4 O Monitor Setting Item 1 0 JO 0 A ON Temperature input Input setting range lower limit to 200 EU Input setting range upper limit Analog input Scaling lower limit to Scaling upper limit Manual MV Limit MHNL OFF ON OFF None Enable PV Rate of Change PY RP 1 to 999 20 Sampling Calculation Period period Method 1 Linear 2 Air cooling OFF OFF SHFT None STOP STOP R S RUN STOP AT 1 40 AT execute cancel LAT Alarm Latch Cancel PFDP Monitor setting item Alarm value lower limit 4 PV SP Internal SP Proportional Band Cooling C P Integral Time Cooling C I Monitor Setting Item 2 EBEdB Same as Monitor Setting Item 1 10 None Monitor Setting Item 3 PFa d Same as Monitor Setting Item 1 p qe None Monitor Setting Item 5 Pras Same as Monitor Setting Item 1 O d None PV SP No 1 Display 0 Nothing is
183. ange When the SP ramp function is enabled and the change width exceeds the specified rate of change an area where the set point is restricted will be created as shown in the following diagram During the SP ramp control will be performed not for the specified set point but rather for the set point restricted by the rate of change set for the SP ramp function SP SP after change 4 21 o c 2 5 Q mp 3 O o U JJ D 3 o Tl c 2 O ct O 5 mp O E 3 mp mp gt O o U O 3 D 5 O JJ D mp D SP before change Time Point of change The rate of change during an SP ramp is specified using the SP Ramp Set Value SP Ramp Fall Value and SP Ramp Time Unit parameters The SP Ramp Set Value parameter is set to OFF by default and the SP Ramp Fall Value parameter is set to SAME by default i e the SP ramp function is disabled Changes in the ramp set point can be monitored in the Set Point During SP Ramp parameter Opera tion Level Use this parameter when monitoring SP ramp operation The SP ramp function operates in the same way when switching the set point using the multi SP func tion dwey dS L 9 S Parameters Display Level SPARE SP Ramp Set Value E Adjustment Level change SPRL SP Ramp Fall Value O NE Menor tater eh Adjustment Level change SPRL SP Ramp Time Unit Unit for setting the SP Aan FUNCION Setting Level ar Alarm SP Selection Alarm SP selection apad races Setti
184. anged in the Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter but the AT execution time may be longer than for 100 AT The limit cycle timing varies according to whether the deviation DV at the start of auto tuning execution is less than 10 FS Deviation gt 10 FS Deviation lt 10 FS PV Limit Cycle MV PV Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 40 Amplitude 40 E AA l l Deviation l l l l Deviation 10 FS 10 FS Time Time AT started AT ended AT started AT ended e 100 AT e Operation will be as shown in the following diagram regardless of the deviation DV at the start of AT execution To shorten the AT execution time select 10096 AT PV Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 100 SP A A Time AT started AT ended The Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter is disabled This procedure executes 40 AT Operating Procedure 1 Press the Key several times in the Adjustment Level to dis AGUSIMENT LEVEI play FE AT Execute Cancel AT Execute Cancel 2 Press the 4 or Key to select AL 40 AT execute The TUNE indicator will light during autotuning 3 When AT ends the AT Execute Cancel parameter is set to OFF 4YUSiment Level AT Execute Cancel 4 24 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation 4 9 2 ST Self tuning ST self tuning is a function that finds PID constants by using step response tuning SRT when Digital Controller operation begins or when t
185. anual MV Any parameters that are automatically initialized when another parameter is changed are considered to be at their default settings Example If the Input Type parameter is changed to 7 850 is considered to be the default setting of the Set Point Upper Limit parameter Refer to A 6 9 Initialization According to Parameter Changes for the parameters that are automatically initialized If the setting of a parameter is changed back to its default setting it will no longer be displayed To display it again set the Changed Parameters Only parameter to OFF lf a parameter is not displayed even when the Changed Parameters Only parameter is set to OFF check the conditions for the parameter Use parameter masks to select the parameters to display without considering whether they are set to their default settings The CX Thermo is required to set parameter masks Operating Procedure 1 Press the Key several times in the Protect Level to display 2 Protect Level L HGP Changed Parameters Only HF A Changed Press the 4 or Key to set the value to ON Press the Keys for at least 1 s to return to the Operation Level Only the parameters that have been changed from their Parameters arr Only default settings will be displayed E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 gi do Q m D 5 ae O lt U 9 D 3 D D o F D p s D lt 0
186. arity NONE None EVEN Even Send Data Wait Time Sdik A 26 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A 6 9 A Append Initialization According to Parameter Changes ices The parameters that are initialized when parameters are changed are shown under Related initialized parameters Changed parameter Related initialized parameters Related parameter initialization execution condition SP Upper Limit SP Lower Limit Set Point SPO to SP7 RT Proportional Band Integral Time Derivative Time Proportional Band Cooling Integral Time Cooling Derivative Time Cooling Integral Derivative Time Unit MV Upper Limit MV Lower Limit MV at Stop MV at PV Error Transfer Output Upper Limit Transfer Output Lower Limit 4 SP Mode Remote SP Enable Remote SP Upper Limit Remote SP Lower Limit Control Output 1 Assignment Control Output 2 Assignment Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment Auxiliary Output 4 Assignment Event Input Assignment 1 to 6 Move to Protect Level MV Display Selection Z 010 dS o O U o yun eynjeJeduue Hur 41907 Hules ywq 1eddf dS yw 19M0 dS Nuijoog HBune H JO p1epue s uJojjed weibold 9 q8U3 dS 310U19y N O D D 5 o Q c O O O E D Le c rm mr 3 e P Lo O IK iam KE zi e O Q m g O lt D lt
187. arms e Clearing the Program End Status The program END output and display will be cleared when the Program Start parameter is changed from STRT to RSET The setting is changed from STRT to RSET while the Program Start parameter is displayed The program END status can also be cleared using an event If the program start function is assigned to an event however the program end status cannot be cleared from the Program Start parameter display which will function only as a monitor display E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 39 p I c 2 5 mp gt D o 3 a D U O D 3 TI c 5 Q ct O 5 pug ueJ604g au ye vonelado 2 p1 S 5 Advanced Operations Simple programming is used The related parameters are as follows Program pattern STOP Soak time 10 min Wait band 3 O ee eS LE pu band 3 Set point 7777777 ON PE a Soak time 10 min END display gt RSET gt STRT STOP END output Operating Procedure e Setting the Program Pattern Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to a Setting Level display PER Program Pattern Program Pattern 2 Press the A or Key to select Sta STOP The default is oF F e Setting the Soak Time 1 Press the 9 Key several times in the Adjustment Level to dis play 55A Soak Time Lia H soak Time 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the value to 10 The def
188. ast 1 s This level is displayed immediately after the power is turned ON um mmmm oum om mom m om m m Ba Jt E Press the C Key for at least 3 s Control stops tom om om mom mom m om m om m m mom m om m juo mom omo mom momo momo mom omo momo momo mom Communi Initial Setting Level cations Setting Level 1 Press the S Key for less than 1 s Sn nn nen eee ene enee i rocess Value et Point 1 a e mm mm m e RUN STOP Lr o x rocess Value Alarm Value 1 6 14 et Point 2 p e O o D D ct O 5 r O lt o Alarm Value 6 15 Upper Limit 1 Multi SP Set Alarm Value n Point Selection Lower Limit 1 6 15 Remote SP Alarm Value 2 Monitor 6 14 Alarm Value Upper Limit 2 6 15 eater Current 1 Alarm Value alue Monitor Lower Limit 2 Heater Current 2 Alarm Value 3 3n Value Monitor Leakage Current 1 Alarm Value Mon 6 11 ee onitor Upper Limit 3 Leakage Current 2 Alarm Value Monitor 6 Lower Limit 3 6 15 Program Start Alarm Value 4 6 14 Alarm Value 6 15 Upper Limit 4 Alarm Value Lower Limit 4 6 15 MV Monitor Heating 6 16 MV Monitor Cooling 6 16 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 7 6 Parameters Process Value Set Point 1 PV SP No 1 Display Selection must not be set to 0 Process Value Set Point 2 PV SP No 2 Display Selection must not be set to 0 The fol
189. ata to non volatile EI memory press the Key without pressing the 4 Key i e while Na is displayed Na in the No 2 display Press the 4 Key The No 2 display changes to 4 5 Release the key and wait 2 seconds or press the Y Key This saves the temporarily registered calibration data in non volatile memory 6 The Calibration Mode is ended by turning OFF the power supply E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 7 User Calibration 7 7 Checking Indication Accuracy e After calibrating the input be sure to check the indication accuracy to make sure that the calibration has been executed correctly e Operate the E5CC E5EC in the process value set point monitor mode e Check the indication accuracy at the following three values upper limit lower limit and mid point e To check the range of an infrared sensor set the input type parameter to 6 i e a K thermocouple and input a voltage that is equivalent to the starting power of a K thermocouple e Thermocouple or Infrared Temperature Sensor e Preparations The diagram below shows the required device connections Make sure that the E5CC E5EC and cold junction compensator are connected by a compensating conductor for the thermocouple that is to be used during actual operation Cold junction compensator Input power supply Compensating conductor Aoeinooy uomneoipu 6ur459u5 7 4 Cold junction compensator 7 Input power sup
190. ater Current 2 Value 0 0 to 55 0 A Monitor Heater Burnout 0 0 to 50 0 A Detection 2 Leakage Current 1 0 0 to 55 0 A Monitor Leakage Current 2 0 0 to 55 0 A Monitor SPO 52 0 SPloweriimitto SPupperimt o EU SP 52 1 SP lower imito SPupperiimt b EU SP2 52 2 SP lower imito SPupperiimt b ME SP3 9 3 SP lower imito SPupperiimt b E SP4 52 4 SPwerimitoSPupermi b E SP5 52 5 SPlowerlimitto SPupperiimt b ME SP6 52 5 SPlowerlimitto SP upperiimt b jE P7 52 7 SPlowerlimitto SP upperiimt b EU Shin Sees TT Process Value Slope p qm to 9 999 1 000 None Coefficient Hemote SP Input Shift ee input 199 9 to 999 9 E ee C or F Analog input 1 999 to 9 999 JO JEU Slope Coefficient Proportional Band Temperature input 0 110 9899 eo CoF A ro Integral Derivative Time Unit of 1 s 0 to 9 999 a Seconds Integral Derivative Time Unit of 0 1 s 0 0 to 999 9 233 0 el Integral Derivative Time Unit of 1 s 0 to 9 999 L ioe Seconds Integral Derivative Time Unit of 0 1 s 0 0 to 999 9 40 0 eec cv E Integral Time Derivative Time Cooling Analog input 0109899 f hoo rs Integral Derivative Time Unit of 1 s 0 to 9 999 LI Seconds Integral Derivative Time Unit of 0 1 s 0 0 to 999 9 233 0 Derivative Time Integral Derivative Time Unit of 1 s 0 to 9 999 nm Seconds Cooling Integral Derivative Time Unit of 0 1 s 0 0 to 999 9 40 0 D
191. atus Display Function e This parameter sets a control or alarm status that is displayed alternately in 0 5 s cycles on the No 1 display when the PV is set to be displayed in the No 1 display Function e PV e PV SP e PV Manual MV e PV SP Manual MV This includes when the PV SP is selected for the Monitor Setting Item parameter ES Setting range Default OFF No PV status display aFF seming MANL MANU is alternately displayed during manual control Star STOP is alternately displayed while operation is stopped HLM t ALM1 is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status M ALN2 is alternately displayed during Alarm 2 status ALMS is alternately displayed during Alarm 3 status j ALM4 is alternately displayed during Alarm 4 status ALM ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1 2 3 or 4 is set to ON HR HA is alternately displayed when an HB alarm or HS alarm is ON Ll mm Lt xs L E e Related Parameters Process Value Set Point Operation Level Page 6 8 PV MV Manual MV Manual Control Level Page 6 37 See 6 82 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters UN Vv 5 Gr SE i SV Status Display Function e This parameter sets a control or alarm status that is displayed alternately in 0 5 s cycles on the No 2 display when the PV is set to be displayed in the No 1 display Function e PV e PV SP PV Manual MV PV SP Manual MV This inc
192. ault for a relay output is 20 seconds ES e Setting Direct Reverse Operation Control Period Heating gt o D 5 ro O c Cama 5 c F o y D S o D ct O 5 T Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to a Setting Level display aPE Direct Reverse Operation Direct Reverse Operation 2 Press the 4 or Key to select af F Reverse Operation The default is aF F Reverse Operation 4 6 3 Assigned Output Functions e Function assignments can be changed by changing the settings for control and auxiliary output assignments e The default function assignments for each output are shown below suonoun J mamo paubissy 9 p Parameter name Initial status Control Output 1 Assignment Control output cam heating Control Output 2 Assignment alte Not assigned Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment ET Alarm 1 Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment SUb Alarm 2 Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment Subd Alarm 3 Auxiliary Output 4 Assignment Alarm 4 E5EC only e Refer to page 6 73 for the functions that can be assigned to the outputs e Each output is automatically initialized as shown below by changing the control mode between standard and heating cooling E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 15 4 Basic Operation Assigned Output Functions Controllers with Three or Fewer Auxiliary Outputs Parametername EE Without control output 2 With con
193. ault is 1 min or h e Setting the Wait Band 1 Press the 9 Key several times in the Adjustment Level to dis play Wi b Wait Band 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the value to 3 0 The default is af F 5 40 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations 5 14 3 Application Example Using a Simple Program The program will be started by changing the setting of the Program Start parameter The following example shows using a simple program with the program pattern set to STOP Set point adm l l l Soak time Soak time I I dW gt frun m RUN STOP l l l status l l l orm RSET STRT RSET ser AE Program pg l l start uoljouny weiboidg ajdwis ay Buisn pyL S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Timing Description 1 e The Program Start parameter was changed from RSET to STRT using either an event or key operations e The RUN STOP status automatically changes to RUN mode when the above operation is per formed 2 e The Program Start parameter was changed from STRT to RSET using either an event or key operations before the soak time expired e The RUN STOP status automatically changes to STOP mode when the above operation is per ter set to RSET stopped e Normal control operation is started 7 e The Program Start parameter is changed from RSET to STRT using either an event or key oper ations after the
194. ccccccconccncccnonconcnnnanoncnonanoos 6 9 Automatic Display Return Time 6 62 Auxiliary Output 1 to 4 Assignment 4 15 5 7 6 73 Auxiliary Output 1 to 4 Open in Alarm 6 58 Changed Parameter Only esesssss 6 5 Cold Junction Compensation Method 6 64 Communications Baud Rate 6 84 Communications Data Length 6 84 Communications Parity eeeesessessss 6 84 Communications Stop Bits 6 84 Communications Unit No eessesseesss 6 84 Communications Wait Time 6 84 Communications Writing ssesessssse 6 20 Control Output 1 Assignment 6 72 Control Output 1 Signal sessseuussss 6 49 Control Output 2 Assignment 6 72 Control Output 2 Signal ssueseuuusss 6 49 Control Period Cooling ssssssse 6 43 Control Period Heating sssssssss 6 43 Desa Band NEP 5 8 6 28 Decimal POINT cM 6 40 D rivative TIME asustan 6 27 Derivative Time Cooling 4 13 5 9 6 28 DIJE SAN ataca ee eee 6 79 Direct Reverse Operation occcccccccncccccncccnconononenos 6 44 Display B
195. corresponding alarm value parameter The Alarm SP Selection parameter is used to specify the alarm for either the ramp SP or the target SP The corresponding alarm hysteresis setting is also valid SP absolute value upper limit alarm SP absolute value lower limit alarm Example Example ON ON OFF SP OFF Lower limit alarm Upper limit alarm point e g 100 C point e g 100 C Alarm value e g 100 C Alarm value e g 100 C The alarm output is ON while the SP is equal to or The alarm output is ON while the SP is equal to or higher than the set value lower than the set value E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 35 4 Basic Operation o MV Alarms You can set an upper limit or lower limit alarm for the manipulated value MV The alarm point is set in the corresponding alarm value parameter The corresponding alarm hysteresis setting is also valid MV absolute value upper limit alarm Example for Standard Control ON OFF Upper limit alarm point e g 80 Alarm value e g 80 The alarm output is ON while the MV is equal to or higher than the set value e RSP Alarms MV absolute value lower limit alarm Example for Standard Control ON OFF Lower limit alarm point e g 2096 Alarm value e g 2096 The alarm output is ON while the MV is equal to or lower than the set value You can set an upper limit or lower limit alarm for
196. ctor when inserting or disconnecting the Cable e When connecting a connector always make sure that it is oriented correctly Do not force the connector if it does not connect smoothly Connectors may be damaged if they are connected with excessive force e Do not connect cables to both the front panel Setup Tool port and the top panel Setup Tool port at the same time The Digital Controller may be damaged or may malfunction E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 25 2 Preparations 2 4 3 Installing the Driver 1 Connect a USB connector on the computer with a Setup Tool port on the Digital Controller using the Cable or Cables 2 Obtaining the Driver When the CX Thermo Support Software for the Digital Controller is installed the driver for the USB Serial Conversion Cable will be copied to the following folder C Program Files OMRON Drivers USB E58 ClF 3 Installing the Driver Install the driver to enable the Cable to be used with the personal computer e Installation When the Cable is connected with the personal computer the OS will detect the product as a new device At this time install the driver using the Installation Wizard Note1 We recommend that you install the driver for each USB port on the computer at the start The Digital Controller assigns a COM port number to each USB port on the computer If the same USB port is used you will be able to use the same COM port number even if you use
197. cy of output relays varies considerably with the output load and switching conditions 1 A SELV circuit is one separated from the power supply with double insulation or reinforced insulation that does not exceed 30 V r m s and 42 4 V peak or 60 VDC 2 A class 2 power supply is one tested and certified by UL as having the current and voltage of the secondary output restricted to specific levels gt bob E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Safety Precautions CAUTION Loose screws may occasionally result in fire Tighten the terminal screws to the specified torque of 0 43 to 0 58 N m Set the parameters of the product so that they are suitable for the system being controlled If they are not suitable unexpected operation may occasionally result in property damage or accidents A malfunction in the Digital Controller may occasionally make control operations impossible or prevent alarm outputs resulting in property damage To maintain safety in the event of malfunction of the Digital Controller take appropriate safety measures such as installing a monitoring device on a separate line E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 7 Precautions for Safe Use Precautions for Safe Use Be sure to observe the following precautions to prevent operation failure malfunction or adverse affects on the performance and functions of the product Not doing so may occasionally result
198. d 0 2 s have been added Integral differential time unit Setting in increments of 0 1 s has been added I O Expandability e Number of event inputs Increased from 2 to 4 for the E5CC and from 4 to 6 for the E5EC e Number of auxiliary outputs Increased from 2 to 3 for the E5CC and from 3 to 4 for the E5EC Remote SP inputs A remote SP input that treats the external analog signal at the set point SP has been added I Universal Input Capability Universal input The input sensor can be selected freely from the following for any model of the E5CC or EBEC Thermocouple resistance thermometer ES1B Infrared Temperature Sen Sor current and voltage I Easier Numeric Inputs with a Digit Shift Key Digit shift When setting the SP or other parameters you can use a Shift Key assigned to the PF Key to shift the digit that is being set to aid changing the set values 1 2 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 1 Introduction Setup Tool Port on Front Panel of the E5EC This port allows you to change or set parameters from the Setup Tool even when the Controller is installed in a panel pue sa njeay soueleaddy 1 Tl c 3 O O 3 0 O mp gt O m al Q O m al m O 1 1 3 Main Functions This section introduces the main E5CC E5EC functions For details on particular functions and how to use them refer to Section 3 Part Names and Basic Procedures and following sections
199. dME C IC CMM ias l 18 B U gt 21 K140F 60C S ee 22 K240F 120C 3 0 Pt100 1 Pt100 5 K 23 K280F 140C a 2 Pt100 7 J 25 4 to 20 mA 27 1t05 V 29 0 to 10 V 24 KA40F 220C 2 3 JPt100 11 E Bl 26 0 to 20 mA 28 0to 5V Y 4 JPt100 12 L c 15 N 19 W D 20 PLII 7 This function is displayed only for a Controller that has a transfer output calibration Transfer output When calibration has been performed after purchase the user calibration information shown in the following illustration will be displayed when moving to the Calibration Level A dot is displayed E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 7 3 7 User Calibration 7 3 Thermocouple Calibration e Calibrate according to the type of thermocouple thermocouple group 1 input types 5 7 11 12 15 19 and 20 and thermocouple group 2 input types 6 8 9 10 13 14 16 17 18 21 22 23 and 24 e When calibrating do not cover the bottom of the Controller Also do not touch the input terminals terminals 5 and 6 on the E5CC and terminals 23 and 24 on the E5EC or the compensating conductors o Preparations Cold junction compensator 0 C 32 F Compensating conductors Compensating conductors e Set the cold junction compensator designed for compensation of internal thermocouples to 0 C Make sure that internal thermocouples are disabled i e that tips are open e n the above figure STV indicates
200. da a acute pec Logo 6 3 Operation Level 54 us oii ACRI etter CR eR Rr cc NU RU RE en 6 7 Adjustment Eevel lt a 6 17 Monitor Setting Item Level else 6 35 Manual Control Level i ara eee twee eae 6 36 Inimal Set rng Level ines succes eee ae hoes dt eee eee 6 38 Advanced Function Setting Level LLL 6 54 Communications Setting Level rr 6 84 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 1 6 Parameters 6 1 Conventions Used in this Section e Meanings of Icons Used in this Section f Describes the functions of the parameter Function Describes the setting range and default of the parameter Setting L7 Used to indicate parameters used only for monitoring Monitor Describes the parameter settings such as those for Operation Commands and procedures Operation Used to indicate information on descriptions in which the parameter is used or the See names of related parameters About Related Parameter Displays Parameters are displayed only when the conditions for use given on the right of the parameter heading are satisfied Protected parameters are not displayed regardless of the conditions for use but the settings of these parameters are still valid H L AT Execute Cancel The E5CC E5EC must be in operation and control must be 2 PID control Displayed symbol Parameter name Conditions for use e The Order of
201. dard control and 2 PID oF Manual Reset Value control The Integral Time parameter must be set to 0 e This parameter sets the required manipulated variable to remove offset during stabilization of P or PD control Function Setting range Unit Default 0 0 to 100 0 96 50 0 Setting e Related Parameters See eas Integral Time Adjustment Level Page 6 27 PID ON OFF Initial Setting Level Page 6 41 H y 5 Hysteresis Heating The control must be ON OFF control rUUC a sina For the Hysteresis Cooling parameter the control brit y 9 must be heating cooling control This parameter sets the hysteresis for ensuring stable operation at the ON OFF switching point e For standard control use the Hysteresis Heating parameter The Hysteresis Cooling parameter cannot be used Function For heating cooling control the hysteresis can be set independently for heating cooling The Hysteresis Heating parameter is used for the heating side and the Hysteresis Cooling parameter is used for the cooling side Parametername Setting range Umt Defaui Pl Hysteresis 10 seting Heating 0 10 Hysteresis 10 Cooling 0 10 e Related Parameters See PID ON OFF Initial Setting Level Page 6 41 Standard or Heating Cooling Initial Setting Level Page 6 42 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 29 T I gt amp c m 3 D 5 F r O lt o 6 Parameters GA AK
202. de or continuing operation in RUN mode after the program ends A RSET gt STRT p I c D 3 mp gt D o 3 a D U O D 3 TI c 5 Q ct O 5 e Parameters Related to the Simple Program Function Parameiername Display Set monitor values Unt D teva Program Pattern PERN OFF STOP CONT initial Setting Level Program Start PRSE RSET STRT f Operation Level Soak Time SAAK Adjustment Level Soak Time Unit m minutes h hours Advanced Function Setting Level Wait Band OFF or 0 1 to 999 9 Adjustment Level Soak Time Remain Buy 0 to 9999 Operation Level Monitor Du The setting unit of the Wait Band parameter is FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs and the setting range is OFF or 0 01 to 99 99 uonouny Wesbold ejduis L pL G A e Program Pattern Either of two program patterns can be selected The simple program operation will not be performed if the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF 1 Pattern 1 STOP Control will stop and the STOP mode will be entered when the program has ended SP Set point Soak time END display RSET STRT END output Automatically switches from RUN to STOP mode E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 37 5 Advanced Operations 2 Pattern 2 CONT Control will continue in RUN mode when the program has ended SP Wait band Set point l Wait band A 4 So
203. display AL iH AL1H Press the e Mode Key several times to display Al AL 1 eC ce r v QREZD vx oO c lt r ws OOOOOg Nr 5 To set the alarm value lower limit press the Mode Key several times to display AL iL AL1L GS I E 0 This concludes the procedure to set the input type alarm type control method set point and alarm set values For information on the settings of the ON OFF hysteresis PID constants HS alarm HS alarm and other parameters refer to Section 4 Basic Operation or Section 5 Advanced Operations E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 3 19 3 Part Names and Basic Procedures E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Basic Operation SSS 4 1 Moving between Setting Levels e 4 3 4 1 1 Moving to the Initial Setting Level lille 4 3 4 1 2 Moving to the Adjustment Level 0 0002 eee 4 4 4 1 3 Moving to the Protect Level 0 0 eee ee 4 4 4 1 4 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level 4 5 4 1 5 Moving to the Communications Setting Level oo 4 7 4 2 Initial Setting Examples 0 0 00 ees 4 8 4 3 Setting the Input Type 22e howe Ee Ra Oak Ro ees 4 10 2 UEM oido Mr ER 4 10 4 4 Selecting t
204. e 4 or Key to set the value to 10 The default is O s e em L1 p a ep ro I e Setting the LBA Level Advanced Function Setting 1 Press the Key several times in the Advanced Function Set Level ting Level to display L 5H LBA Level LBA Level 2 Press the A or Key to set the value to 8 0 The default is 8 0 C F e Setting the LBA Band Press the Key several times in the Advanced Function Set A9anced Function Setting ting Level to display L 5H5 LBA Band LBA Band 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the value to 3 0 The default is 3 0 C F 5 30 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations 5 12 Performing Manual Control 5 12 1 Manual Operation The manipulated variable can be set in manual mode if the PV MV parameter is displayed in the manual control level If the Manual Output Method parameter is set to HOLD when control moves from Automatic Mode to Manual Mode the final MV from Automatic Mode will be used as the initial manual MV If Manual Output Method parameter is set to INIT the setting of the Manual MV Initial Value parameter will be used as the initial manual MV In manual mode changes in the value of the PV MV Manual MV parameter that are made with key operations are saved and reflected in the actual MV immediately The automatic display return function will not operate in manual
205. e Initial Setting Level Page 6 39 PID ON OFF Initial Setting Level Page 6 41 ST Stable Range Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 60 6 42 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters P El N Program Pattern This parameter sets the type of control when using the simple program function e f the program pattern is set to aF F the simple program will not operate e f the program pattern is set to 5E 57 the RUN STOP status will change to STOP after the Function soak time has expired If the program pattern is set to GNE control will continue in RUN status after the soak time has expired n Default SF SFF Cant o Related Parameters see Program Start Operation Level Page 6 12 Soak Time Remain Operation Level Page 6 13 RUN STOP Operation Level Page 6 13 Soak Time Adjustment Level Page 6 30 Wait Band Adjustment Level Page 6 30 Soak Time Unit Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 74 P N 5 m o D 5 rm O lt o The cooling control output and heating control output must be assigned to relay or voltage Control Period Heating outputs for driving SSR O Control Period Cooling The control must be set to 2 PID control For the Control Period Cooling parameter the control must be set to heating cooling control e These parameters set the output periods Set the control periods taking the control characteristics and the electrical du
206. e Deleting the Password Password Deletion Example 5678 Press the and Keys simultaneously for at least 3 sec AIESEC onds default in the Operation Level 1 PM ab Move to Pav Move to Protect Level will be displayed m Protect Level Li 2 Press the or Key to set the password to 5678 This enters the password 3 Move to the Operation Adjustment Protect parameter in the Protect Level by pressing the or Key or leaving the set ting for at least two seconds This deletes the password Operation Adjust ment Protect e Setting the Password Again Password Example 1234 1 Set the password to 1234 again Easswordi5 Press the 2 Key several times in the Protect Level to display P P Move to Protect Level Password to Move to Protect Level 2 Press the and 4 Keys simultaneously and set the value to 1234 This enters the password To prevent setting the password incorrectly the and Keys or and Keys must be pressed simultaneously to set the password 1 The key pressing time can be changed in PALE Move to Protect Level Time in the Advanced Function Setting Level Setting range 1 to 30 seconds Default 3 seconds LA Precautions for Correct Use Protection cannot be cleared or changed without the password Be careful not to forget it If you forget the password contact your OMRON sales representative e Communications Operation Command to Move to the Protect Level e The W
207. e as Event Input Assignment 1 Same as NONE None Event Input Assignment 1 OFF Assignment 6 Extraction of Square OFF ON 0 None Root Enable Move to Advanced Hav 1 999 to 9 999 function Setting Level 2 When the SP is selected the remote SP will be output while the Remote SP Mode is set in the SP Mode 1 This function can be set only for a Controller that supports a remote SP input parameter 3 This value can be set for standard control but the value will be disabled 4 Default 4 1 Transfer output type Setting monitor range transfer output upper lower Unit limits Set Point SP lower limit to SP upper limit SP upper limit lower limit Set Point During SP SP lower limit to SP upper limit SP upper limit lower limit Ramp PV Temperature input Input setting range lower Input setting range upper lower limit to Input setting range upper limit limit Analog input Scaling lower limit to Scaling Scaling upper lower limit upper limit MV Heating Standard 5 0 to 105 0 100 0 0 0 Heating cooling 0 0 to 105 0 MV Cooling 0 0 to 105 0 100 0 0 0 4 1 Initialized when the transfer output type is changed Initialized if the input type temperature unit scaling upper lower limit or SP upper lower limit is changed when the transfer output type is SP ramp SP or PV When initialized by the initializing settings it is initialized to 100 0 0 0 5 PRST Program Start can be set even when the Program Pattern param
208. e display Numeric display 2333 display 5 EFF display pop Imputindicationrange Control range 5 ERR display Numeric display 5 ERR display 1999 Display range 9999 1999 Display range gt 9999 gt I The display range is shown in numbers with decimal points omitted 3 Q o 2 L4 3 2 217 AD Converter Error lt e Meaning There is an error in internal circuits e Action First turn the power OFF then back ON again If the display remains the same the Controller must be repaired If the display is restored then the probable cause is electrical noise affecting the control system Check for electrical noise Operation The control auxiliary and transfer outputs turn OFF A current output will be approx O mA A linear voltage output will be approx O V E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A 11 A Appendices Z iii Memory Error Jo y e Meaning Internal memory operation is in error e Action First turn the power OFF then back ON again If the display remains the same the Controller must be repaired If the display is restored then the probable cause is electrical noise affecting the control system Check for electrical noise Operation The control auxiliary and transfer outputs turn OFF A current output will be approx O mA A linear voltage output will be approx O V T Current Value Exceeds e Meaning
209. e scaling 0 to 20 mA 1999 to 9999 Voltage input 1to5V 199 9 to 999 9 0105 V 28 19 99 to 99 99 1 999 to 9 999 A The default is 5 3 14 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 3 Part Names and Basic Procedures 3 Set the control method V 7 The display flashes xm Nes Level Key for at L o least 3 one Sy KK lt N E IN T will be displayed to show that the Initial Setting Level has been entered ON OFF Control Cro Press the e Peds HE ls WY Key several times to V display NEL NTE d iL NEL CNTL Indicates the control method The default setting is afiaF ONOF ON OFF control e U O o O o c 0 D ct O c 3 5 e O mp 3 D U O o c o lt If PL a PID control is displayed Diese the 4 Down Key to change to aNaF ONOF ON OFF control PID Control LNEL CNTL Indicates the control method Initial Setting Level If anaf ON OFF control is displayed press the A Up Key to change to P d PID PID control 4 Set the alarm type oJnpeooJg 9ISeg c r Operation Level Initial Setting Level The display flashes M LN E IN T will be displayed LI to show that the Initial Setting Level has been entered
210. e set point is approached and the amount the control deviation is reduced is less than the LBA band the loop burnout alarm will turn ON e f the LBA detection time LBA level LBA detection band and PID settings are not appropriate alarms may be detected inappropriately or alarms may not be output when necessary e Loop burnout alarms may be detected if unexpectedly large disturbances occur continuously and a large deviation does not decrease e f a loop burnout occurs when the set point is near the ambient temperature the temperature deviation in a steady state may be less than the LBA level preventing detection of the loop burnout e l the set point is so high or low that it cannot be reached even with a saturated manipulated variable a temperature deviation may remain even in a steady state and a loop burnout may be detected e Detection is not possible if a fault occurs that causes an increase in temperature while control is being applied to increase the temperature e g an SSR short circuit fault E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations e Detection is not possible if a fault occurs that causes a decrease in temperature while control is being applied to decrease the temperature e g a heater burnout fault o Parameters Related to Loop Burnout Alarms PES Displa Setting range Level e play g rang l Setting O ELI m O to 9999 s disables the LBA Time i function Temperature
211. e timer that measures the soak time operates only when the process value is within the wait band around the set point i e SP wait band In the above diagram the timer will be stopped between the start and 1 2 and 3 and 4 and 5 and will measure the time only between 1 and 2 3 and 4 and 5 and the end f the wait band is set to OFF the wait band will be treated as infinity and the timer will measure time continuously after changing from RSET to STRT E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations 5 14 2 Operation at the Program End e Display at the Program End When the program ends the process value will be displayed on the No 1 display and the set point and Ed will be alternately displayed on the No 2 display at 0 5 s intervals One of the following displays PV SP PV only or PV MV Displayed alternately Hy LC LILI e Program End Output The output assignment parameters can be used to assign the program END output to any output The program END output can also be used in communications status When the Program Pattern parameter is changed from OFF to STOP or CONT the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter will automatically be set to the END output When the Program Pattern parame ter is changed from STOP or CONT to OFF the Alarm 1 Output Assignment parameter will automati cally be initialized to ALM1 or to HA for Controllers that have HB or HS al
212. ead Band Temperature input 199 910 988 9 loo Gor MMS a a Manual Reset Value aF F loowioo wo k Hysteresis Heating Temperature input 0 1 t0 9999 po Cor E EAN Hysteresis Cooling Temperature input 0 1 to 999 9 A E C or F Analog input 0 01 to 99 99 Toro FS Integral Time Cooling E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A 17 T o U y e 3 D e D O o O 9 et O 5 E 0 mp 0 9197 juawisnipy Z 9 v A Appendices Parameters Characters Setting monitor value Display Defaut Uni Soak Time ILL NN EE CE min orh roc c 2 A I H4 HH MV at Stop Standard 5 0 to 105 0 22 96 Heating cooling 105 0 to 105 0 MV at PV Error My Standard 5 0 to 105 0 Heating cooling 105 0 to 105 0 EE of SP Ramp Set Value OFF 1 to 9 999 SP Ramp Fall Value w MV Upper Limit MV lower limit 0 1 to 105 0 standard 0 0 to 105 0 heating cooling MV Lower Limit 5 0 to MV upper limit 0 1 standard 105 0 to 0 0 heating cooling standard 100 0 heating cooling 0 0 to 100 0 S 0 0 MV Change Rate Limit Disabled Extraction of Square 0 0 to 100 0 Root Low cut Point A 6 3 Initial Setting Level SAME OFF or 1 to 9 999 SAME aFF ooo 4 1 1 MV Change Rate Limit Parameters Setting monitor value Display Default Unit Input Type Temperature Pt100 5 None input Pt100 Pt100 3 JPt100 JPt100
213. ect to the Setup Tool port on the front panel of the EBEC The following table lists the cables and ports that are used Model Connection port Cable E5CC Top panel Setup Tool port E58 CIFQ2 USB Serial Conversion Cable E5EC Top panel Setup Tool port E58 CIFQ2 USB Serial Conversion Cable Front panel Setup Tool E58 CIFQ2 USB Serial Conversion Cable and E58 CIFQ2 E port Conversion Cable Hefer to 2 4 Using the Setup Tool Port for the connection procedure E58 CIFQ2 USB Serial Conversion Cable e Specifications Item Specifications Applicable OS Windows 2000 XP Vista or 7 Applicable software CX Thermo Applicable models E5CB Series and E5CC E5EC Series USB interface rating Conforms to USB Specification 2 0 DTE speed 38 400 bps Connector Computer end USB type A plug specifications Digital Controller Special serial connector Power supply Bus power Supplied from USB host controller Power supply voltage 5 VDC Current consumption 450 mA max Output voltage 4 7 0 2 VDC Supplied through USB Serial Conversion Cable to the Digital Controller Output current 250 mA max Supplied through USB Serial Conversion Cable to the Digital Controller Ambient temperature O to 55 C with no condensation or icing Ambient humidity 10 to 80 Storage temperature 20 to 60 C with no condensation or icing Storage humidity 10 to 80 Altitude 2 000 m max Weight Approx 120 g Note Use a high power port for the USB port E5CC E5EC D
214. ection 2 parameter the No 1 display will flash the Heater Current 2 Value Monitor parameter e Related Parameters See Heater Burnout Detection 1 Adjustment Level Page 6 21 Heater Burnout Detection 2 Adjustment Level Page 6 22 HB ON OFF Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 58 Error Display L Er Page A 12 p e O o D D ct O 5 r O lt o ro HB and HS alarms must be supported nil i a Sen ii The HS Alarm Use parameter must be set to ON This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting SSR short circuits The heater current is measured and the leakage current 1 monitor is displayed e The HS alarm is not detected if the OFF time for the control output for heating is 100 ms Function or less 35 ms or less if the control period is 0 1 or 0 2 s 5 Monitor range Unit 0 0 to 55 0 A Monitor e FFFF is displayed when 55 0 A is exceeded e f an alarm is output for the HS Alarm 1 parameter the No 1 display will flash the Leakage Current 1 Monitor parameter e Related Parameters See HS Alarm 1 Adjustment Level Page 6 23 HS Alarm 2 Adjustment Level Page 6 24 HS Alarm Use Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 68 Error Display LL F i Page A 12 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 11 6 Parameters HB and HS alarms must be supported two CTs Coo E The HS Alarm Use parameter must be set to ON Leakage Current 2 Monitor
215. ee lead wires the same Mount the Digital Controller so that it is horizontally level If the measurement accuracy is low check to see if input shift has been set correctly E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Installation Precautions e Waterproofing The degree of protection is as shown below Sections without any specification on their degree of protection or those with IP lO are not waterproof Front panel IP66 Hear case IP20 Terminal section IPOO When waterproofing is required insert the Waterproof Packing on the backside of the front panel Keep the Port Cover on the front panel Setup Tool port of the EBEC securely closed The degree of protection when the Waterproof Packing is used is IP66 To maintain an IP66 degree of protection the Waterproof Packing and the Port Cover for the front panel Setup Tool port must be periodically replaced because they may deteriorate shrink or harden depending on the operating environment The replacement period will vary with the operating environment Check the required period in the actual application Use 3 years or sooner as a guideline If the Waterproof Packing and Port Cover are not periodically replaced waterproof performance may not be maintained If a waterproof structure is not required then the Waterproof Packing does not need to be installed E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 11 Precautions for Operation Precautions for Op
216. el sinri enia eeu san Cub doled cubo Sua eoo aduentu nt duces S 6 35 6 6 Manual Control Level iii niei ceu stot a ias 6 36 6 7 Initial S TING Level iii ada 6 38 6 8 Advanced Function Setting Eeyvel siiseioodE iiic iia eco so Poi ease c od Ee Evo ba Eee Bs sesion Eri Eee cbe 6 54 6 9 Communications Setting Level 11 e ceeee eicere esee eene nennen nnn nnne n nana nnn 6 84 Section 7 User Calibration 721 User eol llelc iifo ner 7 2 7 2 Parameter SIPUCIUNG mE 7 3 3 THEFMOCOUDIE Callbr AMO sica i 7 4 7 4 Resistance Thermometer Calibration e c cresce eese eere eere eene nenas 7 7 7 5 Calibrating Analog Input ie ioi donee acted ensaicdeserece oar Eee e DU e EE EI EHE Ia Feo theorem reinen 7 9 7 6 Calibrating the Transfer Output 111 eelieeeeeiieee ee eeee esee eene n nnn numen nnne n nnnm 7 11 7 7 Checking Indication Acci 7 13 Section A Appendices ye IIS o 0 fer 1 o fee 0 a aa a a ee aS a a a A 2 A 1 1 galee A 2 A 1 2 iiie O ERTE Eaa E EELE O RAR ARRA EOT TEN Erina nr EAR ei teraria niE A 4 A 1 3 Rating and Characteristics of Options cccccseeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaueeeeceeeeeesauaeeeeeseaeeeeeesaeeeessnees A 5 A 1 4 Waterproof rack scarico patatas sae seexnaceadate de b cnc A 5 A 1 5 setup Tool Port Cover for Front Panel icio t
217. elections 4 7 1 Changing the SP e The set point cannot be changed when the Operation Adjustment Protect parameter is set to 3 For details refer to 5 7 Using the Key Protect Level e To change the set point press the J or 4 Key in the PV SP parameter Operation Level or for the SP SP charactor display display in the Operation Level and set the desired set value The new set point is selected three seconds after you have specified the new value e Multi SP is used to switch between eight set points For details refer to 5 4 Using Event Inputs for details gt N o o ct 3 aq e gt o o o nal U 9 3 o U gt In this example the set point is changed from O C to 200 C Operating Procedure dS eui Buibueyo L Z p Press the or Key in the Operation Level to set the SP to OPetation Level 200 The default SP is 0 C EN Additional Information e f there are a lot of digits in a numeric value you can use the Ke Shift Key to select the digit to change before you change the value of the digit Example Changing 1 000 C to 1 200 C 1 Press Key three times Operation Level The third digit will flash Operation Level 2 Press the Key to set the value to 1200 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 19 4 Basic Operation 4 8 Using ON OFF Control In ON OFF control the control output turns OFF when the temperature being controlled re
218. ement use an Optical Interface A Refer to the E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers Communications Manual Cat No H175 for error details E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A Appendices A 6 Parameter Operation Lists A 6 1 Operation Level Parameters Characters Settinmg monitor value Display Default Unit Process Value Temperature According to indication range for each EU sensor Analog Scaling lower limit 5 FS to Scaling upper limit 5 FS Set Point EK SP lower limit to SP upper limit LE cde EU Multi SP Set Point M 0 to 7 None Selection Remote SP Monitor Remote SP lower limit 10 FS to remote SP upper limit 10 FS Set Point During SP S eM SP lower limit to SP upper limit EU Hamp Heater Current 1 Value 0 0 to 55 0 A Monitor Heater Current 2 Value 0 0 to 55 0 A Monitor Leakage Current 1 0 0 to 55 0 A Monitor Leakage Current 2 0 0 to 55 0 A Monitor Program Start RBRSE A RSET STRT PGE E SERE RSET None Soak Time Remain KER 0 to 9999 Pr min or h RUN STOP R 5 RUN STOP Run None Alarm Value 1 All alarms except for MV absolute value upper limit or re Im lower limit alarms 1 999 to 9 999 MV absolute value upper limit or lower limit alarms LI T 199 9 to 999 9 o E0 Alarm Value Upper Limit 1 AL IH 1 999 to 9 999 EE Alarm Value Lower Limit 1 HL iL 1 999 to 9 999 EE 0 EU Alarm Value 2 All alarms except for MV absolute value upper limit or
219. emote SP Lower Limit 551 Analog input Scaling lower limit to Setting Level Scaling upper limit Remote SP Upper Limit 57 s N C o 3 Q JJ O 3 o O o U SP Tracking 5P 5 OFF Disable ON Enable laudi Billie Function Setting Level SP Mode SFM LSP Local SP RSP Remote SP hiia Adjustment Level Remote SP Monitor FSP Remote SP lower limit 10 to EU Adjustment Level Remote SP upper limit 10 BEE Temperature input 199 9 to 999 9 C or F Adjustment Level Remote SP Input Shift F55 Temperature input 199 9 to 999 9 Cor F 0 0 Adi Analog input 1 999 to 9 999 EU 0 bli SP Input Slope Coefficient 44 to 9 999 1 000 Adjustment Level WOE LA Precautions for Correct Use e When the ST self tuning parameter is turned ON the SP Mode parameter is forcibly set to LSP e The remote SP input is not accepted during autotuning Autotuning is executed for the remote SP at the beginning of autotuning e Changes in the remote SP value are not used as conditions for resetting the standby sequence I 21 71 suonoun ejdsig SNIS AS pu Ad L 61 S e Remote SP Scaling e You can scale the remote SP input for the PV input range with the remote SP upper and lower limits e The remote SP input can be from the remote SP lower limit 10 to the remote SP upper limit 1096 Input values outside of this range are treated as out of range input values RSP input errors and clamped
220. en changes in the input due to noise and other factors and can be enabled separately for each input e The Moving Average Count parameter is used for the moving average lt can be set to OFF 2 4 8 16 or 32 e The default is OFF disabled Y L b o gt 5 5 o c mp lt e 0 Input data Operation result Time Parameter Setting range Unit Default Moving Average Count OFF 2 4 8 16 or 32 OFF E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 3 5 Advanced Operations e Using the PV Input Shift After shifting 1000 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 000 C is shifted to 970 C 200 C 500 C 1000 C 1300 C BEIO SMINING Find the two points to shift and determine the PVs after the shifts are applied Example Shift 500 C temperature before shifting to 550 C temperature after shifting Example Shift 1 000 C temperature before shifting to 970 C temperature after shifting Find the process value slope coefficient from the above results 970 550 1 000 500 0 840 Do not yet set the Process Value Slope Coefficient parameter in the Digital Controller Adjust the PV display on the Digital Controller to the point to be shifted Example Adjust the PV to 500 C Set the Process Value Slope Coefficient parameter to the value that you found in step 2 Example Set the Process Value Slope Coefficient parameter to 0 840 Read off the PV after
221. ensor that is used 4 3 1 Input Type The following example shows how to set a K thermocouple for 20 0 to 500 0 C input type 6 Operating Procedure Press the Key for at least 3 seconds to move from the a Setting Level T Operation Level to the Initial Setting Level The amp Input jy Type parameter will be displayed E Input Type _ mr 2 Press the Dor Key to select 6 K thermocouple at 20 0 to 500 0 C E The default is 5 b K thermocouple at 200 to 1 300 C aay um a EN Additional Information Changes that are made with key operations are applied when the or 9 Key is pressed They are also applied if you do nothing for 3 seconds or longer 4 10 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation NO 1to5V Voltage input O to 5V Oto 10 V 19 99 to 99 99 1 999 to 9 999 NO 00 List of Input Types Forte 002100 JPt100 199 9 to 900 0 K 300 to 2300 os vm One of the following ranges according to the scaling BW ar 199 9 to 999 9 NL GNE NN MAC NN co The default is 5 LA Precautions for Correct Use ERF S ERR input error flashes on the display if a sensor is not connected or if the connected sensor is different from input type Connect a sensor if one is not already connected SV e PF Y A Soe E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 11 E
222. enters it again e For example with a lower limit alarm the process value will normally be below the set point i e within the alarm range when the power supply is turned ON causing an alarm to be output If the lower limit alarm with a standby sequence is selected an alarm will not be output until the pro cess value increases above the alarm set value i e until it leaves the alarm range and then falls back below the alarm set value eouenbegs qpuelS L LL p e Restart e The standby sequence is canceled when an alarm is output It is however restarted later by the Standby Sequence Reset parameter Advanced Function Setting Level For details refer to the Standby Sequence Reset parameter in Section 6 Parameters E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 37 4 Basic Operation 4 11 2 Alarm Latch e The alarm latch can be used to keep the alarm output ON until the latch is canceled regardless of the temperature once the alarm output has turned ON Any of the following methods can be used to clear the alarm latch e Turn OFF the power supply The alarm latch is also cleared by switching to the Initial Setting Level Communications Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level or Calibration Level e Use the PF Key e Use an event input For details on setting the PF Key refer to 5 18 Setting the PF Key For details on setting events refer to 5 4 Using Event Inputs e Summary of Alarm Operat
223. eos 5 41 Output Adjustment FUNCIOAS ii 5 42 ono mm GI 1610 10 E oa r 5 42 102 MV ato a e alce dl e o O la Pe e Or meen cet 5 42 A e MV ATI A A a E A cud cuum cabo ciue bL a nel scaepeecs 5 43 Using the Extraction of Square Root Parameter eee eere eeeeee eene nennen 5 44 o T6sb Extiracuornalr dualis ROOTS csi 5 44 Setting the Width of MV Variation 25323355 5535 abonando lona rec sae co esie e oos ev nnna 5 46 5 17 MV Clhatnge Rate bBIhmibs uiri in 5 46 Setting the PF KV a eub ale Euge a dean PORE 5 48 5 15 f sl d ey Soeur ecole lace a vae ipbe nd iude ot te testi deep ME een ae E dea UE 5 48 Displaying PV SV Stalin 5 51 5 19 T PV and SV Status Display FUNCIONS ia adas 5 51 Communications with a Host Device e g a PLC ess 5 53 USING a Remote SP e 5 55 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 9 22 LOC Operations is 5 57 5 22 1 The Logic Operation Function CX Thermo oocccccconcnncconoccncccnncnnnnonancnnnononcnnonnnnnnnnonnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnss 5 57 5 22 2 USING Logie Operations eevee cass A cusa oe ip reteset ogee ade elie 5 57 Section 6 Parameters 6 1 Conventions Used in this SectiON oooncccnnccconncccncccocncencnncncnnnonnnncnnnnennnnnnannnnnnrennnnrnnnnrnnnnnenanees 6 2 6 2 Protect LOVE nana a 6 3 6 3 Operation Level unas a E E a cisne 6 7 6 4 Adl stmment LV Oir M 6 17 6 5 Monitor Setting Nem EeV
224. er s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations AAA as 3 Select Library 1 from the Library List library list and then click the Library2 O K B utto n asia Keeping an alarm output off while operation is stopped ibrary 1 1 brans Confirm the following ibrary m Function overview settings and then click the While operation is stopped an auziliary output does not output an alarm OK Bu t ton m Operation illustration Work bit 1 operation type RUN STOP NE RRE Operation 1 z Mani Work bit 1 input assignment 2 H Work bit 1 i H5 A 7 Alarm 1 Auxiliary output 1 S st po Work bit 1 input assignment B 19 Invert for RUN STOP 1 While operation is stopped auxiliary output 1 does not output alarm 1 2 While operation 1s running auxiliary output 1 outputs alarm 1 Work bit 1 Input assignment C 0 Always OFF Work bit 1 input assignment m Configuration content Work bit operation 00 ALIO A Hi pita O I ha D O Always OFF A Auxiliary output 1 Work bit 1 Logic Operation Editor 7 E ipi xl 4 Closing the Logic Operation Henti MEN Editor Dialog Box Operation of Work Bit 1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work ES T Cl ick th e C ose B utto n Operation Type Operation 1 y amp Alarm 1 20 RUN STOP T N N r O e o O 9 O D et O 5 D Work Bit 1 is used by
225. er supply to the E5CC E5EC including installation terminal usage wiring and isolation insulaton block diagram It also describes how to use the Setup Tool ports Learning the basic Section 3 Part Names and This section describes the basic procedures procedures from turning Basic Procedures from turning ON the power supply to the ON the power supply to the E5CC E5EC to starting actual operation It also ESCC ESEC to starting gives the names of the parts of the actual operation E5CC E5EC This section serves as a basic tutorial for first time users of the ESCC E5EC Learning the basic Section 4 Basic Operation These sections describe the basic operating operating methods for the Section 6 Parameters methods and provide specific examples of the ESCC ESEC following basic functions of the E5CC E5EC e Moving between setting levels e Setting the input type e Selecting the temperature unit e Selecting between PID control and ON OFF control Setting the set point Using ON OFF control Determining PID constants Setting alarm outputs Setting alarm hysteresis e Using heater burnout HB and heater short HS alarms Customizing the displays 16 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Conventions Used in This Manual Goal Related sections Contents Learning advanced Section 5 Advanced These sections describe the following advanced operatin
226. er to ON and set the PF Setting parameter to F Auto Manual 2 The No 1 display will flash when the keys are pressed for 1 s or longer 3 Setthe PF Setting parameter to FF HP monitor setting items E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A 31 A Appendices A 9 Parameter Flow This section describes the parameters set in each level Pressing the Key at the last parameter in each level returns to the top parameter in that level Adjustment Adjustment Level Display Displayed only once when entering adjustment level la A GEF ic CME GEF y a AT Execute Cancel Communications Writing N Ln SP Mode n n M 1d 9 c3 E Fr Heater Current 1 Value Monitor r Heater Burnout Detection 1 T xh a c3 Co m n Heater Current 2 Value Monitor e mu 9 Ex n LI ie Hh ic prod LERI a Heater Burnout Detection 2 Leakage Current 1 Monitor ic Hol nn LI LI ic L Hg Leakage Current 2 n Lu HS Alarm 1 Monitor HS Alarm 2 A 32 Press the KP Key for at least 1 s 1 Press the Key less than 1 s Press the Key less than 1 s ic PERE 1nnn LLILILI ic le
227. erating Procedure 1 Press the Key several times in the Adjustment Level to display 145 Hysteresis Heating Hysteresis Heating 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the hysteresis to 2 0 The default is 1 0 The new set value can be saved by pressing the Key or it will go into effect after 3 seconds has elapsed Adjustment Level 4 22 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation 4 9 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup 4 9 1 AT Auto tuning When AT is executed the optimum PID constants for the set point at that time are set automatically A method called the limit cycle method for forcibly changing the manipulated variable and finding the characteristics of the control object is employed Either 40 AT or 100 AT can be selected depending on the width of MV variation in the limit cycle In the AT Execute Cancel parameter specify HF 2 100 AT or HE i 40 AT To cancel AT specify aF F AT cancel Only 100 AT can be executed for heating and cooling control If the Heating Cooling Tuning Method parameter is set to any value other than O same as heating control the PID constants are set automatically for both heating control and cooling control AT cannot be executed when control has stopped or during ON OFF control The results of autotuning are saved in the following parameters in the Adjustment Level Proportional Band P Integral Time I
228. eration 12 It takes approximately two seconds for the outputs to turn ON from after the power supply is turned ON Due consideration must be given to this time when incorporating Digital Controllers into a control panel or similar device Make sure that the Digital Controller has 30 minutes or more to warm up after turning ON the power before starting actual control operations to ensure the correct temperature display When using self tuning turn ON power for the load e g heater at the same time as or before supplying power to the Digital Controller If power is turned ON for the Digital Controller before turning ON power for the load self tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved When starting operation after the Digital Controller has warmed up turn OFF the power and then turn it ON again at the same time as turning ON power for the load Instead of turning the Digital Controller OFF and ON again switching from STOP Mode to RUN Mode can also be used Avoid using the Digital Controller in places near a radio television set or wireless installing The Digital Controller may cause radio disturbance for these devices E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Preparations for Use Preparations for Use Be sure to thoroughly read and understand the manual provided with the product and check the follow ing points Timing Check point Details Purchasing Product After
229. es w gt r wees w r E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A Appendices Parameters Setting dus value Display Default Unit 105 0 to 105 0 for heating cooling control HT RE OFRON 1 ON aFF aN OFF None HS Alarm Use st Teo TE ON None Ho o 1 E35 Fs LBA Band Temperature input 00109999 80 oot is AT Control Output 1 Relay Output or Voltage Output for Driving SSR None Assignment NONE No assignment O Control output heating C O Control output cooling ALM1 Alarm 1 ALM2 Alarm 2 ALM3 Alarm 3 ALM4 Alarm 4 HA Heater alarm HB HS HB Heater burnout alarm HB HS Heater short alarm HS S ERR Input error RS ER Remote SP input error P END Program End output k RUN RUN output ALM Integrated alarm WR1 Work bit 1 WR2 Work bit 2 4 WR3 Work bit 3 4 WR4 Work bit 4 WR5 Work bit 5 WR6 Work bit 6 WR7 Work bit 7 4 WR8 Work bit 8 4 lt n UN mm PA 1 n UN Fa m 7 Xx amp m 5 5 im X ul X Zn Lu d r gt o E r a lt L ee LI T Lim Ln rQ a J T Sg Lam a r UR l A rt n AU m Lt P I T gt gt Samay ies im ut T A z LI
230. et SP 21 Proportional Band Cooling 22 Integral Time Cooling 23 Derivative Time Cooling 1 With the E5CC only the PV and SP can be displayed 2 The Alarm Value 1 parameter is displayed even if the Alarm 1 Type parameter is set for no alarm However any value that is set is not valid 1 PA 5 6 Derivative time D 7 8 p Co o D 5 S D U Tl A o lt V J l PA ra y Li Setting Monitor Setting Items Pressing the Key in either the Operation or Adjustment Level displays the applicable monitor setting items Press the Key to display in order Monitor Setting Items 1 to 5 After Monitor Setting Item 5 has been displayed the display will switch to the top parameter in the Operation Level Note1 ltems set as disabled in the Monitor Setting Items 1 to 5 parameters will not be displayed and the display will skip to the next enabled setting 2 While a monitor setting item is being displayed the display will be switched to the top parameter in the Operation Level if the Key or the C Key is pressed This procedure sets the PF Setting parameter to PFDP and the Moni tor Setting Item 1 parameter to 7 Alarm Value 1 Operating Procedure e Setting the PF Key Advanced Function Setting 1 Press the Key several times in the Advanced Function Set e ting Level to display PF PF Setting H PF Setting LIC VU 2 Press the 4 or Key to select PF d Mo
231. eter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled 6 This function can be set for heating cooling control but the function will be disabled f These settings can be used only for models with communications A 6 4 Manual Control Level Parameters Characters Setting monitor value Display Default Unit Manual MV 5 0 to 105 0 standard 105 0 to 105 0 heating cooling When the Manual MV Limit Enable parameter is set to ON the setting range will be the MV lower limit to the MV upper limit A 6 5 Monitor Setting Item Level The contents displayed vary depending on the Monitor Setting 1 to 5 advanced function setting level setting o U y e 3 e D O o D 9 et O 5 E 0 mp 0 9497 043u02 enue N y 9 Y E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A 21 A Appendices A 6 6 Advanced Function Setting Level Parameters Characters Setting monitor value Display Default Uni Parameter Initialization ct OFRFACT FF Rt OFF None Number of Multi SP MSPH OFF None Points SP Ramp Time Unit S EU second None Standby Sequence Reset Auxiliary Output 1 Open in Alarm Auxiliary Output 2 Open in Alarm Auxiliary Output 3 Open in Alarm Auxiliary Output 4 Open in Alarm HB ON OFF Heater Burnout Latch Heater Burnout Hysteresis ST Stable Range a Integral Derivative Time Unit AT Calculated Gain AT Hysteresis Limit Cycle MV Ampl
232. etting Level display 7 Transfer Output Type Transfer Output Type 2 Press the A or Key to select 5P The default is oF F e Setting the Transfer Output Upper Limit Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to a Setting Level display F H Transfer Output Upper Limit Transfer Output Upper Limit 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the value to 200 The default is 1300 e Setting the Transfer Output Lower Limit Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to al Setting Level display EF L Transfer Output Lower Limit Transfer Output Lower Limit 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the value to 50 The default is 200 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations 5 14 Using the Simple Program Function 5 14 1 Simple Program Function e The simple program function can be used for the following type of control SP Set point Fcc a nn es os pen gy lt band A A ages o o Wait band Soak time END display END output Select either STOP or RUN e The program will start when the Program Start parameter is changed from RSET to STRT END will be displayed on the No 2 display and the output assigned as the program end output will turn ON after the time set in the Soak Time parameter has expired in the wait band The Program Pattern parameter can be used to select moving to STOP mo
233. eue sar m 5 42 output periods MeL 6 43 P panelcutout tada 2 3 parameter flow ooooccccoocccnccnnoccnnocnncononononnnnnnnannoncnnnanons A 32 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 parameter operation lists sseesssssssse A 16 parameter structure eeeeeeee ee nene nnn 7 3 parameters O REN 6 60 Adjustment Level Display 6 19 Alarm 1 to 4 Hysteresis occcooccccccnccconoccnconncnnonanonos 6 48 Alarm 1 104 Lale ataca idad 6 63 Alarm 1 To 4 OFF Delay occcccccoocccccccncccncononcnononnnnnos 6 66 Alarm 1 to 4 ON Delay esee 6 65 Alarm 1 to 4 Type caida 4 30 6 44 Alarm 1 to 4 Upper Limit 4 34 Alarm Lower Limit Value ssusssse 4 34 Alarmi SP Selection cnt eio o eese ttes 6 75 Alarm Upper Limit Value 4 34 Alarm Value 1 t0 4 ia eee conor ees 4 34 6 14 Alarm Value Lower Limit 1 to 4 6 15 Alarm Value Upper Limit 1 to 4 6 15 O Aor fodes tmb se M ero ccbat 6 60 AT Calculated Gain 2 2 n ici 6 61 AT Calculation Gain cccscccccecssseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeees 4 23 AL Exe cute C ancel scsi 4 23 6 19 AT Hysteresis xoa eres trienio 4 23 6 61 Auto Manual Select Addition 5 31 6 67 Auto Manual Switch oo
234. evel Page 6 27 Proportional Band Cooling Adjustment Level Page 6 28 Integral Time Cooling Adjustment Level Page 6 28 Derivative Time Cooling Adjustment Level Page 6 28 PID ON OFF Initial Setting Level Page 6 41 ST Initial Setting Level Page 6 42 Integral Derivative Time Unit Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 60 H 5 Li HS Alarm Use HB and HS alarms must be supported e Set this parameter to use HS alarms Function a Setting range Default aN Enabled af F Disabled oN Setting 6 68 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters HB and HS alarms must be supported HE H L HS Alarm Latch The HS Alarm Use parameter must be set to ON e When this parameter is set to ON the HS alarm is held until any of the following er conditions is satisfied Function a The HS alarm current is set to 50 0 A b The power is cycled c The latch is cancelled by the PF Key PF Setting LAT Alarm Latch Cancel d The latch is cancelled by an event input Event Input Assignment 1 to Event Input Assignment 6 LAT Alarm Latch Cancel e Output is turned OFF when switching to the Initial Setting Level Communications Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level or Calibration Level a Setting range Default aN Enabled af F Disabled Setting e Related Parameters See HS Alarm Use Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 68 Event Input Assignment 1 to 6 Initial Setting Level
235. ever any value that is set is not valid Setting NIOO B amp B GP Parameter Setting range Default PV SP No 1 Display Selection Del 4 PV SP No 2 Display Selection 0 There must be a No 3 display E5EC Heating cooling control must be selected The PV SP No 1 Display Selection or PV SP No 2 Display Selection parameter must be set to 4 or the PF Setting parameter must be set to PFDP and one of the monitor setting items 1 to 5 must be set to 2 oad Sb MV Display Selection e This parameter selects the MV display for PV SP MV during heating and cooling control Either heating MV or cooling MV can be selected Function Setting range Default n MV heating E Setting C 8 MV cooling E E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 81 P oo gt o lt D 5 o O o Tl c 5 o et O 5 o D 5 e D lt o 6 Parameters vcl PV Decimal Point Display The input type must be set for a temperature input The display below the decimal point in the PV can be hidden for temperature inputs e The PV decimals below the decimal point can be hidden by setting the PV Decimal Point Display parameter to OFF When this parameter is set to ON the display below the Function decimal point will appear according to the input type setting Setting range Default nN ON aFF OFF ON Setting e Related Parameters See Input Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 39 Py SE PV St
236. exceeds the setting of this parameter Function When the set value is 50 0 the HS alarm output is turned OFF When the set value is 0 0 the HS alarm output is turned ON Setting range Unit Default 0 0 to 50 0 50 0 Setting e Related Parameters See Leakage Current 2 Monitor Adjustment Level Page 6 24 HS Alarm Use Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 68 HS Alarm Latch Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 69 HS Alarm Hysteresis Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 69 6 24 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters P O sPo 5P 1 spt 5P 2 sp2 co 3 SP 3 The Number of Multi SP Points parameter must be a set to 2 to 8 and the Event Input 1 Assignment to Event Input 6 Assignment parameters must not be C D Lu set to Multi SP No switching bit 0 to Multi SP JF 714 SP 4 Pp Bd No switching bit 2 5P 5 sps T CO_LC E 1770 SP 6 a 2 c 2 SP l sp7 E O lt o These parameters set the set points when the multi SP function is used The values set in these parameters can be selected by operating the keys on the front panel or by using event inputs Function e When the set point has been changed the set value of the set point O to 7 selected by the multi SP inputs is also changed to the same value e The decimal point position depends on the selected sensor During analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting Setting range Uni
237. eys for at least 3 s Control in Keys for at least 1 s Progress The time taken Operation Adjustment Protect Level to move to the Protect Protect Level To move from the Operation Level to the can be adjusted by changing the Protect Level press C and Keys for three Move to Protect seconds see note or more Level Time pa rameter setting Initial Setting Communications Protect Setting Change Protect PF Key Protect Changed Parameters Only Parameter Mask Enable Displayed only when a parameter mask is set Password to Move to Protect Level 64 64 Parameters that are protected will not be displayed and their settings cannot be changed The Password to Move to Protect Level password pm me F must not be set to 0 ov Move to Protect Level The password to move to the Protect Level is entered for this parameter e f the correct password is entered the Operation Adjustment Protect parameter is displayed Function e Related Parameters See Password to Move to Protect Level Protect Level page 6 6 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 3 p N U O D Q lt o 6 Parameters n H P E Operation Adjustment Protect Initial Setting Communications Protect FOL LESA These parameters specify the range of parameters to be protected Shaded settings are the defaults Operation Adjustment Protect T
238. f their service life Set the operation adjustment protect initial setting communications protect and setting change protect values as required The Digital Controller s internal electrolytic capacitor depends on the ambient temperature and load rate The structural life depends on the ambient environment shock vibration The life expectancy of the output relays varies greatly with the switching capacity and other switching conditions Always use the output relays within their rated load and electrical life expectancy If an output relay is used beyond its life expectancy its contacts may become welded or burned Replace the Digital Controller and all other Digital Controllers purchased in the same time period E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A Appendices Symptom Cannot Communicate or a Communications Error Occurs Meaning The communications wiring is not correct The communications line has become disconnected The communications cable is broken The communications cable is too long The wrong communications cable has been used More than the specified number of communications devices are connected to the same communications path An end node has not been set at each end of the communications line The specified power supply voltage is not being supplied to the Controller The specified power supply voltage is not being supplied to an Interface Converter such as the K3SC
239. function may occasionally occur Do not allow metal objects conductors cuttings from installation work or moisture to enter the Digital Controller or a Setup Tool port Attach the cover to the front panel Setup Tool port whenever you are not using it to prevent foreign objects from entering the port Minor injury from explosion may occasionally occur Do not use the product where subject to flammable or explosive gas Fire may occasionally occur Do not allow dirt or other foreign objects to enter a Setup Tool port or between the pins on the connectors on the Setup Tool cable Minor electric shock fire or malfunction may occasionally occur Never disassemble modify or repair the product or touch any of the internal parts CAUTION Risk of Fire and Electric Shock a This product is UL recognized as Open Type Process Control Equipment It must be mounted in an enclosure that does not allow fire to escape externally b More than one disconnect switch may be required to de energize the equipment before servicing c Signal inputs are SELV limited energy d Caution To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not interconnect the outputs of different Class 2 circuits If the output relays are used past their life expectancy contact fusing or burning may occasionally occur Always consider the application conditions and use the output relays within their rated load and electrical life expectancy The life expectan
240. g Setting Level Lt i T 1 Lt cta nu E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 49 4 Basic Operation E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Advanced Operations SSS 9 1 Shifting Input Values curia a ee A 5 3 5 2 Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits for Analog Inputs 5 5 5 3 Executing Heating Cooling Control 5 7 9 31 Heating Cooling CONTO cm xad Ew Rive Se eee Re A 5 7 54 USING Event IN DUIS 436 ar es oe ss ee eee Ses 5 11 5 4 1 Event Input Settings 0 0 cee eens 5 11 5 4 2 Howto Use the Multi SP Function 0 2 000 eee 5 11 5 4 3 Operation Commands Other than Multi SP o o ooooooo o 5 12 5 5 Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values 5 15 5 5 1 SetPoint LIMEN tii thea MD rre HS ad OS SRE e YS Oban 5 15 5 5 2 OCN 2266 22 edd ae ee dae ee d duh ard Ada ae MASS ASE Sees eZee 5 16 5 6 Using the SP Ramp Function to Limit the SP Change Rate 5 17 Sw PRAM sheik oo ss a Bho fun ee ee a ee iet 5 17 5 7 Using the Key Protect Level 2 cece eee ees 5 19 Sel PLOTECUON asta rear tdci adsl dia 5 19 5 7 2 Entering the Password to Move to the Protect Level 5 20 5 8 Displaying Only Parameters That Have Been Changed 5 22 5 8 1 Displaying Changed Parameters 0 0 cece eee eee 5 22 5 9 OR Out
241. g methods for the Operations operating methods to help you make the most of ESCC E5EC Section 6 Parameters the E5CC E5EC e Input shift e Scaling upper lower limits for an analog input Heating and cooling control e Event inputs e Multi SP e Upper lower limits for the set point e SP ramp e Protection e Displaying changed parameters e OR output of alarms e Alarm delays and loop burnout alarms e Manual control e Transfer output e Simple programming e Output limits MV at stop and MV at PV error e Extraction of square root e MV rate of change e Setting the Shift Key PF Key e PV SV status display e Communications with a host device e g a PLC e Remote SP e Logic operations This section describes the procedures that you can use to calibrate the sensor or transfer output of the ESCC E5EC e Calibrating the E5CC E5EC Section 7 User Calibration O Learning the specifications Appendices The appendices list the specifications and and parameters of the parameters of the ESCC E5EC E5CC E5EC Related Manuals The following manual is also related to the ESCC E5EC Manual name Contents eo E5CC E5EC Digital H175 This manual describes the command text and Temperature Controllers communications procedures to use the Communications Manual CompoWay F and Modbus RTU protocols for serial communications between the E5CC E5EC and a host device e g a PLC 17 18 Conventions Used in This Manual E5C
242. hange rate SP MV or RSP alarm Alarm type 12 LBA loop burnout alarm cannot be selected Alarm 3 Type Alarm 4 Type Alarm output operation a Alarm type EN I alarm value Whenalarm value Description of function X is EN I X is negative pd function Output OFF No alarm on and Set the upward deviation in lower limit 1 the set point for the alarm upper limit H and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm lower limit L The alarm is ON when the PV is outside this deviation range Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm value X The alarm is ON when the PV is higher than the SP by the deviation or more Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm value X The alarm is ON when the PV is lower than the SP by the deviation or more O Upper limit Lower limit 4 30 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation Set Alarm output operation Alarm type When alarm value When alarm value X is positive X is negative 3 4 Upper and on gt LELH lower limit range 1 or C SP Description of function value Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper limit H and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm lower limit L The alarm is ON when the PV is inside this deviation range 5 Upper and A standby sequence is D lower limit with added to the uppe
243. hanged with key operations 10 Changing Event Input Data Select the event input conditions from the following setting ranges Parameter name Setting range Not assigned Event input 1 external input external input external input Event input 2 Event input 3 external input external input Event input 4 Event input 5 Au AS AS ASAS AS No r r gt gt Event input 6 external input Work bit 1 Work bit 2 9 Work bit 3 10 Work bit 4 11 Work bit 5 12 Work bit 6 13 Work bit 7 14 Work bit 8 Internal event 2 Same as for Event Input Data 1 Internal event 3 Same as for Event Input Data 1 Internal event 4 Same as for Event Input Data 1 Internal event 5 Same as for Event Input Data 1 Internal event 6 Same as for Event Input Data 1 Internal event 1 d Se lee sd Ed El Be E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 61 p N N r O e o O o O D ct O 5 D suonelado 29107 Buisn 2 22 3 5 Advanced Operations Note The internal event data can be changed from the default setting even if there is no event input terminal external input By changing the default setting the event input assignment parameters will be displayed at the Controller display and can be set from the Controller 11 Changing the Event Input Assignment Function Select the setting for the internal event assignment When a work bit is selected as event input data Communications
244. he Adjustment Level from the Operation Level press the C Key once e he set points 0 to 7 in the Adjustment Level are the set gd m i values for switching the set point during multi SP input 1 eve Press the The following items are displayed for Controllers with CT a Key for less than 1 s J e Inputs Heater current monitors Leakage current monitors C HB alarm detection and HS alarm detection Control in progress e Adjustment level parameters can be changed after setting the Operation Adjustment Protect parameter to 0 Displays and changing levels are not possible if the Operation Adjustment Protect parameter is set to 1 to 3 Protection is set in the Protect Level E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 17 ri I gt amp c m 3 D 5 F r O lt o 6 Parameters Adjustment Level Page Page Page Adjustment Manual z aE Work Bit 2 OFF Level Display 6 19 Reset Value Weak Delay 6 Hysteresis WoN Work Bit3 ON 6 Heating Delay 6 34 HL AT Execute 3 Hysteresis W JAF Work Bit 3 OFF 6 34 F Cancel 6 19 y Cooling Delay Communications 6 20 sele Utbuye WHAN Work Bit4ON 6 34 Writing Delay SP Mode Wait Band 111 E Work Bit 4 OFF Y 6 20 neus 6 34 Heater Current 1 e Process Value My MV at Stop Work Bit 5 ON 6 34 Value Monitor 6 21 Input Shift Delay Heater Burnout 2 LI Process Value E 1j MV at PV Error n IC E Work Bit 5 OFF 6
245. he Auto Manual Select Addition parameter must be set to ON The control must be set to 2 PID control a e This parameter switches the Controller between automatic and manual modes e f the C Key is pressed for at least 3 seconds when the Auto Manual Switch parameter is Operation displayed the manual mode will be entered and the manual control level will be displayed e This parameter will not be displayed if an event input is set to MANU auto manual e Related Parameters See PID ON OFF Initial Setting Level Page 6 41 Auto Manual Select Addition Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 67 The Number of Multi SP Points parameter must not be set to OFF and the Event Input Assignment 1 to Event Input Assignment 6 parameters must not be set to Multi SP No switching bit 0 to Multi SP No switching bit 2 1 Multi SP Set Point Selection Set Points 0 to 7 M Lm a p e O o D D ct O 5 r O lt o To use the multi SP function preset the eight set points SP O to 7 in the Adjustment Level and then switch the set point either by operating the keys or by using external input signals Function event inputs This parameter is used to select set points O to 7 MES The ST parameter must be set to OFF ROP Remote SP Monitor The Remote SP Enable parameter must be set to ON This parameter is used to monitor the remote SP a Monitor Monitor range Unit Remote SP lower
246. he Auxiliary Output 1 to 4 Assignment parameters For example if alarm 1 is set for the Control Output 1 Assignment parameter then alarm 1 has been assigned Assigning a work bit to either control output 1 or 2 or to auxiliary output 1 to 4 is also considered to be the same as assigning an alarm For example if work bit 1 is set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter then alarms 1 to 4 have been assigned E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation Assign the control outputs and auxiliary outputs Control output 1 Control output heating Control output 2 Control output cooling Auxiliary output 1 Alarm 1 Auxiliary output 2 Alarm 2 Operating Procedure e Setting Heating Cooling Control Initial Setting Level 1 Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to display 5 H Standard or Heating Cooling Standard or Heating Cooling 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the parameter to H The default is 5ENd standard gt o D 5 ro O c Cama 5 c F o y D S o D ct O 5 T Usethe following procedures to check the output assignments The output assignments are changed automatically when you change between stan dard and heating cooling control You do not have to set them e Setting Control Output 1 Advanced Function Setting 1 Press the Key several times in the Advanced Function Level Setting Level to display a t
247. he Integral Time Integral Time Cooling Derivative Time and Derivative Time Cooling parameters Function Setting range Unit Default 110 Setting Note The Integral Derivative Time Unit parameter changes to 0 1 when the RT robust tuning parameter is changed from OFF to ON e Related Parameters See Ses Integral Time Adjustment Level Page 6 27 Derivative Time Adjustment Level Page 6 27 Integral Time Cooling Adjustment Level Page 6 28 Derivative Time Cooling Adjustment Level Page 6 28 6 60 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters H E gt Li AT Calculated Gain mer AT Hysteresis Control must be set to 2 PID control LEMA Limit Cycle MV Amplitude e Normally use the default values for these parameters e The AT Calculated Gain parameter sets the gain for when PID values are calculated using Function AT When emphasizing response decrease the set value When emphasizing stability increase the set value e The AT Hysteresis parameter sets the hysteresis for limit cycle operation during autotuning when switching ON and OFF e The Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter sets the MV amplitude for limit cycle operation during autotuning Parameter name Setting range Unit Default AT Calculated Gain 0 1 to 10 0 A 08 P co gt o lt S 5 O o Tl c 3 ct O 5 o D 5 O lt o die AT Hysteresis Temperature input 0 1 to 999
248. he Temperature Unit 4 12 4 4 1 Temperature Unit wit etek Oe tah edict iS e hi a Se Fatis A 4 12 4 5 Selecting PID Control or ON OFF Control 4 13 4 6 Setting Output Specifications l 4 14 4 6 1 Control Periods ieuan a eee eens 4 14 4 6 2 Direct and Reverse Operation lille 4 14 4 6 3 Assigned Output Functions llle 4 15 4 6 4 Auxiliary Output Opening or Closing in Alarm eee eee 4 18 4 7 Setting the Set Point SP 000 cece es 4 19 Aral ENANOS Pess ad os hes SEP eee ae weet Aa 4 19 4 8 Using ON OFF CONntr l icas rr rr eee Force alee 4 20 4 8 1 ON OFF Control 2 2 223 454 dnt i et a 4 20 739 2 SOU iaa ae diea Bee dg he ek A 4 21 4 9 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup 4 23 4 9 1 AT Auto tuning 0 cc tenet eee 3 n 4 23 4 9 2 ST Self tuning 20 0 eens 4 25 470 3 Manal Setup austin ae ose do aco e Dee ene enh a eee eb dote e eee 4 28 4 10 Alarm QUIDUIS 45 a EORR EUER RM eh a ew eee ee 4 30 AiO Ala IV OS utes o cca arent aereo Geste bici un tipo po picha Pride pere 4 30 Z310 2 Alarm Valls islas irradia 4 34 4 11 Alarm Ay SUCH OC SUS si fees arce d dn de Pk O Re e a aie a s 4 37 4 11 1 Standby Sequence 0 eee eens 4 37 AE aad 4 38 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 1
249. he following table shows the relationship between set values and the range of Function protection l TU Set value a 3 2 3 m PV Can be dis Can be dis Can be dis Can be dis it played played played played PV SP Can be dis Can be dis Can be dis Can be dis played and played and played and played Operation changed changed changed Level Others Can be dis Can be dis Cannot be Cannot be played and played and displayed displayed changed changed and moving and moving to other lev to other lev els is not els is not possible possible Adjustment Level Can be dis Cannot be Cannot be Cannot be played and displayed displayed displayed changed and moving and moving and moving to other lev to other lev to other lev els is not els is not els is not possible possible possible e Parameters are not protected when the set value is set to 0 e Initial Setting Communications Protect This protect level restricts movement to the Initial Setting Level Communications Setting Level and Advanced Function Setting Level E Communications Set value Initial setting level setting level setting level 0 Possible to reach Possible to reach Possible to reach Possible to reach Possible to reach Not possible to reach 2 Not possible to reach Not possible to reach Not possible to reach Advanced function E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters The Event Input Assignment
250. he set point is changed Once the PID constants have been calculated ST is not executed when the next control operation is started as long as the set point remains unchanged ST self tuning is enabled when the ST parameter is set to ON in the Initial Setting Level When executing self tuning turn ON power for the load e g heater at the same time as or before supplying power to the Digital Controller If power is turned ON for the Digital Controller before turning ON power for the load self tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved This procedure executes self tuning ST Operating Procedure Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to a Setting Level display ST ST 2 Press the 4 or Key to select aN ST ON The defaultis ON The TUNE indicator will flash during ST execution EN Additional Information PID Constants When control characteristics are already known PID constants can be set directly to adjust control The PID constants are set in the following parameters in the Adjustment Level Proportional Band P Integral Time I Derivative Time D Proportional Band Cooling C P Integral Time Cooling C I and Derivative Time Cooling C D e Startup Conditions Self tuning by step response tuning SRT is started when the following conditions are met after program execution is started and the set point is changed At start of ope
251. i dte pe eqs A 6 A 2 entium niece sicsaieiczasecierice sc aaa AE A 7 A 2 1 wee tier c ran A 7 A 2 2 Dimensions CU mits MN PER UU m A 7 A 3 USB Serial Conversion Cable and Conversion Cable ccccssssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeenenneeees A 8 A 3 1 E58 CIFQ2 USB Serial Conversion Cable cccccseseecccseeeeceseeeeeeeeceeeeesaeueeeesauseeeeeaeeeeesaaees A 8 A 3 2 E5S CIFQ2 E Conversion Cable eco oa ea ti A 9 AA Error DISDIayS eU M A 10 A5 Troubleshooting aoinne a E A 13 A 6 Parameter ODGration LISAS cani A 16 A 6 1 So anes rane A E A 16 A 6 2 AdJUSIMSnt Loves dato A 17 A 6 3 Ntal SS Ctl CV Cl C is A 18 A 6 4 Manual Controlilevel oia cena ate eae aa A 21 A 6 5 Monitor Setting Item Level ooonncccccconnccccccononncoonnnonocconcncnonnononnnonnnnononnnnnnnnonannrnnnonannnnnnnnos A 21 A 6 6 Advanced Function Setting Level ooocccccccconncccnnnnnncnnnnccnononnonannnnnnnnnconnnncnnnnnnonnnananncnnnonnnas A 22 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 23 Index 24 A 7 A 8 A 6 7 Protecl CVE A ie Suet a cale rid oe le teat ag Se ab ata cht Deak host oath Gt Areal fest toes A 26 A 6 8 Communications Setting ESVel susc esie arras A 26 A 6 9 Initialization According to Parameter Changes cccccsseeeecceseeeeeeseseeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeseauaneeessaaees A 27 Sensor Input Setting Range Indication Range
252. if there are four auxiliary outputs and to auxiliary output 2 if there are only 2 auxiliary outputs Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used If the Controller is equipped with HB HS alarm detection it is set by default to 4H Heater Alarm E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 73 P oo gt o lt EY 5 o O o Tl c 5 o et O 5 o O zi 5 e r D lt o 6 Parameters AL Function a Setting See v E f Function a Setting See MA Integrated Alarm Assignment The integrated alarm must be assigned You can use the integrated alarm to output an OR of alarm 1 alarm 2 alarm 3 alarm 4 the HB alarm the HS alarm the input alarm and the RSP input alarm Set this parameter to the sum of the codes of the status for which to output an OR The default is 49 i e an OR of alarm 1 the HB alarm and the HS alarm is output The alarm 1 code is 1 the HB alarm code is 16 and the HS alarm code is 32 1 16 32 49 Code Status 1 Alarm 1 2 Alarm 2 4 Alarm 3 8 Alarm 4 16 HB alarm 32 HS alarm 64 Input error 128 RSP input error Setting range Default O to 255 49 o Related Parameters Alarm Value 1 to 4 Operation Level Page 6 14 MV at Error Adjustment Level Page 6 31 HB ON OFF Advanced Funct
253. iffers depending on the changed parameter and the output type setting e SP SP upper and lower limits Ramp SP SP upper and lower limits e PV Input setting range upper and lower limits or scaling upper and lower limits e MV Heating 100 0 0 0 MV Cooling 100 0 0 0 4 1 Initialized only when the transfer output type is set to SP Ramp SP or PV 4 2 lnitialized only when the transfer output type is set to MV Heating or MV Cooling 4 3 Initialized to the above default values regardless of the settings for changing the transfer output type Initialized as follows according to the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter setting e MV Upper Limit 100 0 e MV Lower Limit Standard 0 0 heating cooling 100 0 Initialized to control output cooling for heating and cooling control according to the following The defaults for standard control are the defaults in the parameter list e With control output 2 The Control Output 2 Assignment parameter is initialized to control output cooling e f the Controller does not have control output 2 but has four auxiliary outputs the Auxiliary Output 4 Assignment parameter is initialized to Control Output Cooling e Otherwise the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameter is initialized to Control Output Cooling If the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter is initialized as follows e Controllers with HB and HS alarms Heater alarm e Controllers without H
254. igital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A Appendices e Dimensions 2 110 mm 250 mm RD indicator 263 mm 1 510 mm PWR indicator Ele SD indicator LED Indicator Display Indicator Color Status Meaning PWR Green USB bus power is being supplied USB bus power is not being supplied SD Yellow Sending data from USB Serial Conversion Cable Not lit Not sending data from USB Serial Conversion Cable RD Receiving data from the USB Serial Conversion Cable Not receiving data from the USB Serial Conversion Cable A 3 2 E58 CIFQ2 E Conversion Cable O Specifications Item Specification Applicable models E5EC Series Connector Digital Controller 4 pin plug specifications E58 CIFQ2 Small special connector Ambient temperature O to 55 C with no condensation or icing Ambient humidity 10 to 80 Storage temperature 20 to 60 C with no condensation or icing Storage humidity 10 to 80 Altitude 2 000 m max Weight Approx 60 g e Dimensions E58 CIFQ2 E Conversion Cable 1510 mm HER Connected to the E58 CIFQ2 USB Serial Conversion Cable 2 110 mm 250 mm 263 mm 1 510 mm 2 30010 Ce E NTE E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A 9 gt wm c o D o O m O O 5 lt O o O 5 O D 2 O D 5 o O O 5 lt O o O 5 O D 2 O 91989 UOISISALOD 3 cOdIO 8S843 C E W A Appendices A 4 Error Displays When an error occurs the error con
255. iliary Output 3 Alarm 3 Intemal Event amp amp E vent input B external input None Auxiliary Output 4 Alarm 4 y Operation Type can be selected from 1 to 4 In case that Work bit is not utilized select No assignment default 1 Displaying the Library Import Dialog Box Logic operation samples for specific cases are set in the library in advance Examples of settings for specific cases are loaded by selecting them from the library list and clicking the OK Button Example Selecting Library 1 Keeping an alarm output off while operation is stopped m Function overview While operation is stopped an auxiliary output does not output an alarm m Operation illustration RUNISTOP ZZ Work bit 1 i A Auxiliary output 1 1 d 1 pod ye 1 While operation is stopped auxiliary output 1 does not output alarm 1 2 While operation is running auxiliary output 1 outputs alarm 1 m Configuration content Work bit operation 2 Switching Work Bit Operations Select the work bit logic operations from the Operation of Work Bit 1 to Operation of Work Bit 8 Tab Pages E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations 3 Selecting the Operation Type From one to four operations are supported If work bits are not to be used set them to No operation Always OFF the default e N O O pe rati O n Operation of Work Bit 1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Ope
256. imit The RSP indicator will flash in Remote SP Mode and the Remote SP Monitor will flash on the No 2 display in any SP Mode e When you use the remote SP input value as the control SP it is restricted by the set point upper limit and the set point lower limit a Parameter lo e range Unit Default e emperature input Input setting range lower Rehd LU io Input setting range upper limit d BamsisepLtewertimit Analog input Scaling lower limit to Scaling 200 upper limit e Related Parameters See hiis Hemote SP Input Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 75 Hemote SP Enable Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 75 6 76 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters _ The ST parameter must be set to OFF oP E hi SP Tracking The Remote SP Enable parameter must be set to ON This parameter sets the operation to perform when moving from Remote SP Mode to Local SP Mode Function When this parameter is set to ON operation continues using the remote SP as the local SP When this parameter is set to OFF the remote SP does not affect the local SP a Setting range Default an Enabled or aF F Disabled oF F Setting e Related Parameters See i Set Point During SP Ramp Operation Level Page 6 10 SP Mode Adjustment Level Page 6 20 J I HNL Manual MV Limit Enable Control must be set to 2 PID control pP oo gt o lt D 5 o O o Tl c 5 o et
257. including the sensor input type alarm types control periods and other settings is done using parameter displays The C and 9 Keys are used to switch between parameters and the amount of time that you press the keys determines which parameter you move to This section describes two typical examples I Explanation of Examples Changing Parameters A image means that there are parameters L a H B Continue pressing the Key to change parameters Li y E 100 until you reach the intended parameter NE Changing Numbers and G2 Keys Numeric data and selections in each CNEL screen can be changed by using the Example 1 Setup Procedure Input type 5 K thermocouple 200 C to 1 300 C Control method ON OFF control Alarm type 2 upper limit Alarm value 1 20 C deviation Set point 100 C Initial Setting Level Set input specifications Set control specifications Set alarm type Operation Level E SP and alarm ve Start operation An Operation Level Initial Setting Level Check input type Check that control method is ON OFF control Check alarm type Operation Level Use the 4 and Keys to set the SP to 100 C Confirm that control is running Use the 4 and Keys to set the alarm value to 20 C GERR error will be displayed if the power supply is turned ON before the sensor is connected m L PV SP ch Press
258. ing Operation Level Page 6 16 MV Monitor Cooling Operation Level Page 6 16 H E E Automatic Display Return Time e In the Operation Level Adjustment Level or Monitor Setting Item Level the display m automatically returns to the PV SP if there are no key operations for the time set for this Function parameter e The automatic display return time is disabled when the parameter is set to OFF In that case the display will not be automatically switched Setting range Unit Default OFF 1 to 99 aFF Setting 6 62 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters Display Brightness This parameter sets the display brightness to one of three levels Adjust the level if the dis play is too bright Function Setting range Default a 1 dark to 3 bright 3 Setting H l l L Alarm 1 Latch Alarm 1 must be assigned and the alarm 1 type must not be O Hg l L Alarm 2 Latch Alarm 2 must be assigned and the alarm 2 type must not be 0 or 12 H 3 LE Alarm 3 Latch Alarm 3 must be assigned and the alarm 3 type must not be 0 or 12 Au LE Alarm 4 Latch Alarm 4 must be assigned and the alarm 4 type f Function a Setting See E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 must not be 0 or 12 e When this parameter is set to ON the alarm function is held until one of the following conditions is satisfied a The power is cycled b The latch is cancelled by the P
259. ing Average Count sessuess 5 3 6 62 Multi SP Set Point Selection 6 9 MV Manual MV 5i roe te penes dono tea enn 6 37 IM ab EITOE septizo acaricia 6 31 MV at PV ENON stats 5 43 MV ab SIOD ranas 5 42 6 31 MV at Stop and Error Addition 6 66 MV Change Rate Limit 5 46 6 33 WIN SIDISDIAY ee 6 62 MV Display Selection 4 49 6 81 MV L wer LIMIT tcr 6 32 MV Monitor Cooling esses 6 16 MV Monitor Heating eseeeeesess ss 6 16 MV Upper Limit seis eic iore re corre prenne 6 32 Number of Multi SP Points 5 11 5 14 6 56 Operation Adjustment Protect 6 4 Parameter Initialization sesussssss 6 56 Parameter Mask Enable esessssssss 6 6 DASS WOW sanaci n 5 20 Index 4 Password to Move to Protect Level 6 6 PF Setting oooccccccccnccnnccnnnconccnanononcnnnos 6 35 6 36 6 79 PID ON OFF 2 22 4 ee 6 41 PID ON OFF parameter eeeeeeee 4 21 Process Value Input Shift ssssssueueussse 5 3 Process Value Slope Coefficient 5 3 Process Value Set Point 1 6 8 Process Value Set Point 2
260. ing level The default is 2 Upper limit alarm e f the Controller is equipped with HB HS alarm detection the Alarm 1 Type is not displayed for the default settings To use alarm 1 set an output assignment to alarm 1 Refer to 4 6 3 Assigned Output Functions e Related Parameters Alarm Value 1 to 4 Operation Level Page 6 14 Alarm Upper Limit 1 to 4 Operation Level Page 6 15 Alarm Lower Limit 1 to 4 Operation Level Page 6 15 Alarm 1 to 4 Hysteresis Initial Setting Level Page 6 48 Standby Sequence Reset Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 57 Auxiliary Output 1 to 4 Open in Alarm Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 58 Alarm 1 to 4 Latch Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 63 See P N 5 m o D 5 rm O lt o E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 47 6 Parameters Z MM yb LILI LNG Alarm 1 Hysteresis Alarm 2 Hysteresis Alarm 3 Hysteresis Alarm 4 Hysteresis Alarm 1 must be assigned The alarm 1 type must not be 0 12 or 13 Alarm 2 must be assigned The alarm 2 type must not be 0 12 or 13 Alarm 3 must be assigned The alarm 3 type must not be 0 12 or 13 Alarm 4 must be assigned The alarm 4 type must not be 0 12 or 13 f Function a Setting See e These parameters set the hysteresis for alarms 1 2 3 and 4 Alarms Other Than an MV Alarm Setting range Default Temperature input 0 1 to 999 9 0 01
261. ion The following figure summarizes the operation of alarms when the Alarm Type parameter is set to lower limit alarm with standby sequence and close in alarm is set Parameters Display ALH ito Alarm type Lower limit alarm with standby sequence Time ON OFF ON closed OFF open Alarm 1 to 4 Alarm 1 to 4 Hysteresis a Sequence E Advanced Function Setting Level Initial Setting Level E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation 4 12 Using Heater Burnout HB and Heater Short HS Alarms 4 12 1 HB Alarm e What Is an HB Alarm A heater burnout alarm operates by detecting the heater current with a current transformer CT for time proportional PID control or ON OFF control If the detected current is less than the specified heater burnout detection current even though the control output is ON a heater burnout will be assumed and an alarm will be output E5CC EC Temperature Input Temperature sensor I zi N c o 3 aq T O fo e o UJ c gt O c p E UJ fo gt Q L O fo o o gt O L o gt gt fo 3 o ciis ME rer gt Auxiliary output assigned to an HB alarm Voltage output for driving SSR Heater burnout An HB alarm is separate from alarms 1 to 4 The HB ON OFF parameter and other parameters must be set in the Advanced Function Setting Level With the default settings the HB alar
262. ion Setting Level Page 6 58 HS Alarm Use Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 68 Remote SP Enable Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 75 The Program Pattern parameter must not be set to Soak Time Unit OFF e Set the soak time unit for the simple program function Setting range Default M Minutes 4 Hours M e Related Parameters Program Start Operation Level Page 6 12 Soak Time Remain Operation Level Page 6 13 Soak Time Adjustment Level Page 6 30 Wait Band Adjustment Level Page 6 30 Program Pattern Initial Setting Level Page 6 43 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters dL oP Alarm 1 to alarm 4 must be assigned The SP Ramp Set Value parameter must not be set to OFF and the SP Ramp Fall Value parameter must not be set to SAME or OFF The ST parameter must be set to OFF The alarm type must be set to 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 14 15 18 or 19 Alarm SP Selection This parameter sets whether the set point that triggers the alarm is the ramp SP or target SP a Setting range Default 5P M Ramp SP 57 SP Poh Setting e Related Parameters See SP Ramp Set Value Adjustment Level Page 6 32 m SP Ramp Fall Value Adjustment Level Page 6 32 ST Self tuning Initial Setting Level Page 6 42 RS 3 Remote SP Input M This parameter sets the input type for the remote SP Function A Setting range Default 4 21 4 to 20mA Setting 1 20 0
263. ion is used for heating operations Set a suitable value for the hysteresis 4 20 The output will not turn ON while the Digital Controller is being operated with power supplied through the USB Serial Conversion Cable Supply the specified power from the terminals Set the RUN STOP mode to RUN If STOP is lit on the display control is stopped Thermometer has burnt Check whether the thermometer has burnt out or out or short circuited short circuited Thermometer lead wires and power lines are in the same conduit causing noise from the power lines generally display values will be unstable Connection between the Digital Controller and thermocouple is using copper wires Installation location of thermometer is unsuitable Input shift is not set correctly default 0 C Wire the lead wires and power lines in separate conduits or wire them using a more direct path Connect the thermocouple s lead wires directly or connect a compensating conductor suitable for the thermocouple Make sure that the location that is being measured with the temperature sensor is suitable Set a suitable input shift If input shift is not required set the input shift value to 0 0 Keys will not operate Setting change protectis Turn OFF setting change protect ON Cannot shift levels Control is unstable Operations limited due to protection The internal components have reached the end o
264. it before attempting to use the Digital Controller and use the Digital Controller correctly according to the information provided Keep this manual in a safe place for easy reference Refer to the following manual for further information on communications E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Control lers Communications Manual Cat No H175 OMRON 2011 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 1 Read and Understand this Manual Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the products Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclu
265. itude Input Digital Filter Moving Average Count MV Display Automatic Display Return Time Display Brightness Alarm 1 Latch Alarm 2 Latch Alarm 3 Latch Alarm 4 Latch Move to Protect Level Time Cold Junction Compensation Method Alarm 1 ON Delay Alarm 2 ON Delay Alarm 3 ON Delay Alarm 4 ON Delay Alarm 1 OFF Delay Alarm 2 OFF Delay Alarm 3 OFF Delay Alarm 4 OFF Delay MV at Stop and Error Addition Auto Manual Select Addition Manual Output Method M EU minute H EU hour N C Open in alarm N C Open in alarm N C Open in alarm N C Open in alarm meu OFON rn ON oe PHL OFRON ON CFR ON OFF None seo 01109989 i0 cor La CEE ps None LC O 1 os Noe Se input 0 1 to 999 9 0B C or F cor sre input 0 01 to 9 99 PE oo wFs ro L e d zs 1 OFF None E e CA o s Nik Joron O s sW OFF None Mi Joron Jara OFF None ML formon O O faem OFF None Wy 010 999 0 ON delay disabled 0 Secon REG 010 999 0 ON delay disabled o Seconc Raan 010 999 0 ON delay disabled 0 Secom Raen 010 999 0 ON delay disabled 0 Secom Wig 010 999 0 OFF delay disabled 0 Secma RUF 010 999 0 OFF delay disabled o Secos RI 010 999 0 OFF delay disabled o Secma Mcr otoseo OFFieeydeked fo Seco MANE HOLD or INIT Hold cNcE HOLD None m m am amm aa aa a w
266. l Communications Setting Level Calibration Level and Monitor Setting Item Level sjo e Dunes 9393 0093 r e Manual Control Level This level is used to set the MV manually With the default settings you cannot move to the Manual Control Level e To use the Key to move to the Manual Control Level change the setting of the PF Setting parameter to H e To use the Level Key on the Auto Manual Switch Display to move to the Manual Control Level set the Auto Manual Switch Display Addition parameter in the Advanced Function Setting Level to ON e To use an event input to move to the Manual Control Level change the setting of the Event Input Assignment 1 to 6 parameter to ANH o Protect Level This level is used to restrict the operations that can be performed and the parameters that can be displayed with the front panel keys For example you can prohibit changing the SP and other parameters in the Operation Level and Adjustment Level You can move to the Protect Level from the Operation Level or the Adjustment Level To move to the Advanced Function Setting Level you must first cancel the protection that is set in the Protect Level E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 3 11 3 Part Names and Basic Procedures e Communications Setting Level This level is used to set the communications parameters You can move to the Communications Set ting Level from the Initial Setting Level Calibration Level
267. l Setting Level gj Communications Setting Level 43 Advanced Function Setting Level fa T diaa ama a The logic operation function logically handles outputs and operation combining the AND OR logic E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 NES Import of Library Help H Closet Operation of Work Bit 1 peration of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work Bil Operation Type No operation Always OFF y Work Bit 1 is used by Work Bit 1 Always OFF Control Output Assi t Event Input Data Event Input Assignment IRL Ge Se i Internal Event 1 1 E vent input 1 extemal input Y MusPNo iO y Control Dutput 1 Control output heating y Internal Event 2 2E vent input 2 extemal input Y RUN STOP y Control Qutput 2 No assignment v Auxiliary Output Assignment Internal Event 3 3 vert input 3 extemalinput None zl Auxiliary Output Alam y IntemalEvent 4 4Event input 4 extemal input m None awayOupu2 homo SS IntemalEvent 5 5 Event input 5 extemal input Y None amar Outputs faam Internal Event 6 6 Event input 6 external input y None y Auxiliary Dutput 4 Alam 4 Operation Type can be selected from 1 to 4 In case that Work bit is not utilized select No assignment default lolx Import of Library Help H Closes
268. l can be moved to only by displaying the password display and entering the correct password The user can set any password in the Password to Move to Protect Level parameter If no password is set i e if the password is set to O in the Password to Move to Protect Level parameter the password input display to move to the Protect Level will not be displayed and the Protect Level can be moved to directly Move to the Protect Level and set the password Example password 1234 Operating Procedure e Password Not Yet Set Press the and Keys simultaneously for at least 3 sec Protect Level onds default in the Operation Level If a password is not set the Protect Level will be entered and a Operation Adjustment Protect will be displayed Operation Adjustment Protect 2 Press the Key several times in the Protect Level to display PRLP Password to Move to Protect Level Fa Move to Protect Level 3 Press the and 4 Keys simultaneously and set the value to 1234 This enters the password To prevent setting the password incorrectly the and Keys or and Keys must be pressed simultaneously to set the password 1 The key pressing time can be changed in PALE Move to Protect Level Time in the Advanced Function Setting Level Setting range 1 to 30 seconds Default 3 seconds 5 20 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations e Password Already Set
269. l flash when the key is pressed for 1 s or longer 997 Bulnes jeniu ay 0 BUON L L v The display will change from the Operation Level to the Initial Initial Setting Level Setting Level Input Type I Moving from the Initial Setting Level to the Operation Level Initial Setting Level 1 Press the C Key for at least 1 second in the Initial Setting Level The display will change from the Initial Setting Level to the Operation Level Operation Level PV SP E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 3 4 Basic Operation 4 1 2 Moving to the Adjustment Level I Moving from the Operation Level to the Adjustment Level Press the Key for less than 1 second in the Operation CPe ation Level Level The display will change from the Operation Level to the Adjustment Adjustment Level Level L hdu will be displayed only once when you move to the Adjustment Level I Moving from the Adjustment Level to the Operation Level Adjustment Level 1 Press the C Key for less than 1 second in the Adjustment Level Process Value Input Shift The display will change from the Adjustment Level to the Operation Operation Level Level pus 4 1 3 Moving to the Protect Level Moving from the Operation Level to the Protect Level Press the and Keys simultaneously for at least 3 OPeration Level seconds in the Operation Level The No 1 display will flash when the keys are pressed
270. lash when the key is pressed for 1 s or longer The display will change from the Operation Level to the Initial Setting Level Move to Advanced Function Setting Level in the Operation Level Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to display ci Move to Advanced Function Setting Level Initial Setting Level Input Type Press the and 4 Keys at the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter and then enter 5 IIIa Youcan hold the 4 Up or 4 Down Key to increment or decrement the set value quickly Initial Setting Level y Move to Advanced Function Setting n Level Press Key once or wait for 2 seconds or longer without doing anything The display will change to the Advanced Function Setting Level Move to Advanced Function Setting Level 169 Password to move to Advanced Function Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level Parameter Initialization e Moving from the Advanced Function Setting Level to the Operation Level 7 Press the Key for at least 1 second in the Advanced Function Setting Level The display will change from the Advanced Function Setting Level to the Initial Setting Level Press the Key for at least 1 second in the Initial Setting Level The display will change from the Initial Setting Level to the Operation Level Advanced Function Setting Level Initial Setting Level Input Type Operation Level PV SP
271. layed SP iv SP Mui SP No SP Soak Time Remain SP Internal Set Point ramp SP SP Alarm Value Y The set value of the Alarm Value 1 parameter is displayed even if it is not valid due to the setting of the Alarm 1 Type parameter P C O c o O 3 N 3 O gt O U U Q o ri f lt CO NIO O1 B O N Monitoring range Unit Temperature input The specified range for the specified sensor Analog input Scaling lower limit 5 FS to Scaling upper limit 5 FS PV EU suonoejes e dsiq dS Ad 1 L p Setting monitoring range Unit SP SP lower limit to SP upper limit EU During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the currently selected sensor and dur ing analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting PV SP Display Selections a 1 1 d PV SP No 1 Display Selection Advanced Function Setting PV SP No 2 Display Selection 4 eve e MV Displays for Heating and Cooling Control Select either the manipulated variable for heating or the manipulated variable for cooling as the MV to be displayed for PV SP MV during heating and cooling control The MV Display Selection parameter is displayed only when heating cooling control is being performed and PV SP MV is selected in the PV SP Display Screen parameter or a Monitor Setting Item Display parameter Code Displayed value Level oqda MV Display Selection m MV heating Advanced Function Esa MV coolin
272. le operation is stopped Alarm 1 ALM 1 ALM1 is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status Alarm 2 ALN2 is alternately displayed during Alarm 2 status Alarm 3 ALM3 is alternately displayed during Alarm 3 status Alarm 4 ALM4 is alternately displayed during Alarm 4 status Alarm 1 to 4 OR status ALM ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1 2 3 or 4 is set to ON Heater Alarm HH HAisalternately displayed when an HB alarm or HS alarm is ON Note The default is OFF Example When STOP Is Selected for the PV Status Display Function Normal When RUN STOP is STOP Alternating displa ELTO Se oc IL LI gar J LIL PV SP e SV Status Display Function Advanced Function Setting Level The SP Manual MV or blank on the No 2 display in the PV SP PV or PV Manual MV Display and the control or alarm status specified for the SV status display function are alternately displayed in 0 5 s cycles e PV e PV SP e PV Manual MV e PV SP Manual MV This includes when the PV SP is selected for the Monitor Setting Item parameter Set value Display Function OFF FF No SV status display Manual MANL MANU is alternately displayed during manual control Stop Sae STOP is alternately displayed while operation is stopped Alarm 1 ALMI ALM1 is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status Alarm 2 ALN2 is alternately displayed during Alarm 2 status Alarm 3 ALM3 is alternately displayed during Alarm 3 status E5CC E5EC
273. lected in the actual MV Power ON e eee mim momom mom om momo mom mom om oum cm ocmogm om eee Gm m Gm ee eee y p Adjustment Level Press the C Key for less than 1 s Press the Key for at least 1 s display will flash Ld Press the XP Key for at least 1 s or the wl Key for at least 1 s Press the KP Key for at least 1 s Press the S Key for at least 3 s Manual Control Level Here the PF Setting parameter is set to A M To move from the Operation Level to the Manual Control Level press the Key for at least three sec onds with the Auto Manual Switch parameter displayed In addition this operation can be performed using the PF Key by setting the PF Setting parameter Advanced Function Setting Level to A M Auto Manual For details on the setting method refer to 4 13 Customizing the PV SP Display This setting cannot be made during ON OFF operation e The MANU indicator will light during manual control e tis not possible to move to any displays except for the PV MV parameter during manual operation e To return to the Operation Level press the C Key or the PF Key in the Manual Control Level for at least one second E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters PV MV Manual MV e The manual control level display appears as shown below E5EC E5CC Function m 3 e a D n a PV SP Manual MV PV Manual M
274. ler e Displaying the current temperature on the Digital Controller The control outputs alarm outputs transfer output event inputs and external communications for the Digital Controller will not operate unless the power supply to the Digital Controller is turned ON eJjnpeoold L t c 2 4 2 Connection Method Use the E58 CIFQ2 USB Serial Conversion Cable to connect the E5CC E5EC to the computer The USB Serial Conversion Cable is used to communicate with a USB port on a computer as a virtual COM port E5cc e Setup Tool Port and Connecting Cable The location of the Setup Tool port on the E5CC and the required cable are shown below Setup Tool port Connecting cable Top panel on the Digital Controller E58 CIFQ2 USB Serial Conversion Cable Setup Tool port E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 23 2 Preparations e Connection Procedure Serial connector 1 Connect the serial connector on the USB Serial Conversion Cable to the Setup Tool port on the top panel of the Digital Controller E5EC e Setup Tool Ports and Connecting Cables The locations of the Setup Tool ports on the E5EC and the required cables are shown below There are Setup Tool ports on both the top panel and front panel of the Digital Controller Setup Tool ports Connecting cables e Front panel on the Digital Controller Top panel on the Digital Controller E58 CIFQ2 E E58 CIFQ2 Conversi
275. libration data to non volatile memory To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to non volatile memory press the e Key while Na is displayed in the No 2 display without pressing the 4 Key The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF For Controllers that have a transfer output you can continue by calibrating the transfer output For detailed setting methods refer to 7 6 Calibrating the Transfer Output E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 7 User Calibration 7 6 Calibrating the Transfer Output NA For Controllers that have a transfer output the transfer out Advanced Function l l l l l l l Setting Level put calibration display will be displayed after input calibration has been completed Main Input Calibration Put calibration display Transfer Output Note This is displayed only Calibration for Controllers that VL have a transfer output Use the following procedure to calibrate the transfer output for 4 to 20 mA 1 Connect a DMM to the transfer output terminals E5CC E5EC Input power supply Input power supply jndino 1ejsueJ ay bunerqieg 9 2 7 2 Press the Key to display the parameter for the transfer output The calibration display for 20 mA will be displayed Press the J or 4 Key until the DMM monitor value changes to 20 mA Press the Key The calibration settings will be temporarily registered
276. libration data for each item is temporarily registered It can be officially registered as calibration data only when all items have been calibrated to new values Therefore be sure to temporarily register all items when you perform the calibration When the data is registered it is also recorded that user calibration has been performed Prepare separate measuring devices and equipment for calibration For details on how to handle measuring devices and equipment refer to the respective instruction manuals E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 7 User Calibration 7 2 Parameter Structure e To execute user calibration enter the password 1201 at the Move to Calibration Level parameter in the Advanced Function Setting Level The mode will be changed to the calibration mode and Ad will be displayed e The Move to Calibration Level parameter may not be displayed when the user is doing the calibration for the first time If this happens set the Initial Setting Communications Protect parameter in the Protect Level to O before moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level e The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF e The parameter calibrations in the calibration mode are structured as shown below Display moves automatically according to input type i Resistance Thermocouple or infrared Current Voltade inbut thermometer temperature sensor input Ls N ud ee LC DLL cl
277. limit 1 to scaling upper limit Set Point Lower Temperature Input setting range lower limit to EU 200 Limit input SP upper limit 1 Analog input Scaling lower limit to SP upper 0 limit 1 o Related Parameters see Input Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 39 Temperature Unit Initial Setting Level Page 6 40 LNEL PID ON OFF jm a e This parameter selects 2 PID control or ON OFF control e The auto tuning and self tuning functions can be used in 2 PID control Function a Setting range Default Pid 2 PID aNaF ON OFF aNar Setting o Related Parameters AT Execute Cancel Adjustment Level Page 6 19 Manual Reset Value Adjustment Level Page 6 29 Hysteresis Heating Adjustment Level Page 6 29 Hysteresis Cooling Adjustment Level Page 6 29 ST Stable Range Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 60 See E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 41 P N 5 m o D 5 rm O lt o 6 Parameters 5 HL Standard or Heating Cooling e This parameter selects standard control or heating cooling control pa e f heating cooling control is selected for the E5CC when there is only one control output Function the auxiliary output 2 terminal SUB2 is assigned as the control output for cooling e f heating cooling control is selected for the E5EC when there is only one control output the auxiliary output 4 terminal SUBA is assigned as the control outpu
278. limit 10 to Remote SP upper limit 10 EU e Related Parameters See SP Mode Adjustment Level Page 6 20 Hemote SP Enable Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 75 Hemote SP Upper Limit Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 76 Remote SP Lower Limit Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 76 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 9 6 Parameters The SP Ramp Set Value parameter must not be set D_m to OFF and the SP Ramp Fall Value parameter must zr de id ane not be set to SAME or OFF The ST parameter must be set to OFF This parameter monitors the set point during SP ramp operation A ramp is used to restrict the change width of the set point as a rate of change This parameter is displayed when a set value is input for the SP Ramp Set Value parameter Function Adjustment Level When not in ramp operation the set point will be the same as the one displayed for the Pro cess Value Set Point parameter L Monitor range Unit SP SP lower limit to SP upper limit EU Monitor e Related Parameters Process Value Set Point Operation Level Page 6 8 SP Ramp Set Value Adjustment Level Page 6 32 SP Ramp Fall Value Adjustment Level Page 6 32 Set Point Upper Limit Initial Setting Level Page 6 41 Set Point Lower Limit Initial Setting Level Page 6 41 See HB and HS alarms must be supported Le Meal RUC valde mentor The HB ON OFF parameter must be set to ON This paramete
279. line Set value of HS Alarm 1 2 parameter Leakage current value x when output is OFF HS current value x Number of loops 2 cr 4 12 3 Installing Current Transformers CT e CTs can be used for the heater burnout HB and heater short HS alarms For the E5CC connect the CT in advance to terminals 16 and 17 CT1 or 17 and 18 CT2 For the E5EC connect the CT in advance to terminals 19 and 20 CT1 or 20 and 21 CT2 Then pass the heater power line through the hole in the CT For specifications models and dimensions of the CTs that can be used with the Digital Controller refer to A 2 Current Transformer CT 1D SsjeuuojsueJ ueno Burjeisu e zr v 1 Single phase Heaters For single phase heaters install the CT in the position shown in the following diagram Load Load such as a heater AC line CT Product To CT input 2 Three phase Heaters When a 3 phase power supply is used regardless of the types of connecting lines two current transformers CTs are required to detect heater burnouts and heater shorts a Delta connecting lines Refer to the following diagram for CT installation positions Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered so be sure to take that into account when setting the detection current E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 43 4 Basic Operation Load such as a heater AC line Product To CT input AC line CT Prod
280. lly returns to aF F e Related Parameters See ras Proportional Band Adjustment Level Page 6 27 Integral Time Adjustment Level Page 6 27 Derivative Time Adjustment Level Page 6 27 Proportional Band Cooling Adjustment Level Page 6 28 Integral Time Cooling Adjustment Level Page 6 28 Derivative Time Cooling Adjustment Level Page 6 28 PID ON OFF Initial Setting Level Page 6 41 Heating Cooling Tuning Method Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 78 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 19 6 Parameters Communications must be supported The Event Input Assignment 1 to Event Input Assignment 6 parameters must not be set to enable disable communications writing MWE Communications Writing d e This parameter enables disables writing of parameters to the E5CC E5EC from the host a personal computer using communications Function This parameter is not displayed if the Event Input Assignment 1 to Event Input Assignment 6 parameters are set to enable disable communications writing e Setting rage Default ON Writing enabled OFF sening OFF Writing disabled e Related Parameters See uad Communications Unit No Communications Setting Level Page 6 84 Communications Baud Rate Communications Setting Level Page 6 84 Communications Data Length Communications Setting Level Page 6 84 Communications Parity Communications Setting Level Page 6 84 Communications Stop Bi
281. lowing table shows the contents of the No 1 2 and 3 displays according to the set ting of the PV SP Display Selection parameter Only the E5EC has a No 3 display Function A Set value No 3 display ESEC only Nothing s displayed Nothing s displayed Nothing is played Nothing is splayed Manipuated value Set point Multi SP No Set point Soak time remain terna st point amp SP Process value Set point Alarm value 171 1 The set value of the Alarm Value 1 parameter is displayed even if it is not valid due to the setting of the Alarm 1 Type parameter Setting CO N O01 B O N Monitor range Unit Process value Temperature input The specified range for the specified sensor Analog input Scaling lower limit 5 FS to Scaling upper limit 5 EU FS Setting range Unit Set point SP lower limit to SP upper limit EU For a temperature input the decimal point position depends on the currently selected sen sor and for an analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting PV SP Display Selections Parameter Default PV SP No 1 Display Selection PV SP No 2 Display Selection e Related Parameters See PV SP Display Selection Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 81 6 8 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters The Event Input Assignment 1 to Event Input Assignment 6 parameters must not be set to Auto M Auto Manual Switch Manual and t
282. ls teed bei ae veo a ee es vee He A AAA A 3 8 3 3 4 E5CC E5EC Setting Levels 0 0 ccc ee eee 3 9 3 4 Procedures after Turning ON the Power Supply 3 13 3 4 1 Basic Flow of Operations 0 0c cc eens 3 13 44 2 Basie Procedure ads sa Bn a as 3 13 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 3 1 3 Part Names and Basic Procedures 3 1 Basic Application Flow The following figure shows the basic flow for using the Digital Controller Set the input type and other basic settings e Input type e Control method e Alarm type Other mel n Refer to 3 4 Procedures after Turning ON the Power Supply Set the alarm set values ON OFF Control PID Control Set the control hysteresis Set the control periods and PID constants For time proportional operation Operate with the set values 3 2 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 3 Part Names and Basic Procedures 3 2 Power ON Operation will start as soon as you turn ON the power supply to the ESCC E5EC The following default settings will be used when operation starts Input type 5 K thermocouple Ifthe Controller is equipped with HB HS alarm detection it is set by ON OFF control default to detect heater alarms Alarm Upper limit alarm Set point 0 C p N V O O o Z After the power comes ON all indicators and displays will light for approximately 1
283. ludes when the PV SP is selected for the Monitor Setting Item parameter a Setting range Default FF No SV status display AEE Seng MANU MANU is alternately displayed during manual control StaP STOP is alternately displayed while operation is stopped ALM I ALM1 is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status ALME ALN2 is alternately displayed during Alarm 2 status ALMA ALM3 is alternately displayed during Alarm 3 status AL MY ALM4 is alternately displayed during Alarm 4 status ALM ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1 2 3 or 4 is set to ON HH HA is alternately displayed when an HB alarm or HS alarm is ON e Related Parameters See Process Value Set Point Operation Level Page 6 8 PV MV Manual MV Manual Control Level Page 6 37 d E F Display Refresh Period e This parameter delays the display refresh period for monitor values Only display refreshing is delayed and the refresh period for process values used in control is not Function changed e This function is disabled by setting the parameter to OFF Setting range Unit Default OFF 0 25 0 5 1 0 0 25 Setting L May Move to Calibration Level Initial setting communications protect must be 0 This parameter sets the password to move to the Calibration Level e Set the password to move to the Calibration Level The password is 1201 e Move to the Calibration Level either by pressing the 9 Key or Key or by waiting for two Function seconds t
284. ly L OL p E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 33 4 10 2 Alarm Values e Alarm values are indicated by X in the table on the previous page When the Alarm Lower upper and lower limits are set independently H is displayed for upper limit Limit Value values and L is displayed for lower limit values e To set the alarm value upper and lower limits for deviation set the upper and lower limits in each of the Alarm 1 to 4 Upper Limit and Alarm 1 to 4 Lower Limit parameters in the Operation Level Alarm Upper Limit Value Alarm Value This procedure sets alarm 1 as an upper limit alarm The alarm is output when the process value PV exceeds the set point SP by 10 C In this example the temperature unit is C Alarm 1 type 2 Upper limit alarm Alarm value 1 10 Operating Procedure eSelecting the Alarm 1 Type Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to a Setting Level display i Alarm 1 Type Alarm 1 Type The default is 2 upper limit alarm 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the set value to 2 e Setting the Alarm Value Operation Level Press the Key several times in the Operation Level to display Ai Alarm Value 1 Alarm Value 1 4 34 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the set value to 10 The default is 10 f the Contr
285. m is output on auxiliary output 1 You can use the output assignment parameters to change the output You can use an integrated alarm to output an OR of alarms 1 to 4 and the other alarms For details on the integrated alarm refer to 5 9 OH Output of Alarms wely GH L ct p e Parameters Parameter No 1 display No 2 display Level HB ON OFF OFF or ON default ON FF aN Advanced Function LR Heater Burnout OFF or ON default OFF Setting Level Heater Burnout 0 1 to 50 0 A default 0 1 A 0 1 to 50 0 Hysteresis ubl Heater Burnout 0 0 to 50 0 A default 0 0 A 0 0 to 50 0 Adjustment Level Detection 1 or 2 alarm current 2 Value Monitor HB HB alarm or HA Heater Hh or HH Advanced Function Auxiliary Output 1 to 4 Assignment alarm Setting Level E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 39 4 Basic Operation e A heater burnout is detected by measuring the heater current while the control output for heating is ON Heater burnout detection and heater short detection cannot be used with the control output for cooling Ton i Toff 1r gt l l l ON Control output heating OFF In the above diagram power is considered to be ON normal if the heater current is greater than Hh i or Hic heater burnout detection current during the Ton interval The HB alarm will be OFF in this case If the heater current is less than Hh or Har heater burnout detection current duri
286. mA Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the 4 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered 7 When the Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete Press the 4 Key The No 2 display changes to 4E5 Release the key and wait two seconds or press the Key This stores the temporarily registered calibration data to non volatile memory To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to non volatile memory press the 9 Key while Na is displayed in the No 2 display without pressing the 4 Key 8 The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF For Controllers that have a transfer output you can continue by calibrating the transfer output For detailed setting methods refer to 7 6 Calibrating the Transfer Output E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 7 9 7 User Calibration e Calibrating a Voltage Input In this example calibration is shown for a Controller with an analog input with a voltage input set as the input type Connect the power supply Connect an STV and DMM to the voltage input terminals as shown in the following diagram E5CC E5EC 3 Turn the power ON e Input type 27 or 28
287. maged or may malfunction e Do not exceed the communications distance that is given in the specifications Use the specified communications cable e Do not turn the power supply to the Digital Controller ON or OFF while the USB Serial Conversion Cable is connected The Digital Controller may malfunction E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 9 Installation Precautions Installation Precautions 10 O Service Life Use the Digital Controller within the following temperature and humidity ranges Temperature 10 to 55 C with no icing or condensation Humidity 25 to 85 If the Digital Controller is installed inside a control board the ambient temperature must be kept to under 55 C including the temperature around the Controller The service life of electronic devices like Digital Controllers is determined not only by the number of times the relay is switched but also by the service life of internal electronic components Component service life is affected by the ambient temperature the higher the temperature the shorter the service life and the lower the temperature the longer the service life Therefore the service life can be extended by lowering the temperature of the Digital Controller When two or more Digital Controllers are mounted horizontally close to each other or vertically next to one another the internal temperature will increase due to heat radiated by the Digital Controllers and the ser
288. meter refer to Control by Inverting Direct Reverse Operation on page 5 13 e f heating cooling control is selected also set the Dead Band Proportional Band Cooling Integral Time Cooling Derivative Time Cooling and Heating Cooling Tuning Method parameters e Dead Band e For heating cooling control the dead band is set with the set point as its center The dead band width is the set value of the Dead Band parameter Adjustment Level Setting a negative value produces an overlapping band e f an overlapping band is set the bumpless function may not operate when switching between manual operation and automatic operation e The default is 0 0 EU for Controllers with Temperature Inputs and 0 00 FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs Dead band Dead band Overlapping dead band Dead band Output width A positive value Output width A negative value Cooling Heating Cooling side side Xx side PV 0 A Set Beni Set point Heating side PV E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations e Heating Cooling PID Control If heating cooling PID control is used you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling The PID constants for both heating and cooling can be automatically set according to the cooling control characteristics by setting the Heating Cooling Tuning Method parameter and then performing autotuning AT Parameter Setting range Default Level
289. meter in the Adjustment Level Heater Burnout Detection 1 2 5 Operating Procedure e Checking the HB ON OFF Parameter Setting Advanced Function Setting Level LII Hh 1 HB ON OFF 1 Press the Key several times in the Advanced Function Setting Level to display Hb HB ON OFF Li 2 Check to see if the set value is o enabled The default is a enabled E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 h JN jm e 4 Basic Operation e Checking the Heater Current Press the Key several times in the Adjustment Level to AOUS UNENE EEUE display LE Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Heater Current 1 Value Monitor 2 Check the heater current from the CT input that is used to detect heater burnout The monitoring range is 0 0 to 55 0 A e Setting Heater Burnout Detection Press the Key several times in the Adjustment Level to es Nt ERNE display Hi Heater Burnout Detection 1 Heater Burnout Detection 1 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the set value to 2 5 Refer to 4 12 4 Calculating Detection Current Values when you set the value I zi N c o 3 aq T O fo e o UJ c gt O c p E UJ fo gt Q L O fo o o gt O L o gt gt fo 3 o 4 12 2 HS Alarm e What Is an HS Alarm A heater short alarm operates by detecting the heater current with a current transformer CT for time proportional PID control or ON
290. mpoWay F or Modbus RTU 005 006 Event inputs 1 and 2 and Transfer output transfer output Current 4to 20 mA DC Voltage 1 to 5 VDC 007 Event inputs 1 and 2 and Remote SP input remote SP input Current 4 to 20 or 0 to 20 mA DC Voltage 1 to 5 O to 5 or O to 10 VDC These cannot be selected if 5 screw terminals with cover is selected for the terminal type e Terminal Details Do not connect anything to the terminals that are shaded gray 001 003 13 B Communications ps Tm En 9 Event inputs Lor 2 485 Communications RS 485 AC EV2 15 8 8 cT a 17 CT COM 47 CT2 008 00 006 Communications RS 485 O ts Event inputs L EV1 Event inputs EV4 007 Event inputs gt EV1 EV2 Remote SP Input 2 10 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 Preparations 2 2 2 E5EC Terminal Block Wiring Example e Terminal Arrangement The terminals block of the E5EC is divided into five types of terminals control outputs 1 and 2 sensor input auxiliary outputs input power supply and options Not used alos errr rrr A A en see Input Power Supply Options OS SOS OS 09 z z z Control outputs 1 and 2 Auxiliary Outputs errr reer rrr Sensor input LA Precautions for Correct Use e When you purchase the Digital Controller it will be set for a K thermocouple input type 5 If a different sensor is used an input erro
291. n models with a QQ output type specification 2 voltage outputs for driving SSRs E5EC RX relay output an piod sa ter CX current output d d QR voltage output for driving SSR and relay CC 2 current outputs output QQ 2 voltage outputs for RR 2 relay outputs driving SSRs Jona E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 17 2 Preparations Output type Specification RX Relay output SPST NO 250 VAC 5 A resistive load Electrical durability 100 000 operations QX Voltage output for driving PNP 12 VDC 20 40 mA with short circuit protection SSR CX Current output 4 to 20 or 0 to 20 mA DC Load 500 Q max Resolution RR 2 relay outputs SPST NO 250 VAC 5 A resistive load Electrical durability 100 000 operations QQ 2 voltage outputs for driving PNP 12 VDC 20 21 mA with short circuit protection SSRs QR Voltage output for driving PNP 12 VDC 20 21 mA with short circuit protection SSRs control output 1 Relay output control output SPST NO 250 VAC 5 A resistive load Electrical 2 durability 100 000 operations CC 2 current outputs 4 to 20 or 0 to 20 mA DC Load 500 2 max Resolution Approx 10 000 Control outputs 1 and 2 are not isolated on models with a QQ output type specification 2 voltage outputs for driving SSRs e Auxiliary Outputs 1 to 4 When heating cooling control is used on the E5CC auxiliary output 2 is the contr
292. nable parameter is set to ON the setting range will be the MV lower limit to the MV upper limit 2 The setting ranges are different for relay and voltage outputs for driving SSR and for current outputs EG This parameter can be set when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled 4 WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used A 6 7 Protect Level n Lt ni a 1 a Za Lim a C M M a 1 ul r J J uu r m r E ud M o 1 M LU None n UN MCI tu Li Fr UN m Mw 1 1 Pra n nm RN LUN r E M J r Parameters Setting monitor value Display Default Unit Move to Protect level 1999 to 9999 JO None Operatow Adusiment Protect at ones o oe Initial Setting Communications ESS EMEN 1 None Protect Setting Change Protect wept OFRON O O GN ore None PF Key Protect Pe OFRON fran OFF None Changed Parameters Only 3 None Parameter Mask Enable None Password to Move to Protect Level LAME O CIN None A 6 8 Communications Setting Level Parameters Setting monitor value Display Default Unit Protocol Setting E CWF CompoWay F CHF Mad mene None MOD Modbus Communications Unit No U N E E None Communications Baud Rate lli s 9 6 19 2 38 4 or 57 6 kbps Communications P
293. nced Function Setting Level Page 6 68 HS Alarm Latch Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 69 HS Alarm Hysteresis Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 69 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 23 T I gt amp c m 3 D 5 F r O lt o 6 Parameters HB and HS alarms must be supported two CTs Coo E The HS Alarm Use parameter must be set to ON r r i jum Leakage Current 2 Monitor This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting SSR short circuits This parameter measures and displays the heater current when the heater is OFF e The HS alarm is not detected if the OFF time for the control output for heating is 100 ms Function or less 35 ms or less if the control period is 0 1 or 0 2 s L Monitor range Unit 0 0 to 55 0 A Monitor e FFFF is displayed when 55 0 A is exceeded e f an alarm is output for the HS Alarm 2 parameter the No 1 display will flash the Leakage Current 2 Monitor parameter o Related Parameters see HS Alarm 1 Adjustment Level Page 6 23 HS Alarm 2 Adjustment Level Page 6 24 HS Alarm Use Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 68 Error Displays L L 2 Page A 12 HB and HS alarms must be supported two CTs Hr J PE HS Alarm 2 The HS Alarm Use parameter must be set to ON This parameter sets the current for the HS alarm to be output e An HS alarm is output when the leakage current value
294. nction MV change rate limit until the calculated value is reached If the limit is set to 0 0 this function will be disabled e The MV Change Rate Limit parameter will not operate in the following situations e n manual mode e During ST execution Cannot be set when ST is ON e During AT execution e During ON OFF control e While stopped MV output during STOP e During MV output when error occurs o n Setting range Unit Default a 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 2 Setting o j e Related Parameters 3 E See Proportional Band Adjustment Level Page 6 27 lt The input type must be an analog input and the GH RP a a oor rew cut Extraction of Square Root Enable parameter must FOLDI be set to ON e This parameter sets the extraction of square root low cut point used for the inputs The data after extracting the square root is shown below Function The low cut point is used for extracting the square root for flowrate sensors Operation result p eese eese Rr en onere oe 10096 FS Extraction of square J root low cut point 100 FS Argument 1 input data Setting range Unit Default 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 Setting e Related Parameters See Extraction of Square Root Enable Initial Setting Level Page 6 53 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 33 6 Parameters Mf OZN D h Work Bt x Berney The work bit operation type must not be set to OFF e ON Delay M When the results of a
295. ndices 25 Monitor Setting PE Monitor Setting PE Monitor Setting PE Monitor Setting er gt Monitor Setting g Item Display1 Item Display 2 Item Display 3 Item Display 4 Item Display 5 Note The monitor setting items to be displayed is set in the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters advanced function setting level Press the Key for at least 1 s ALE L NL E Parameter Initialization FE E Automatic Display SP Tracking e GEF arr Return Time SEE RLH2 mo PIS BREL Display Brightness NL Limit Enable 2 2 aFF Points ALE Pr RP catatabon Fert i ALHa RESE ganaseavece I ROLE CEM Hotels hi Minimum Output 18 ON OFF Band a r rr nu E PE PF Setting r ru E o A IL Control Output 1 Signal PRL E Move to Protect Level gn Time y 4 20 3 D ic 1 D L i m r Cold Junction 3 ne E Control Output 2 Signal L LIL Compensation D 4 20 amp N Method o I D E RS E Transfer Output Signal T 4 20 2
296. nel thickness is 1 to 5 mm for the E5CC e Controllers must not be closely mounted vertically Observe the recommended mounting space limits e When group mounting several Controllers ensure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the ambient operating temperature listed in the specifications NO LN o M D 2 o O S O c gt 3 3 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 3 2 Preparations e E5EC Individual Mounting Group Mounting 45 48 x number of Units 2 5 x i 0M 120 min 927 I 9 ica e Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers e The recommended panel thickness is 1 to 8 mm for the E5EC e Controllers must not be closely mounted vertically Observe the recommended mounting space limits e When group mounting several Controllers ensure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the ambient operating temperature listed in the specifications For EBEC models with two control outputs QQ QR RR or CC and 011 012 013 or 014 options shown below the ambient temperature for group mounting must be 45 C max EBEC LI JLILILI M LILIE um QR Em 012 RR CC 013 014 To mount these models at an ambient temperature of 55 C install them at the following intervals 60 mm min 45 120 mm min ar E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Man
297. ng Level Operation at Startup If the SP ramp function is enabled when the Controller is turned ON or when switching from STOP to RUN mode the process value reaches the set point using the SP ramp function in the same way as when the set point is changed In this case operation is carried out with the process value treated as the set point before the change was made The direction of the SP ramp changes according to the relationship between the process value and the set point E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 17 5 Advanced Operations Time Time Power ON Power ON e Restrictions during SP Ramp Operation e Execution of auto tuning starts after the end of the SP ramp e When control is stopped or an error occurs the SP ramp function is disabled e Alarms during SP Ramp Operation The operation of alarms during SP ramp operation depends on whether alarms are set to be based on the ramp set point or the target set point refer to the following diagrams The set point to be used is set in the Alarm SP Selection parameter Alarm SP Selection Ramp SP Alarm Type 1 Upper Lower Limits Temperature t Alarm output ON Time Alarm SP Selection Target SP Alarm Type 1 Upper Lower Limits Temperature Alarm output ON Alarm output ON Time 5 18 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations 5 7 Using the Key Protect Level 5 7
298. ng range Default N a Close in alarm Open in alarm N n e Related Parameters See Auxiliary Output 1 to 4 Assignment Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 73 Hh Li HB ON OFF HB and HS alarms must be supported e Set to use the heater burnout alarm Function a Setting range Default aN Enabled aF F Disabled oN Setting 6 58 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters HB and HS alarms must be supported l HhL Heater Burnout Latch The HB ON OFF parameter must be set to ON e When this parameter is set to ON the heater burnout alarm is held until either of the Ce following conditions is satisfied Function a Heater burnout detection is set to 0 0 A b The power is cycled c The latch is cancelled by the PF Key PF Setting LAT Alarm Latch Cancel d The latch is cancelled by an event input Event Input Assignment 1 to Event Input Assignment 6 LAT Alarm Latch Cancel e Output is turned OFF when switching to the Initial Setting Level Default SEE ors Setting range aN Enabled aF F Disabled Setting e Related Parameters See Heater Burnout Detection 1 Adjustment Level Page 6 21 Heater Burnout Detection 2 Adjustment Level Page 6 22 Event Input Assignment 1 to 6 Initial Setting Level Page 6 51 HB ON OFF Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 58 PF Setting Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 79 The HB ON OFF parameter must be set to ON The
299. ng the Ton interval the HB alarm will turn ON Heater burnout is not detected if the ON time Ton for the control output for heating is 100 ms or less 30 ms or less if the control period is 0 1 or 0 2 s Heater burnouts are not detected in the following cases e Turn ON the heater power supply simultaneously or before turning ON the E5CC E5EC power supply If the heater power supply is turned ON after turning ON the E5CC E5EC power supply the HB alarm will be output e Control will be continued even when there is an HB alarm e The rated current may sometimes differ slightly from the actual current flowing to the heater Use the Heater Current 1 Value Monitor and Heater Current 2 Value Monitor parameters to check the current during actual operation e f there is little difference between the current in normal and abnormal states detection may be unstable To stabilize detection set a current difference of at least 1 0 A for heaters lower than 10 0 A and at least 2 5 A for heaters of 10 0 A or higher If the heater current is too low loop the load line several times through a CT as shown in the following diagram Looping it through once will double the detected current Load line Set value of Heater Burnout Detection 1 or 2 p Normal current x Number of loops Current during burnout 2 or Operating Procedure Set the HB ON OFF parameter in the Advanced Function Setting Level and set the Heater Burnout Detection 1 para
300. nitor Setting Item The default is 5HFE digit shift B m LIT Fr E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 49 5 Advanced Operations e Setting the Monitor Setting Items Advanced Function Setting 1 Press the Key several times in the Advanced Function Set Levis ting Level to display PF d I Monitor Setting Item 1 Monitor Setting Item 1 2 Press the A or Key to select 7 Alarm Value 1 The default is 1 PV SP Multi SP No 3 Return to the Operation Level and press the Key to display Monitor Setting Item Level HL Alarm Value 1 Monitor Setting Item Display 1 5 50 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations 5 19 Displaying PV SV Status 5 19 1 PV and SV Status Display Functions e PV Status Display Function Advanced Function Setting Level The PV on the No 1 display in the PV PV SP PV Manual MV or PV SP Manual MV Display and the control or alarm status specified for the PV status display function are alternately displayed in 0 5 s cycles e PV e PV SP e PV Manual MV e PV SP Manual MV This includes when the PV SP is selected for the Monitor Setting Item parameter Set value Display Function OFF GFF No PV status display gl zi Ke g o fo 3 U o lt o p fo c o Manual MANL MANU is alternately displayed during manual control Stop SkaP STOP is alternately displayed whi
301. niversal input MEA inputs SP Input HS alarm output MA TA EAT ARA AA oe E e SD CR 3 002 RS 485 RS 485 2 for 3 phase bala Badii nd al ee EE OR 06 2 J cE ooo Provided 07 2 4 Prwied d 1 Options with HB and HS alarms 001 and 003 cannot be selected if a current output is selected for the control output The control output cannot be used as a transfer output 2 If no auxiliary outputs none is selected 000 none must be selected for the options 3 These cannot be selected if 5 screw terminals with cover is selected for the terminal type 1 6 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 1 Introduction o E5EC E5 Eje IL ILJLILI L 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M o MA OO o Meaning 9 Pet exem L LL Pp Controfoutputt Controlouiput2 MALES A Rewopt 0 Nome afa Voltage output for driving SSR Nome O w e x j _Linearcumrentoutput noe O 1 ajaj Voltage output for driving SSR Voltage output for driving SSR 1 QJR Voltage output for driving SSR Relay output d RIR Relay output Relay output 2 jejej Linear current output Linear current output Terminal type Input type N Lo c 19 q o mer Q jud gt O 5 z O O No of auxiliary outputs Power supply voltage 100 to 240
302. nnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnannns 4 12 4 Calculating Detection Current Values ccccceeccecceeeeeeceeeeeeeceeseeeceaeeeeeesaaeeeeeseueeeeeaaneeessaaees 4 12 5 Application Examples sica id E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 21 Section 5 4 13 22 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 17 5 18 5 19 5 20 5 21 Customizing the PV SP Display asssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 4 49 4 13 1 PV SP Display Selections ccccooconnccccocccnnoconnnonconnononononnnnnnnnnncnncnnnnnnnnnonnnrnnnonannnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnes 4 49 Advanced Operations Shifting vm rl 5 3 Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits for Analog Inputs 5 5 Executing Heating Cooling Control sicisceiescsacvicesscecsviecstaiavece ac eeasstcecsdanvesesnwcisesetievencsidencnuaseees 5 7 5 3 1 Heating Cooling Controla 5 7 USING Event INPUTS sintio 5 11 5 4 1 EVENTINPULSCUINOS ais 5 11 5 4 2 How to Use the Multi SP Function cccccesecceccseeeeececeeeeeeeeceaeeeecsuaeseeeseaaeeeeeesaaeeesenneeetessaees 5 11 5 4 3 Operation Commands Other than Multi SP ccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesanseeesans 5 12 Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values cccsseeceesseccenseeeeneeeseeneesenseesenseeseees 5 15 5 5 1 SUF OM
303. nputs j inputs e9 output mu cr en CT Transfer output _ Remote 84 SP input 7 me a P 012 014 Communications RS 485 Event inputs l Communications RS 485 AC EV3 EVA Event Event E Event Event L_ 9 Event inputs inputs Inputs inputs L D inputs EV6 NN i cr 2m Transfer t 63 20 Transfer Transfer output 83 output output 63 G Remote V 65 Remote Remote Y SP input m SP input SP input RA d 88 86 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 15 2 Preparations 2 2 3 Precautions when Wiring e Separate input leads and power lines in order to prevent external noise e Use a shielded AWG24 to AWG18 cross sectional area of 0 205 to 0 823 mm twisted pair cable The stripping length is 6 to 8 mm e Use crimp terminals when wiring the terminals e Use the suitable wiring material and crimp tools for crimp terminals e Tighten the terminal screws to a torque of 0 43 to 0 58 N m e Use the following types of crimp terminals for M3 0 screws F 5 8 mm max y L JO max 2 2 4 Wiring In the connection diagrams the left side of the terminal numbers represents the inside of the Controller and the right side represents the outside o Power Supply Power Consumption E5CC E5EC Input Power S i E i s pu S Upp y Options No 000 net e Options No 000 es aoe 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 5 2 VA max 6 5 VA max 6 6 VA max 8 3 VA max 24 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 1 VA max
304. nstallation location and Bolarie 2 8 2 12 possible adapt is being used During Overshooting ON OFF control is Select PID control and execute either ST self tuning o 4 23 operation Undershooting enabled default ON OFF AT auto tuning Refer to the ES5SCC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers Communications Manual Cat No H175 for details Hunting Temperature is not rising control selected Control period is longer compared with the speed of rise and fall in temperature Unsuitable PID constant HS alarm operation fault Specified operation is unsuitable for required control default Reverse operation Heater is burnt out or deteriorated Peripheral devices have heat prevention device operating When using self tuning turn ON the power supply to the Digital Controller and load heater etc at the same time or turn ON the load power supply first Accurate self tuning and optimum control will not be possible if the power supply to the load is turned ON after turning ON the power supply to the Digital Controller Shorten the control period A shorter control period improves control performance but a cycle of 20 ms minimum is recommended in consideration of the service life of the relays Set appropriate PID constants using either of the following methods e Execute AT autotuning e Set PID constants individually using manual settings Use breeder resistance if the problem is due to leak
305. nt Level Page 6 30 Wait Band Adjustment Level Page 6 30 Program Pattern Initial Setting Level Page 6 43 Soak Time Unit Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 74 Operation 6 12 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters The Program Pattern parameter must not be set to CLD i TINE Soak Time Remain OFF e This parameter measures and displays the remaining time of the soak time for the simple program function Function b Monitor range Unit O to 9999 min or h Monitor e Related Parameters See Program Start Operation Level Page 6 12 Soak Time Adjustment Level Page 6 30 Wait Band Adjustment Level Page 6 30 Program Pattern Initial Setting Level Page 6 43 Soak Time Unit Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 74 D_E The Event Input Assignment 1 to 6 parameters e MANSO must not be set to RUN STOP p e O o D D ct O 5 r O lt o This parameter starts and stops the control operation When FLIN RUN is selected control is started When 5taP STOP is selected control is stopped The STOP indicator will light when control is stopped Operation The default is FHN This parameter will not be displayed if an event input is set to RUN STOP See E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 13 6 Parameters AL l Alarm Value 1 j I Alarm Value 2 LL Alarm 1 to alarm 4 must be assigned The Alarm 1 to 4 Type pa
306. o two wires of the same size and type or two crimped terminals can be inserted into a single terminal e Do not wire the terminals that are not used e To avoid inductive noise keep the wiring for the Digital Controller s terminal block away from power cables that carry high voltages or large currents Also do not wire power lines together with or parallel to Digital Controller wiring Using shielded cables and using separate conduits or ducts is recommended Attach a surge suppressor or noise filter to peripheral devices that generate noise in particular motors transformers solenoids magnetic coils or other equipment that have an inductance component When a noise filter is used at the power supply first check the voltage or current and attach the noise filter as close as possible to the Digital Controller Allow as much space as possible between the Digital Controller and devices that generate powerful high frequencies high frequency welders high frequency sewing machines etc or surge e Use this product within the rated load and power supply e Make sure that the rated voltage is attained within 2 seconds of turning ON the power using a switch or relay contact If the voltage is applied gradually the power may not be reset or output malfunctions may occur e Make sure that the Digital Controller has 30 minutes or more to warm up after turning ON the power before starting actual control operations to ensure the correct temperature
307. o elapse e Related Parameter See Initial Setting Communications Protect Protect Level Page 6 4 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 83 P oo gt EY 2 o D o Tl c 5 o et O 5 o D 5 e D lt o 6 Parameters 6 9 Communications Setting Level em P BE L Protocol Setting Communications must be supported H N n Communications Unit No bP 5 Communications Baud Rate L E N Communications Data Length CompoWay F must be selected as the protocol She E Communications Stop Bits CompoWay F must be selected as the protocol PRE y Communications Parity 5d WE Send Data Wait Time e Each parameter is enabled when the power is reset e Match the communications specifications of the E5CC E5EC and the host computer If Function multiple devices are connected ensure that the communications specifications for all devices in the system except the Communications unit number are the same A em Display Set values Settings Defaui Protocol setting P5EL LWF Mad CompoWay F Modbus UWF oom Communications 0 to 99 0 to 99 Communications 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 kbps 35 baud rate Kbps Communications 7 or 8 bits 7 or 8 bits n data length Stop bits Sh torebits torbe Communications NaNE EVEN add None Even Odd EVEN parity Send data wait 5 dWt O to 99 O to 99 ms cu time e Related Parameter See Communications Writing Adjustment Level
308. ock Foreign particles Install the product in a location that is not subject to liquid or foreign particles entering the product E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 13 Revision History Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No H1 4 E1 01 tf Revision code Revision code Dae Revised content 01 December 2011 Original production 14 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Conventions Used in This Manual Conventions Used in This Manual Model Notation The E5CC and EBEC are given as the E5CC and E5EC when all of the models share function ality The following notation is used when specifying differences in functionality Remote SP HB alarm and HS Event inputs Communications E5CC E5EC E5CC 1 001 E5CC j 002 E5CC 1 003 E5CC ESEC 1 004 2 E5CC E5EC E5CC 1 006 E5CC 007 E5EC L1 008 E5EC 1 009 ES5EC L 010 ES5EC 1 011 ES5EC 1 012 E5EC 1 013 E5EC i 014 Meanings of Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used in parameter names figures and other descriptions These abbreviations mean the following Symbol PV SP SV AT ST EU LBA HB HS RSP LSP Term Process value Set point Set value Auto tuning Self tuning Engineering unit Loop burnout alarm Heater burnout Hea
309. ol output for cooling When heating cooling control is used on the E5EC auxiliary output 4 is the control output for cooling unless the Controller has only two auxiliary outputs in which case auxiliary output 2 is the control output for cooling o Event Inputs E5CC E5EC models with an option number of 001 or 004 to 014 have event inputs E5CC Contact inputs Non contact inputs Option number 001 006 or 007 43 es es ir d 5 Eve d J EV2 Option number 004 16 6 lt EV3 4 9EV3 47 s 8 EV4 EV4 E Option number 005 E Y i EV1 d24 Jen 44 e I EV2 EV2 46 17 EV3 ve EV3 ge M EV4 6H 2 18 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 Preparations E5EC Contact inputs Non contact inputs Option number 004 008 or 009 D Y i EV1 EV1 pa EV2 3 s EV2 Ws Option number 005 or 010 13 T EU EV3 e Eva EV4 16 7 EV1 EV1 48 EV2 EV2 Option number 011 or 013 7 EV1 3 os Je EV3 ge Eva s eva 16 17 28 9 9 des 47 qe EV5 e EV6 84 Ev2 un EVE P Eus ES SAS Option number 012 or 014 6 8 Mer 47 48 lt EV2 ep D 29 Mes 69 g EV5 60 EV6 e Use event inputs under the following conditions e The outflow current is approximately 7 mA Contact input ON 1 kQ max OFF 100 kQ min No contact input ON Residual voltage of 1 5 V max OFF Leakage current of 0 1 mA max e CT Inputs E5CC E5EC models with an
310. oling Standard Heating cooling Control Output 1 Control output Control output Control output Control output Assignment heating heating heating heating Control Output 2 Notassianed Control output Assignment cooing Assignment E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 7 p C2 m x D Q c gt I D Dd ct gt e O O o 5 O O gt mp o o1juoy Burooo 6uneeH 1 e S 5 Advanced Operations Without control output 2 With control output 2 Parameter name Display Standard Heating cooling Standard Heating cooling Assignment Assignment Assignment cooing f the Controller is equipped with HB HS alarm detection it is set by default to HA Heater Alarm If the Program Pattern parameter is changed to a setting other than OFF Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter is set as the program end output e The heating cooling operation of the control outputs will switch when the Direct Reverse Operation parameter is set to direct operation e When DRS Invert Direct Reverse Operation is set for an Event Input Assignment 1 to 6 parameter control will start with the opposite of the setting of the Direct Reverse Operation parameter when the event input turns ON When the event input turns OFF control will return to operation according to the setting of the Direct Reverse Operation parameter For details on event inputs and control combined with the Direct Reverse Operation para
311. oller is equipped with HB HS alarm detection the Alarm 1 Type is not displayed for the default settings To use alarm 1 set an output assignment to alarm 1 For details refer to 4 6 3 Assigned Output Functions e PV Change Rate Alarm The change width can be found for PV input values in any set period Differences with previous values in each set period are calculated and an alarm is output if the result exceeds the alarm value The PV rate of change calculation period can be set in units of 50 ms If a positive value is set for the alarm value the PV will operate as a change rate alarm in the rising direction If a negative value is set the PV will operate as a change rate alarm in the falling direction gt mb o gt 3 O c e xe c o LA Precautions for Correct Use If a shorter PV rate of change calculation period is set outputs set for the PV change rate alarm function may repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time It is therefore recommended that the PV change rate alarm be used with the alarm latch turned ON PV Sen EA UJelv c OL v Alarm value l 0 pv change width for PV rate of change calculation period ON i ON OFF OFF Alarm function Parameter name Setting range Unit Default PV Rate of Change 1 to 999 Sampling cycle 20 1 s Calculation Period e SP Alarms You can set an upper limit or lower limit alarm for the set point SP The alarm point is set in the
312. on Cable ae SSE Ss SS USB Serial Conversion Cable a LIO _ Top panel Setup Tool port AAAAAA MAAAAA Front panel Setup Tool port This Cable is required only to connect to the front panel Setup Tool port e Connection Procedure e Top panel Port 1 Connect the serial connector to the Setup Tool port on the top panel of the Digital Controller E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 Preparations e Front panel Port E58 CIFQ2 E58 CIFQ2 E 1 Connect the E58 CIFQ2 USB Serial Conversion Cable Conversion Cable USB Serial Conversion Cable pe A to the E58 CIFQ2 E O ED c MEA Conversion Cable CA There is a triangle n2 I c o 5 Q mp gt O o 2 on the connecting surface o o U O Align the arrow on the small connector on the E58 CIFQ2 USB Serial Conversion Cable with the triangle mark A on the small connector on the E58 CIFQ2 E Conversion Cable 2 Remove the Port Cover from the front panel Setup Tool port and then plug in the Conversion Cable AAAAA MAAAAA VA MN EE SS d X ANY z DY Y ER Em poule N uonoeuuo v e AAAAAMAAAAA y i lt lt AD x B Y A ES y E EcL E if M E ES Port Cover Conversion Cable l Precautions for Correct Use e Hold the conne
313. onds be set for a relay output and 2 seconds for an SSR voltage output Mu CQ Check the Hl E IH Alarm 1 Type g alarm type B Press the C Key for at least 1 s ee Control starts Operation Level Use the 4 and p PV SP 150 Keys to set the SP 160 to 150 C Press the Key for less than 1 s Adjustment Level When PID control is selected Adjustment Level Execute AT AL To execute 100 AT aFF LAT 7 To execute 40 AT The TUNE indicator will To cancel AT EF light during autotuning Press the Key for less than 1 s Operation Level 2c Confirm that the E zh PV SP set point is 150 C iat Confirm that w Gf Running RUN control is running REN Stopped Ska Operation Level Use the 4 and Hl IN Alarm 3n Keys to set the alarm 301 Value 1 value to 30 C Set alarm value Start operation Start operation If the Controller is equipped with HB HS alarm detection the Alarm 1 Type is not displayed for the default settings To use alarm 1 set an output assignment to alarm 1 For details refer to 4 6 3 Assigned Output Functions E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 9 gt N 5 o D 5 m x D 3 gt D 0 4 Basic Operation 4 3 Setting the Input Type The Controller supports four input types resistance thermometer thermocouple infrared temperature sensor and analog inputs Set the input type that matches the s
314. one operation 0 Alarm function OFF 2 None 1 Upper and lower limit alarm 2 Upper limit alarm 3 Lower limit alarm 4 Upper and lower limit range alarm 5 Upper and lower limit alarm with standby sequence 6 Upper limit alarm with standby sequence 7 Lower limit alarm with standby sequence 8 Absolute value upper limit alarm 9 Absolute value lower limit alarm 10 Absolute value upper limit alarm with standby sequence 11 Absolute value lower limit alarm with standby sequence 12 LBA Loop Burnout Alarm 13 PV change rate alarm 14 SP absolute value upper limit alarm 15 SP absolute value lower limit alarm 16 MV absolute value upper limit alarm 17 MV absolute value lower limit alarm 18 RSP absolute value upper limit alarm 19 RSP absolute value lower limit alarm Temperature input 0 1 to 999 9 for all alarms except 0 2 C or F for MV absolute value upper limit or MV lower limit alarms Analog input 0 01 to 99 99 for all alarms except for 0 02 FS MV absolute value upper limit or MV lower limit alarms 0 01 to 99 99 for MV absolute value upper limit or 0 50 MV lower limit alarms Same as Alarm 1 Type except that 12 LBA cannot Ff None Seconds be set i o U AY e 3 D mp D O o O 9 et O 5 E 0 mp 0 9n97 Bumes enu e 9 Y A Appendices Parameters Alarm 2 Hysteresis Alarm 3 Type Alarm 3 Hysteresis Alarm 4 Type Alarm 4 Hysteresis Control O
315. ooling e Related Parameter See Transfer Output Upper Limit Initial Setting Level Page 6 50 Transfer Output Lower Limit Initial Setting Level Page 6 50 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 49 P N 5 m o D 5 ae D lt o 6 Parameters E R H Transfer Output Upper Limit There must be a transfer output The transfer output type must not be set to OFF E W L Transfer Output Lower Limit e This parameter sets the upper and lower limit values of transfer outputs Function a Transfer BDefadt X O n Setting range Transfer output Transferoutput Unit Settin output type HE n J lower limit upper limit Set point SP lower limit to SP upper limit SP lower limit SP upper limit EU Set point SP lower limit to SP upper limit during SP ramp PV Temperature Input setting range Input setting Input setting input lower limit to input range lower limit range upper setting range upper limit limit Analog input Analog scaling Scaling lower Scaling upper lower limit to analog limit limit scaling upper limit VV 1000 Z heating Heating 0 0 to 105 0 FN RN MV 0 0 to 105 0 coo 1 1 When the SP is selected the remote SP will be output while the Remote SP Mode is set in the SP Mode parameter 2 This value can be set for standard control but the value will be disabled e Related Parameter 535 Transfer Output Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 49 E5CC E5
316. ooooooo o 5 46 5 17 11 MV Change Rate Limit 3x a it Ss oe A AAA E 5 46 5 18 Setting the PF Key uxo EE tet Ea REOS SER RES EN 5 48 5 18 1 PF Setting Function Key lllleleee es 5 48 5 19 Displaying PV SV Status l eere 5 51 5 19 1 PV and SV Status Display Functions 0 0 00 cece eee eee 5 51 5 20 Communications with a Host Device e g a PLC 5 53 5 21 USING d Remote SP oi cod EGRE EY AA IS E 5 55 5 22 Logic Operations i0 See ee eee x yx e Rx a 5 57 5 22 1 The Logic Operation Function CX Thermo 000 eee eee eee 5 57 5 22 2 Using Logic Operalions nse do oe died A de 5 57 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations 5 1 Shifting Input Values e Shifting Inputs You can set the Process Value Slope Coefficient and Process Value Input Shift parameters to compensate the PV Parameter Setting range Unit Default Temperature input 199 9 to 999 9 0 0 Process Value Input Shift Analog input 1 999 to 9 999 0 Process Value Slope Coefficient 0 001 to 9 999 1 000 e Calculating the Process Value Slope Coefficient and Process Value Input Shift In the following equation PVi is the input to the calculation PVo is the result INRT is the process value slope coefficient and INS is the process value input shift PVo PVi x INRT INS e Moving Average e The moving average operation reduces sudd
317. operation heating heating Event input Reverse operation Direct operation cooling heating Reverse operation l ae Direct operation cooling ae r I c v 3 m lt t 5 mp 5 d mp 7 e Switching the SP Mode When the Event Input Assigment parameter is set to RSP SP mode switch operation with a remote SP will start when the event input turns ON Operation with a local SP will start when the event input turns OFF The RSP operation indicator will light during Remote SP Mode Setting Input contact Status Event input OFF Local SP Event input Remote SP e Switching 100 AT Execute Cancel When the Event Input Assigment parameter is set to AT 2 10096 AT Execute Cancel 10096 AT will be executed when the event input turns ON and will be cancelled when the input turns OFF Setting Input contact Status Event input OFF 100 AT cancelled Event input 100 AT executedt e Switching 40 AT Execute Cancel When the Event Input Assigment parameter is set to AT 1 4096 AT Execute Cancel 4096 AT will be executed when the event input turns ON and will be cancelled when the input turns OFF Setting Input contact Status Event input OFF 4096 AT cancelled Event input 4096 AT executed dS HINW uey Jeu1O spueuiuo vonelado e p S E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 13 5 Advanced Operations e Switching Setting Change Enable Disable When the Event Input
318. option number of 001 to 003 or 008 to 012 have one or two CT inputs E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 19 ne N c o 3 e gt D o 3 3 a 0 BULIM 2 2 2 Preparations e Transfer Output E5CC E5EC models with an option number of 006 or 011 to 014 have a transfer output E5CC Option number 006 Current output Linear voltage output E5EC Option number 011 012 013 or 014 Current output Linear voltage output Output type Specification Current output 4 to 20 mA DC Load 500 2 max Resolution 10 000 Linear voltage 1 to 5 VDC Load 1 kQ min Resolution 10 000 output Remote SP Input E5CC E5EC models with an option number of 007 or 011 to 014 have a remote SP input Input type Specification Current input 4 to 20 or O to 20 mA DC with input impedance of 150 Q max Linear voltage 1 to 5 0 to 5 or O to 10 VDC with input impedance of 1 MQ min output The remote SP input circuit is not electrically isolated from the internal circuits Therefore when using a grounded sensor input do not connect the remote SP input terminals to ground If the remote SP input terminals are connected to ground errors will occur in the measured temperature as a result of leakage current E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 Preparations o Communications RS 485 E5CC E5EC models with an option number of 002 003 004 008 009 012 or 014 supp
319. or models with communications Changes are effective after cycling power or after a software reset Lh r4 PL Protocol Setting Switches between CompoWay F and p n Modbus E r Communications Unit No 1 zl n OJR a i n L Communications Baud Rate LO in y m CompoWay F only y Communications Data Length ra 9 Lr Er ra ru Pr Communications Stop Bits 1 ula Communications Parity bici zz n gt Tm Lb 9 nu mm ROM Send Data Wait Time g When Key 2 Input Type Scaling Upper Limit Scaling Lower Limit Decimal Point For input type of analog Temperature Unit 9G IF For input type of temperature SP Upper Limit Limit the set point SP Lower Limit PID ON OFF Standard or Heating Cooling ST Self tuning For input type of temperature standard conirol or PID Program Pattern When assigning PID or control output to ON OFF output Control Period Heating Set the ON OFF output cycle Control Period Cooling Direct Reverse Operation Alarm 1 Type Alarm 1 Hysteresis the PF Setting parameter is set to A M 2 When the PF Setting parameter is set to PFDP E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A Appe
320. ort communications Connect the communications cable to terminals 13 and 14 to use communications with the E5CC E5EC Communications Unit Connection Diagram O E5CC E5EC y N c o 3 e gt D o 3 3 a 0 Host computer Shield E5CC E5EC No 31 No 1 BULIM 2 2 Terminator 120 Q 1 2 W e The RS 485 connection can be either one to one or one to N A maximum of 32 Units including the host computer can be connected in one to N systems The maximum total cable length is 500 m Use a shielded AWG24 to AWG18 cross sectional area of 0 205 to 0 823 mm twisted pair cable Cross sectional area of conductor AWG24 0 205 mm AWG18 0 823 mm E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 21 2 Preparations 2 3 Insulation Block Diagrams The insulation block diagrams for the E5CC E5EC are provided in this section e Models with 2 Auxiliary Outputs Sensor input CT inputs and remote SP input Communications and event inputs Voltage outputs for driving SSR current outputs and transfer output supply Relay outputs Auxiliary output 1 Auxiliary output 2 Reinforced insulation Functional insulation e Model with 3 Auxiliary Outputs Sensor input CT inputs and remote SP input Communications and event inputs Power supply Voltage outputs for driving SSRs current outputs and transfer output Helay outputs
321. os EET rr bees AA AE as A 2 Aal Characieristos arrasa as Soles a te oes A 4 A 1 3 Rating and Characteristics of Options llli A 5 Alt A Waterproof Packing sacco eor EE ER ex FE E Ehe Td i dee A 5 A 2 Current Transformer CT ocococcococnc A 7 A 2s SDOCIHCatloNsS sou Cor red gp Eh E apte da da desde d a ent teat A 7 A 2 2 Dimensions Unit MM eue eo ene wae ce Mae wie Chee men Es A 7 A 3 USB Serial Conversion Cable and Conversion Cable A 8 A 3 1 E58 CIFQ2 USB Serial Conversion Cable o oooooooooooo A 8 A 3 2 E58 CIFQ2 E Conversion Cable 00 0 cee eee A 9 A 4 Error DUS UA Se tr ou gue a had o dede ds A 10 A 5 Iroubleshooling we id rare eee A 13 A 6 Parameter Operation Lists 0 00 cee es A 16 A 6 1 Operation Level 0 00 ccc eee eens A 16 A 6 2 Adjustment Level sees hh A 17 A 6 3 Initial Setting Level 0 0 0 cc eens A 18 A 6 4 Manual Control Level 0 0 eee A 21 A 6 5 Monitor Setting Item Level llle A 21 A 6 6 Advanced Function Setting Level 0 00000 eee A 22 A2027 Protect L vel ss isst mE Rb HOSS SESS eR Re eee n ae eee A 26 A 6 8 Communications Setting Level 0 00 00 ee A 26 A 6 9 Initialization According to Parameter Changes 0000 eee A 27 A 7 Sensor Input Setting Range Indication Range Control Range A 30 A 8 Setting Levels Diagram
322. ou can continue by calibrating the transfer output For detailed setting methods refer to 7 6 Calibrating the Transfer Output E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 7 User Calibration 7 5 Calibrating Analog Input e Calibrating a Current Input In this example calibration is shown for a Controller with an analog input with a current input set as the input type 1 Connect the power supply 2 Connect an STV and DMM to the current input terminals as shown in the following diagram E5CC E5EC Input power supply Input power supply 3 Turn the power ON Move to the Calibration Level This starts the 30 minute aging timer This timer provides an approximate timer for aging After 30 minutes have elapsed the No 2 display changes to 0 You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if 0 is not displayed indu Hoyeuy Bunelqieo S Z 5 When the e Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The No 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in hexadecimal Set the STV to 20 mA Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the 4 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered 7 JI 6 When the Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left Set the STV to 1
323. pending on the operating environment Y92S P7 C Use the following procedure to replace the Setup Tool Port Cover for the front panel e Replacement Procedure 1 Open the Setup Tool Port Cover on the front panel 2 Pull gently on the Setup Tool Port Cover to remove it from the Digital Controller 3 Insert the stopper on the Setup Tool Port Cover into the hole at the bottom of the port 4 Make sure that the Setup Tool Port Cover is closed E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A Appendices A 2 Current Transformer CT A 2 1 Specifications Item Specifications Model number E54 CT1 E54 CT3 Max continuous current 120A Dielectric strength 1 000 VAC for 1 min Vibration resistance 50 Hz 98 m s Weight Approx 60 g Accessories None Armature 2 Plug 2 1 The maximum continuous current of the EBSCC EBEC is 50 A A 2 2 Dimensions Unit mm e E54 CT1 p N O c D F A Q o O 3 O _ O air a e E54 CT3 30 2 36 dia T i suoneaoads Z Y Two M3 holes depth 4 v E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A 7 A Appendices A 3 USB Serial Conversion Cable and Conversion Cable A 3 1 A USB Serial Conversion Cable is used to connect the E5CC E5EC to a computer The E58 CIFQ2 E Conversion Cable is also required to conn
324. perature Controllers User s Manual H174 A Appendices A 1 3 Rating and Characteristics of Options Contact Input ON 1 kQ max OFF 100 kQ min Non contact Input ON Residual voltage 1 5 V max OFF Leakage current 0 1 mA max Transmission path RS 485 Communications method RS 485 2 wire half duplex Synchronization Start stop Baud rate 9 6 19 2 38 4 or 57 6 kbps Current output 4 to 20 mA DC Load 500 2 max Resolution 10 000 0 3 Linear voltage output 1 to 5 VDC Load 1 KQ min Resolution 10 000 0 3 Current input 4 to 20 or O to 20 mA DC with input impedance of 150 Q max Voltage input 1 to 5 O to 5 or O to 10 VDC with input impedance of 1 MQ min Event inputs Communications Transfer output Remote SP input A 1 4 Waterproof Packing If the Waterproof Packing is lost or damage order one of the following models Y92S P8 for DIN 48 x 48 Y92S P9 for DIN 48 x 96 L T b o Lo D O h O t O gt o suondo JO sonsuejoeJeuo pue Buney e L v E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A 5 A Appendices A 1 5 Setup Tool Port Cover for Front Panel A Y92F P7 Setup Tool Port Cover for the front panel is included with the E5EC Order this Port Cover separately if the Port Cover on the front panel Setup Tool port is lost or damaged The Waterproof Packing must be periodically replaced because it may deteriorate shrink or harden de
325. ply Compensating conductor e Operation Make sure that the cold junction compensator is at O C and set the STV output to the voltage equivalent of the starting power of the check value The cold junction compensator and compensation conductor are not required when an external cold junction compensation method is used E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 7 13 7 User Calibration e Resistance Thermometer e Preparations The diagram below shows the required device connections Input power supply 6 dial variable resistor Input power supply 6 dial variable resistor e Operation Set the 6 dial variable resistor to the resistance that is equivalent to the test value e Analog Input e Preparations The diagram below shows the required device connections The connection terminals depend on the model and input type Current Input Input power supply Input power supply 7 14 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 7 User Calibration Voltage Input 5 Input power supply Input power supply e Operation Set the STV output to the voltage or current test value Aoeinooy uomneoipu 6ur459u5 7 4 7 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 7 15 7 User Calibration E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Appendices Asl SPECIMENS atras re Soe Gace ir eas Gat A 2 Aal Batin
326. priority for the MV Manual Output Method Advanced Function Setting Level Setting range Unit Default HOLD INIT HOLD E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 31 7 de N U o h O 3 5 e D 5 c D O O 5 mp e uonejedo Jenueln L zL G 5 Advanced Operations Manual MV Initial Value Advanced Function Setting Level Setting range Unit Default Standard control 5 0 to 105 0 0 Heating cooling control 105 0 to 105 0 0 Manual MV Limit Enable Advanced Function Setting Level When the Manual MV Limit Enable parameter is set to ON enabled the MV limits will function and the setting range for the Manual MV parameter will be between the MV upper limit and the MV lower limit When the parameter is set to OFF disabled MV limits will not function Parameter name Setting range Default EE OFF Disabled OFF Manual MV Limit Enable ON Enabled Using the PF Key to Move to the Manual Control Level e When the PF Setting parameter is set to A M Auto Manual pressing the PF Key for at least one second while in the Adjustment or Operation Level will change the mode to manual mode and move to the Manual Control Level During manual operation it is not possible to move to any displays other than PV MV Manual MV Press the P9 or C Key for at least one second from the PV MV display in the Manual Control Level to change the mode to automatic mode move to the Operation
327. process value stabilizes e The RUN STOP status remains as RUN 8 e Key operations are used to change the RUN STOP status to STOP during program operation Measuring the soak time is continued within the wait band Measuring the soak time stops when the process value leaves the wait band 7 formed ER 3 e The Program Start parameter is again changed from RSET to STRT using either an event or key gt operations 9 e The RUN STOP status will automatically change to RUN mode when the above operation is per S formed 2 4 e The RUN STOP status automatically changes to STOP mode when soak time expires x e END flashes on the No 2 display and the program END output turns ON 3 5 e The Program Start parameter is changed from STRT to RSET using either an event or key oper E ations 9 The END display is cleared and the program END output turns OFF ES 6 e Key operations are used to switch the RUN STOP status to RUN with the Program Start parame S U 8 Rt 3 9 Key operations are used to change the RUN STOP status to RUN Measuring the soak time is continued within the wait band continuing from the time between 7 and 9 10 e The RUN STOP status automatically changes to STOP mode when the measured time reaches the soak time e END flashes on the No 2 display and the program END output turns ON E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 41 5 Advanced Operations 5 15 Outpu
328. purchase check that the product and packaging are not dented or the product appearance otherwise damaged Damaged internal parts may prevent optimum control Product model and Make sure that the purchased product meets the required specifications specifications Setting the Product installation Provide sufficient space around the product for heat dissipation Do not Unit location block the vents on the product Wiring Terminal wiring Do not subject the terminal screws to excessive stress force when tightening them Make sure that there are no loose screws after tightening terminal screws to the specified torque of 0 43 to 0 58 N m Be sure to confirm the polarity for each terminal before wiring the terminal block and connectors Power supply Wire the power supply inputs correctly Incorrect wiring will result in damage inputs to the internal circuits Operating Ambient The ambient operating temperature for the product is 10 to 55 C with no environment temperature condensation or icing To extend the service life of the product install it in a location with an ambient temperature as low as possible In locations exposed to high temperatures if necessary cool the products using a fan or other cooling method Vibration and Check whether the standards related to shock and vibration are satisfied at shock the installation environment Install the product in locations where the contactors will not be subject to vibration or sh
329. put of Al rmS uae ee oS be as ACER ee eee s 5 24 5 9 1 Aritegrated Alar ged uie is ne ERI EO E IRE ete Ee RE d 5 24 5 10 Alarm DelayS 3x scale t E ER EE X Maas m deux NUR Rx EUR RUE Se See ae 5 26 910 1 Alarm Delays se ot Be ode a E dub v REDEEM s 5 26 5 11 Loop Burnout Alarm a nr OR GC CR TORO ORO CRX os ee 5 28 5 11 1 Loop Burnout Alarm LBA 0 0 0 cee ee es 5 28 5 12 Performing Manual Control ooococooo es 5 31 5 12 1 Manual Operation 0 0 eee eens 5 31 5 13 Using the Transfer Output 0 00 cee ee 5 34 5 13 1 Transfer Output Function 0 0c eee 5 34 5 14 Using the Simple Program Function 5 37 5 14 1 Simple Program Function 0 0 0 ccc eens 5 37 5 14 2 Operation at the Program End 0c ees 5 39 5 14 3 Application Example Using a Simple Program o o ooooooooo 5 41 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 1 5 Advanced Operations 5 15 Output Adjustment Functions ees 5 42 Sta SOUIPULLIMIES ea ada ro ok ee eH Se Geese Sods Sew ore hale oe aoe ee 5 42 5 15 2 MV db OOP rra oe PE DU Coa ve eed eles Sud oe Pee 5 42 19 00 MV a PV ENON sit Sas anaheim was x a bd airada Bh 5 43 5 16 Using the Extraction of Square Root Parameter 5 44 5 16 1 Extraction of Square Roots naana aaa aaea 5 44 5 17 Setting the Width of MV Variation ooooooooo
330. put terminals as shown in the figure below Leave open ET Zero i controller OUTPUT INPUT N Compensating conductor of currently selected thermocouple Use K thermocouple compensating conductor for E R S B W and PLII thermocouples and for an infrared temperature sensor 3 Turn the power ON Move to the Calibration Level This starts the 30 minute aging timer This timer provides an approximate timer for aging After 30 minutes have elapsed the No 2 display changes to 0 You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if O is not displayed e Input types 5 7 11 12 5 When the Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left 15 19 20 The No 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in hexadecimal Set the STV as follows e Input types 5 7 11 12 15 19 20 Set to 54 mV e Input types 6 8 9 10 13 14 16 17 18 21 22 23 24 Set to 24 mV e Input types 6 8 9 10 13 Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the 4 Key to 14 16 17 18 21 22 23 temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered uonea4qije ejdnooounuou E Z 7 6 When the Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left Set the STV to 6 mV Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then p
331. quare root is higher than L t Point 4 0 0 and lower than the low cut point set in the Extraction of Square Root ci Low Cut Point parameter the results of extracting the square root will be 0 0 If the PV input is lower than 0 0 or higher than 100 0 extraction of the square root will not be executed so the result will be equal to the PV input The low cut point is set as normalized data for each input with 0 0 as the lower limit and 100 0 as the upper limit for the input setting range Extraction of square root 100 FS Poco 112 Extraction of square Y root low cut point 0 100 FS Argument 1 Input Data Parameter name Setting rage Unit Default Level Extraction of Square OFF Disabled OFF Initial Setting Level Root Enable ON Enabled Extraction of Square 0 0 to 100 0 Adjustment Level Root Low cut Point This procedure sets the Extraction of Square Root Low cut Point param eter to 10 0 The input type must be set for an analog input Operating Procedure e Enabling Extraction of Square Roots Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to 12 Setting Level display 547 Extraction of Square Root Enable ee of Root Enable The default is oF F 2 Press the A or Key to select al Enabled 5 44 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations e Setting the Extraction of Square Root Low cut Point 1 Press the Key several times
332. r 5 E FF will occur Check the setting of the Input Type parameter I Control Outputs 1 and 2 e Model Numbers The specifications for control outputs 1 and 2 are given in the following location in the model number EBEC LILJLILILIM LILIEI L Control outputs 1 and 2 Code Output type Specification RX 1 relay output 250 VAC 5 A resistive load aX 12 VDC 40 mA CX 1 current output 4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC with load of 500 Q max aa 12 VDC 21 mA QR 1 voltage output for driving SSR and 1 relay 12 VDC 21 mA for voltage output output 250 VAC 5 A resistive load for relay output HR 2 relay outputs 250 VAC 5 A resistive load CC 2 current outputs 4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC with load of 500 Q max E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 11 y N c o 3 e gt D o 3 3 a 0 ejdurexa3 Bulli oojg euu 2393 2 2 2 2 Preparations e Terminal Details Do not connect anything to the terminals that are shaded gray RX PAN xw mM 7 Voltage output Voltage output Control output 1 4 for driving SSR 4 i for driving SSR PAN E Voltage output for driving SSR Control output 2 Control output 1 Control output 2 Sensor Input e Model Numbers All ESEC models have universal sensor inputs so the code in the model number is always M ESEC 11 U O O M LILIE Tee input e Terminal Details Do no
333. r and o standby lower limit alarm 1 6 gt sequence 1 3 6 Upper limit with A standby sequence is O standby sequence added to the upper limit 3 alarm 2 6 0 7 Lower limit with A standby sequence is standby sequence added to the lower limit alarm 3 6 8 Absolute value The alarm will turn ON if the upper limit process value is larger than B the alarm value X o regardless of the set point 9 Absolute value The alarm will turn ON if the D lower limit process value is smaller a than the alarm value X m regardless of the set point i 10 Absolute value A standby sequence is upper limit with added to the absolute value standby sequence upper limit alarm 8 6 11 Absolute value A standby sequence is lower limit with added to the absolute value standby sequence lower limit alarm 9 6 12 LBA alarm 1 type 7 only 13 PV change rate 8 14 SP absolute value This alarm type turns ON upper limit alarm the alarm when the set point SP is higher than the alarm value X 15 SP absolute value This alarm type turns ON lower limit alarm the alarm when the set point SP is lower than the alarm value X 16 MV absolute value Standard Control Standard Control This alarm type turns ON upper limit alarm 9 OFF 0 MV Heating Cooling Control Heating MV ON AS OFF MV E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 ON E OFF MV 0 Heating Cooling Control Heating MV Always ON
334. r limit Absolute value lower limit Absolute value upper limit with standby sequence Absolute value lower limit with standby sequence LBA alarm 1 type only PV change rate alarm SP absolute value upper limit alarm SP absolute value lower limit alarm 6 Parameters Alarm output operation Alarm output operation operation When alarm value When alarm value Description of function X is positive X is negative Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm value X The alarm is ON when the PV is lower than the SP by the deviation or more Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper limit H and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm lower limit L The alarm is ON when the PV is inside this deviation range A standby sequence is added to the upper and lower limit alarm 1 A standby sequence is added to the upper limit alarm 2 A standby sequence is added to the lower limit 6 P N 5 m o D 5 rm O lt o alarm 3 The alarm will turn ON if the process value is larger than the alarm value X regardless of the set point The alarm will turn ON if the process value is smaller than the alarm value X regardless of the set point A standby sequence is added to the absolute value 6 upper limit alarm 8 A standby sequence is added to the absolute value lower limit alarm 9 S
335. r measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting heater burnout This parameter measures and displays the heater current value e Heater burnout is not detected if the ON time for the control output for heating is 100 ms Function or less 30 ms or less if the control period is 0 1 or 0 2 s 5 Monitor range Unit 0 0 to 55 0 A Monitor e FFFF is displayed when 55 0 A is exceeded e f an alarm is output for the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter the No 1 display will flash the Heater Current 1 Value Monitor parameter e Related Parameters Heater Burnout Detection 1 Adjustment Level Page 6 21 Heater Burnout Detection 2 Adjustment Level Page 6 22 HB ON OFF Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 58 Error Display L i Page A 12 See 6 10 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters HB and HS alarms must be supported two CTs 5 E EL Ae Current VAGE Mentor The HB ON OFF parameter must be set to ON 73 This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting heater burnout This parameter measures and displays the heater current value e Heater burnout is not detected if the ON time for the control output for heating is 100 ms Function or less 30 ms or less if the control period is 0 1 or 0 2 s b Monitor range Unit 0 0 to 55 0 A Monitor e FFFF is displayed when 55 0 A is exceeded e f an alarm is output for the Heater Burnout Det
336. r the heating control output during opera tion e During standard control the manipulated variable is monitored During heating cooling control the manipulated variables on the control output heating is monitored Function The default is OFF and the manipulated variable is not displayed Control Unit Standard 5 0 to 105 0 Monitor Heating cooling e Related Parameters See MV Display Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 62 The control system must be set to heating cooling B n MV Monitor Cooling control The MV Display parameter must be set to ON rm This parameter is used to monitor the manipulated variable for the cooling control output during opera tion e During heating cooling control the manipulated variable on the control output cooling is monitored Function The default is OFF and the manipulated variable is not displayed al Control Unit Heating cooling 0 0 to 105 0 e Related Parameters See Standard or Heating Cooling Initial Setting Level Page 6 42 MV Display Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 62 Monitor E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters 6 4 Adjustment Level This level is for executing AT auto tuning and other operations and for set control parameters This level provides the basic Controller parameters for PID control proportional band integral time derivative time and heating cooling control To move to t
337. rability of the relay into consideration e For standard control use the Control Period Heating parameter The Control Period Cooling parameter cannot be used e When the heating control output is a current output the Control Period Heating parameter cannot be used e For heating cooling control the control period can be set independently for heating and cooling The Control Period Heating parameter is used for the heating control output and the Control Period Cooling parameter is used for the cooling control output Parameter name Setting range Unit Default n Control Period 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 to 99 Seconds 20 for relay output Peng Heating ELE 2 for voltage output for driving SSR Control Period 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 to 99 Seconds 20 for relay output Cooling pem m 2 for voltage output for driving SSR e Related Parameters see PID ON OFF Initial Setting Level Page 6 41 Function E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 43 6 Parameters one Direct Reverse Operation e Direct operation refers to control where the manipulated variable is increased when the process value increases Alternatively reverse operation refers to control where the Function manipulated variable is increased when the process value decreases a Setting range Default ah A Reverse operation n d Direct operation Bh R Setting HL LE I Alarm 1 Type Alarm 1 must be assigned n rg n
338. rameters must not be set HL J Alarm Value 3 10 0 1 8 999r Mer NL Alarm Value 4 This parameter is set to one of the input values X in the alarm type list Page 3 16 e These parameters set the alarm values for alarms 1 to 4 e During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the currently selected Function sensor and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting Alarms Other Than an MV Alarm Setting range Unt Default 1999 to 9999 0 MV Alarms Setting range Unit Default 199 9 to 999 9 96 0 0 e Related Parameters See Input Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 39 Scaling Upper Limit Initial Setting Level Page 6 40 Scaling Lower Limit Initial Setting Level Page 6 40 Decimal Point Initial Setting Level Page 6 40 Alarm 1 to 4 Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 44 Alarm 1 to 4 Hysteresis Initial Setting Level Page 6 48 Standby Sequence Reset Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 57 Auxiliary Output 1 to 4 Open in Alarm Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 58 Alarm 1 to 4 Latch Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 63 6 14 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters AL IH Alarm Value Upper Limit 1 HL cH Alarm Value Upper Limit 2 HL 3H Alarm Value Upper Limit 3 o un Alarm Value Upper Limit 4 oe PP Alarm 1 to alarm 4 must be assigned The Alarm 1 to 4 Type parameter must be set to 1 HL it Alarm Value
339. ration Adjustment Protect Restricts displaying and modifying menus in operation adjustment and manual control levels Initial Setting Communications Protect This protect level restricts movement to the initial setting communications setting and advanced function setting levels Setting Change Protect Protects changes to setups by operating the front panel keys PF Key Protect Changed Parameters Only Parameter Mask Enable Displayed only when a parameter mask is set Password to Move to Protect Level Password setting Alarm Value 1 Alarm Value Upper Limit 1 Alarm Value Lower Limit 1 Alarm Value 2 Alarm Value Upper Limit 2 Alarm Value Lower Limit 2 E 2 Alarm o Value3 lt 4 G Qa 0 7 oO Alarm Value E Upper Limit is 3 5 4 oO Alarm Value D Lower Limit o Alarm Value 4 Alarm Value Upper Limit j4 Alarm Value Lower Limit n Cooling Key 2 Press the Key for at least 3 s Other than the Auto Manual Switch display Initial Setting Level Press the S Key for less than 1 s Press the S Key for at least 1 s _ Q Q__ A LTI QOI SI ROO O gt RRS NES Operation Level lt I Set either of these parameters Set either of these parameters Set either of these parameters MV Monitor Heating MV Monitor Press the C Key less than 1 s Communications Setting Level Displayed only f
340. ration When set point is changed 1 The set point at the start of operation differs from 1 The new set point differs from the set point used the set point when the previous SRT was when the previous SRT was executed executed 2 The set point change width is greater than the 2 The difference between the temperature at the larger of the following two Present proportional start of operation and the set point is greater than band x 1 27 4 C and the ST stable range the larger of the following two Present 3 During reverse operation the new set point is proportional band x 1 27 4 C and the ST stable larger than the set point before the change and range during direct operation the new set point is 3 The temperature at the start of operation is lower smaller than the set point before the change than the set point during reverse operation and iS 4 The temperature is stable 2 larger than the set point during direct operation Equilibrium with the output amount at 0 when 4 There is no reset from input errors the power is turned ON is also all right 3 1 The previous SRT implemented set point is the set point that was used for calculating the PID constants for the previous SRT 2 In this state the measurement point is within the ST stable range E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 25 gt o g D e D 3 2 5 ae Y g O O 5 D F 9 5 7 E o n1 D 5 c D o D c
341. ration of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work Bil Operation Type EEES Always OFF Work Bit 1 is used by Work Bit 1 Always OFF e O pe rati O n 1 Operation of Work Bit 1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work Bil gt Auxiliary Output 1 Operation Type Stelter Work Bit 1 is used by Slam 1 y 20RUN sTOP ON OFF Delay Auxiliary Output 1 1H 1 1 Work Bit 1 Input A Input B MN L Input C Input D ON OFF 4 HH WD 95 Time Unit a a s OFF y O Always OFF y y y Cmn fs s O pe rati O n 2 Operation of Work Bit 1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work Bil A and B or C and D When conditions A and B or conditions C and D are satisfied Operation Type MEE Work Bit 1 is used by Alarm 1 y 20 RUN STOP ON OFF Delay Auxiliary Output 1 1 1 Work Bit 1 Input A Input B i H j Input C Input D ON OFF A or C and B or D When condition A or C and condition B or D are satisfied he N N r O e o O o O D ct O 5 D Os Os 0 Always OFF y oatways OFF PURA min Es e O pe rati O n 3 Operation of Work Bit 1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Opera
342. rc Alarm 2 Type Alarm 2 must be assigned nm rJ LCI Alarm 3 Type Alarm 3 must be assigned H Lu FILI 1 Alarm 4 Type Alarm 4 must be assigned e Select one of the following eight alarm types for the alarm 1 type Deviation deviation range absolute value LBA PV change rate SP MV or RSP alarm Function Select one of the following seven alarm types for the alarm 2 type alarm 3 type and alarm 4 type Deviation deviation range absolute value PV change rate SP MV or RSP alarm An LBA loop burnout alarm cannot be set Alarm output operation Alarm output operation operation X is positive X is negative 0 DUDEN ia No alarm 1 Upper and Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper limit H and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm lower limit L The alarm is ON when the PV is outside this deviation range Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm value X The alarm is ON when the PV is higher than the SP by the deviation or more lower limit Upper limit 6 44 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 one 10 11 12 13 14 15 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Alarm type Lower limit Upper and lower limit range Upper and lower limit with standby sequence Upper limit with standby sequence Lower limit with standby sequence Absolute value uppe
343. regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RAT
344. ress the 4 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered NO E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 7 5 7 User Calibration 7 8 9 When the Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left Change the wiring as follows Open in non connected state Short circuit pam Y _ controller OUTPUT INPUT x Compensating conductor of currently selected thermocouple Use K thermocouple compensating conductor for E R S B W and PLII thermocouples and for an infrared temperature sensor Disconnect the STV to enable the thermocouple of the cold junction compensator When doing this be sure to disconnect the wiring on the STV side Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the 4 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings 10 When the Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left 11 The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete Press the A Key The No 2 display changes to YE 5 Release the key and wait two seconds or press the lt 2 Key This stores the temporarily registered calibration data to non volatile memory To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to non volatile memory press the 9 Key while Na is
345. riGhth Ss etre bios eaa 6 63 Display Refresh Period esueuusssss 6 83 Event Input Assignment seueuesssss 5 12 Event Input Assignment 1 to 6 6 51 event IM DUIS odo petiere uto E CER este 5 11 Extraction of Square Root Enable 5 44 6 53 Extraction of Square Root Low cut Point 5 44 6 33 FAB INO 1 6 58 Heater Burnout Detection 1 6 21 Heater Burnout Detection 2 6 22 Heater Burnout Hysteresis ssssssse 6 59 Index 3 Heater Burnout Latch sss 6 59 Heater Current 1 Value Monitor 6 10 6 21 Heater Current 2 Value Monitor 6 11 6 22 Heating Cooling Tuning Method 5 9 6 78 PIS Alm TS iot uei itr oec o pe Ee phe ott 6 23 TA PAPAIN RE 6 24 HS Alarm Hysteresis ccccccsseeeccesesseeeeeseeeeeeees 6 69 HS Alarm Lateh sarta ina 6 69 HS Alarm USE st as 4 42 6 68 A 4 20 Hysteresis Cooling ccccccoonncnncococnonccnoncnnncononnonnnos 6 29 Hysteresis Heating ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 6 29 Initial Setting Communications Protect 6 4 Input Digital Filter eee eee cess eae eeeeeeeaeeees 6 61 IAD UU TY OC quet c c ri a 6 39 A 18 INPULTYDEO c 4 10 Integral
346. rite Variable operation command can be used via communications to write the password to the Move to Protect Level parameter When the correct password is written the display will change to the Operation Adjustment Protect parameter and writing the parameters in the Protect Level will be enabled Note1 If the Write Variable operation command is used to write the wrong password to the Move to Protect Level parameter after the correct parameter has been written the Move to Protect Level parameter will be displayed and any Write Variable operation commands to write parameters in the Protect Level will result in operation errors 2 f a password is not set or if it is set to O the display will change to the Operation Adjustment Protect parameter and writing the parameters in the Protect Level will be enabled immediately E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 21 7 N c o 5 gt D A o lt U O e D Q r O lt o 9597 091014 9y 0 9 O N O PIOMSSEJY y Bulajuy ADS 5 Advanced Operations 5 8 Displaying Only Parameters That Have Been Changed 5 8 1 Displaying Changed Parameters You can display only the parameters that have been changed from their default settings Parameters that have not been changed will not be displayed This allows you to easily see which parameters have been changed so that you can check for parameters that still need to be changed or for errors in the set
347. rol Stopped Parameters G Initial Setting Level 3 Communications Setting Level 3 Advanced Function Setting Level T ama Mee we dine Logic Operation Editor Jal x 2 Click the Import of Library Edit Form F DRE quy Help H Close x Button Operauorror work Bit 1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work Bi gt Operation Type No operation Always OFF y Work Bit 1 is used by Work Bit 1 Always OFF Control Output Assignment Event Input Data Event Input Assignment Control output heatin y Internal Event 1 i vent input 1 external input Multi SPNo bit 0 Control Output 1 i a No assignment y Intemal Event 2 2 Event input 2 extemal input RUN STOP Pta Auxiliary Output Assignment Internal Event 3 3Event input 3 external input None Auxiliary Dutput 1 Alarm 1 y Internal Event 4 4 E vent input 4 external input y None y Auxiliary Output 2 Alarm 2 y Intemal Event 5 5E vent input 5 extemal input y None y Auxiliary Output 3 Alarm 3 y Internal Event 6 6 Event input 6 external input y None Auxiliary Output 4 Alarm 4 y Functions can be assigned to event inputs This parameter sets a function to be assigned to Event input 1 A A IA S eee ee cee E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers Us
348. s 2 PID CONTON scsrescdecscscsasoresxnenecetensasdssanimseemoneced 4 13 6 41 A AD Converter EMO eias a A 11 Adjustment Level ccccccsssccsssseesessseseeeeeenees 6 17 A 17 Advanced Function Setting Level 6 54 A 22 air cooling water cooling tuning 5 9 alarde Sua 5 26 alarm rysteresliS sissien aa 4 37 alar lacus 4 38 alarm ODGrAUON cea aia 4 38 alar OUPS esas 4 30 GIARDIA AY DCS mitad 4 30 alalim VAI CS ati UU dec ekonta 4 34 alaimo aida 4 16 alarms standard alarms ccccsseseecceeseeeeeeseeeeeeesaeees 1 3 analog AN DUUS eraser a 5 5 7 9 assioning QUIPUS cita 4 15 AT aulostHnilig ise 4 23 auto maridal controls ina cid 5 12 auto manual selection display 5 32 autotuning AT ti oc te het ia ose etter 4 23 6 19 auxiliary output opening and closing in alarm 4 18 auxiliary outputs 1 t0 4 ninia 2 18 B balanceless bumpless operation 5 31 C calibrating a current input cece ceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 9 Calibrating a voltage input ccooonccccoccncccnccnncnnnncnnannnnnnnos 7 10 calibrating INDUS ancora dia 7 2 calibrating the transfer output ssssusse 7 11 eisrziiz reticere A 4 checking indication accuracy eeseseeeesss 7 13 analog input a 7 14 infrared temperature sensor
349. s for at least 3 s ss M sssnnnnanannnnnannnnnnn n Manual Control Press the Key once Adjustment Level Level m Operation Level E Used to change adjustment Used to set the MV Usedior SP alarm C parameters PID constants manually values and other basic M adjustment sensitivity etc settings and monitoring Press the Key for at least 3 s while A M is displayed 2 or the er ery Wei a Key for at least 1 sl Press the Key Press the S Key Press the Key for for at least 1 s at least 3 s Operation in progress Monitor Setting Item Level Used to display specified monitor and setting items Press the Key once models with communications only Communications Setting Level Used to set the input type Used to set up and other basic settings communications Press the C Key once Initial Setting Level do o D 5 ae r O lt o 0 Q D Q D 3 Release protection and then enter the password 169 for the Arar Move to Advanced Setting Level parameter Press the Key for at least 1 s Advanced Function Setting Level Used to set application functions Stopped Enter the password 1201 for the Move to Calibration Level parameter Calibration Level Used to calibrate the E5CC E5EC 1 Touse a key procedure to move to Manual Control Level set the Auto Manual Select Addition paramet
350. s with cover is selected for the terminal type e Terminal Details Model with 2 auxiliary outputs Model with 3 auxiliary outputs Auxiliary output 2 Auxiliary output 3 Auxiliary output 2 Auxiliary output 1 Auxiliary output 1 I Input Power Supply e Model Numbers The input power supply specification of the E5CC is given in the following location in the model number E5CC OO O O O M LIEIE 1 Input power supply Code Power consumption A 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Option number 000 5 2 VA max Other option numbers 6 5 VA max D 24 VAC 50 60 Hz Option number 000 3 1 VA max 1 6 W max 24 VDC no polarity Other option numbers 4 1 VA max 2 3 W max ox M m Ql O O s 3 m UD O O el 3 e an x e 3 pel D e Terminal Details 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC DC 99 C 12 12 No polarity E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 9 2 Preparations I Options e Model Numbers The options specification of the E5CC is given in the following location in the model number E5CC LILI O O O M LLLI L Options Code Specification Remarks 000 001 Event inputs 1 and 2 and CT1 002 Communications RS 485 The communications protocol is and CT1 CompoWay F or Modbus RTU 003 Communications RS 485 The communications protocol is CT1 and CT2 CompoWay F or Modbus RTU 004 Communications RS 485 The communications protocol is and event inputs 3 and 4 Co
351. second and then the operation display will appear The top display will show the PV and the bottom display will show the SP e Resistance Thermometer Connected e Thermocouple Connected or e Temperature Sensor Not Connected The PV that is measured by the Wa S temperature sensor is displayed PD 5 Cnn ig emt An input error K Thermocouple Connected PV is displayed The correct temperature is displayed Other Thermocouple Connected The correct temperature is Pees not displayed SP did SV O oO Ge s 00 9 U E 2 E e Change the setting of the Input Type If you are not using a K thermocouple set parameter to a resistance thermometer in the Input Type parameter to the correct the Initial Setting Level sensor type in the Initial Setting Level The default setting is 0 C Or Refer to step 2 on 3 13 e Connect a temperature sensor Hefer to step 2 on 3 13 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 3 3 3 Part Names and Basic Procedures 3 3 Part Names Part Functions and Setting Levels 3 3 1 Part Names and Functions escc Front panel Temperature unit gt Operation indicators No 1 display gt
352. ser s Manual H174 3 Part Names and Basic Procedures 3 3 4 E5CC E5EC Setting Levels I Moving between Setting Levels The following figure gives an overall image of the setting levels The setting levels consist of the basic setting levels shaded below and the other setting levels not shaded Keys Protect Level for at least 1s Only when Manual Mode was t t protection used just before power OFF Used to set protectio for operations Power ON Key foratleast 1s Level changes or F9 Key for at least 1 s automatically Press 9 Keys e e U y E 3 D p U 9 pu Tl c 5 et O 5 p 9 5 2 o D 5 ro gt O lt D 0 ea E all AVR PERAE D M Control 1 Press Key once O anual Contro Operation Level Adjustment Level o Level Used to change Q Used to set the MV Used for SP alarm C adjustment parameters c manually values and other basic PID constants control n settings and monitoring Press S Key once ff hysteresis etc c Key for at least 3 s O while A M is 1 Q T displayed or Key CA orn A w Fin for at least 1s Press Key A Dd m o 2 O S Key for S Key for i i Q aa ean Monitor Setting m at least 3 s at least 1s C1 Item Level rn Used to display O specified monitor op and setting items 1d O D Press Key once models with communications only o Initial Setting
353. sible not possible e Parameters are not protected when the set value is set to O e The default is O e Initial Setting Communications Protect This protect level restricts movement to the Initial Setting Level Communications Setting Level and Advanced Function Setting Level eat value Initial Settina Level Communications Advanced Function J Setting Level Setting Level 0 Possible to reach Possible to reach Possible to reach Possible to reach Possible to reach Not possible to reach 2 Not possible to reach Not possible to reach Not possible to reach e The default is 1 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 19 7 A c o 5 e mp gt D A D U O mr D O mp r D lt o UONISJOIA L G 5 Advanced Operations e Setting Change Protect This protect level restricts key operations Set value Description Settings can be changed using key operations ON Settings cannot be changed using key operations The protect level set tings however can be changed e The default is OFF e The setting change protection indicator Ori will light when the Setting Change Protect parameter is set to ON o PF Key Protect This protect level enables or disables PF Key operations Set value Description PF Key enabled ON PF Key disabled Operation as function key prohibited e The default is OFF 5 7 2 Entering the Password to Move to the Protect Level e The Protect Leve
354. signed to a control output or auxiliary output the output will turn ON when the input error occurs The error message will appear in the display for the PV Note The heating and cooling control outputs will turn OFF When the manual MV MV at stop or MV at error is set the control output is determined by the set value E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A Appendices Ll LLI Display Range Exceeded ttt e Meaning Though this is not an error it is displayed if the process value exceeds the display range when the control range is larger than the display range The display ranges are shown below with decimal points omitted e When less than 1 999 cece e When more than 9 999 323233 Operation Control continues allowing normal operation The value will appear in the display for the PV Resistance thermometer input Except for models with a Resistance thermometer input Except for models with a setting range of 199 9 to 500 0 C setting range of 1999 to 500 0 C Thermocouple input Except for models with a setting range of Thermocouple input Except for models with a setting range of 199 9 to 400 0 C 199 9 to 400 0 C ES1B Control range Control range S EPP display SERF display SERR display ccc display SERR display Analog Input Analog Input e When display range lt control range e When display range control range Control range SERR display cee
355. sive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted INNO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR 2 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 Read and Understand this Manual Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or
356. sumption A 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Option number 000 6 6 VA max Other option numbers 8 3 VA max D 24 VAC 50 60 Hz Option number 000 4 1 VA max 2 3 W max 24 VDC no polarity Other option numbers 5 5 VA max 3 2 W max e Terminal Details Details on the input power supply terminals are shown below 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC DC d no polarity E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 13 n2 N c 5 e S D D 3 5 0 ejdurexa3 Bulli oojg euu 2393 2 2 2 2 Preparations I Options e Model Numbers The options specification of the E5EC is given in the following location in the model number E5EC OU U O O M LILIE pu Options Code Specification 000 None 004 Communications RS 485 and event inputs 1 and 2 005 Event inputs 1 to 4 008 Communications RS 485 event inputs 1 and 2 and CT1 009 Communications RS 485 event inputs 1 and 2 CT1 and CT2 010 Event inputs 1 to 4 and CT1 011 Event inputs 1 to 6 CT1 transfer output and remote SP input 012 Communications RS 485 event inputs 1 2 5 and 6 CT1 transfer output and remote SP input 013 Event inputs 1 to 6 transfer output and remote SP input 014 Communications RS 485 event inputs 1 2 5 and 6 transfer output and remote SP input Remarks The communications protocol is CompoWay F or Modbus RTU The communications protocol is CompoWay F or
357. t Default SP lower limit to SP upper limit 0 o Related Parameters see Process Value Set Point Operation Level Page 6 8 Input Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 39 Event Input Assignment Initial Setting Level Page 6 51 Number of Multi SP Points Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 56 Setting E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 25 6 Parameters LNG Process Value Input Shift Sometimes an error occurs between the process value and the actual temperature To offset M this a compensated value can be obtained by adding an input shift value to the input The Function Compensated value is displayed as the process value and used for control The entire input range is shifted by a fixed rate If the input shift value is set to 1 C control will be per formed for a value 1 C lower than the measured temperature a Setting range Default Temperature input 199 9 to 999 9 0 0 m Analog input 1 999 to 9 999 0 The decimal point position depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting e Related Parameters See Input Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 39 LNFE Process Value Slope Coefficient This parameter sets a factor to apply to the input to compensate the process value The resulting value is displayed as the process value and used in control Function a Setting range Default 0 001 to 9 999 1 000 Setting RSS Remote SP Input Shift This parameter sets a compensation
358. t Adjustment Functions 5 15 1 Output Limits e Output limits can be set to control the output using the upper and lower limits to the calculated MV e The following MV takes priority over the MV limits Manual MV MV at stop MV at PV error Output MV upper limit MV lower limit When the manual MV limit is enabled the manual MV will be restricted by the MV limit e For heating cooling control upper and lower limits are set for overall heating cooling control They cannot be set separately for heating cooling Output Heating MV Cooling MV Pm ae Se ee Si MV lower limit MV upper limit F TON 5 15 2 MV at Stop e The MV when control is stopped can be set For heating cooling control the MV at stop will apply to the cooling side if the MV is negative and to the heating side if the MV is positive When setting the MV when control is stopped set the MV at Stop and Error Addition parameter Advanced Function Setting Level to ON The default is 0 0 so an MV will not be output for either standard or heating cooling control Parameter name Setting range O Ui Default MV at STOP 5 0 to 105 0 for standard control 105 0 to 105 0 for heating cooling con 0 0 trol Note The order of priority is as follows Manual MV gt MV at stop gt MV at PV error 5 42 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations 5 15 3 MV at PV Error
359. t Level Press Key for at least 3 seconds to go to Initial Setting Level 3 4 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 3 Part Names and Basic Procedures Displays Display Name Description E5CC Top display No 1 display Displays the process value or a monitor setting item E5EC Top display E5CC Bottom display No 2 display Displays the set point or the value of a monitor setting item E5EC Middle display E5CC None No 3 Display Displays the manipulated variable remaining soak time multi SP No E5EC Bottom display E5EC only internal SP ramp SP or alarm value 1 The value that is displayed is set in the PV SP Display Selection parameter in the Advanced Function Setting Level Lor Temperature Displays the temperature unit unit e e U y D 3 D p U 9 Tl c 5 et O 5 p 9 5 2 o D 5 ro gt O lt D 0 Operation indicators Name Description UB1 Auxiliary outputs Each indicator lights when the function that is assigned to 1to 4 Only the corresponding auxiliary output 1 to 4 is ON E5EC support auxiliary output 4 o DM W W Cc C UJ UY Aj 69 No a Oi m O O 2 Control outputs 1 Each indicator lights when the function that is assigned to and 2 corresponding control output 1 or 2 is ON For a current output the indicator is not lit only for a 096 output Communications This indicator
360. t connect anything to the terminals that are shaded gray P TC thermocouple EE I current V voltage e 28 ET 2 29 es q LA Precautions for Correct Use When complying with EMC standards the line connecting the sensor must be 30 m or less If the cable length exceeds 30 m compliance with EMC standards will not be possible 2 12 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 2 Preparations I Auxiliary Outputs e Model Numbers The number of auxiliary outputs on the EBEC is given in the following location in the model number EBEC L I 4 O O M LILTL L No of auxiliary outputs Code Auxiliary outputs Specification 2 Model with 2 auxiliary outputs SPST NO 250 VAC 3 A 4 Model with 4 auxiliary outputs SPST NO 250 VAC 2 A These cannot be selected if 5 screw terminals with cover is selected for the terminal type e Terminal Details Do not connect anything to the terminals that are shaded gray Model with 4 auxiliary outputs Model with 2 auxiliary outputs Auxiliary output 4 Auxiliary output 3 Auxiliary output 2 Auxiliary output 2 Auxiliary output 1 Auxiliary output 1 I Input Power Supply e Model Numbers The input power supply specification of the EBEC is given in the following location in the model number EBEC LILJLILILIM LILIE L Input power supply The codes that are given in the following table show the specification Code Specification Power con
361. t for cooling Note If standard control is selected set the Control Output 1 Assignment to a control output heating for either direct cooling or reverse heating operation Default ILL I JC a Setting range Standard 4 2 Heating cooling ILL h t JCM Setting e Related Parameters See cues MV Monitor Heating Operation Level Page 6 16 MV Monitor Cooling Operation Level Page 6 16 Dead Band Adjustment Level Page 6 28 Hysteresis Heating Adjustment Level Page 6 29 Hysteresis Cooling Adjustment Level Page 6 29 Control Period Heating Initial Setting Level Page 6 43 Control Period Cooling Initial Setting Level Page 6 43 Control Output 1 and 2 Assignment Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 72 Auxiliary Output 1 to 4 Assignment Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 73 The control must be set to a temperature input LL i Jc ST self tuning standard control and 2 PID control e The ST self tuning function executes tuning from the start of program execution to calculate PID constants matched to the control target When the ST function is in Function operation be sure to turn ON the power supply of the load connected to the control output simultaneously with or before starting E5CC E5EC operation e Auto tuning can be started during self tuning Default IM cuit a Setting range nFF ST function OFF aN ST function ON Setting o Related Parameters see Input Typ
362. t to the MV upper limit e Related Parameters See idus Manual Output Method Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 67 Manual MV Limit Enable Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 77 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 67 6 Parameters Control must be set to 2 PID control If the input type is set for a temperature input either the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter Dp L RT must be set to standard control or if the Standard g or Heating Cooling parameter is set to heating cooling control the Heating Cooling Tuning Method parameter must not be set to air or water cooling This parameter executes robust tuning RT e When AT or ST is executed with RT selected PID constants are automatically set which a make it hard for control performance to degenerate even when control object Function characteristics are changed e Even when hunting occurs for PID constants when AT or ST is executed in normal mode it is less likely to occur when AT or ST is executed in RT mode Default ENE LU I Setting range oN RT function ON aF F RT function OFF Setting Note The Integral Derivative Time Unit parameter changes to 0 1 when the RT Robust Tuning parameter is changed from OFF to ON o Related Parameters See AT Execute Cancel Adjustment Level Page 6 19 Proportional Band Adjustment Level Page 6 27 Integral Time Adjustment Level Page 6 27 Derivative Time Adjustment L
363. taP STOP Specifies STOP status RUN STOP reverse Specifies reversing the RUN STOP operation status operation 100 AT Specifies reversing the 100 AT Execute Cancel status 1 Execute Cancel 40 AT Specifies reversing the 40 AT Execute Cancel status 1 Execute Cancel LAE Alarm Latch Cancel Specifies canceling all alarm latches 2 A M Auto Manual Specifies reversing the Auto Manual status 3 Monitor Setting Item Specifies the monitor setting item display Select the moni tor setting item according to the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters Advanced Function Setting Level Digit Shift Operates as a Digit Shift Key when settings are being changed 1 When AT cancel is specified it means that AT is cancelled regardless of whether the AT currently being executed is 100 AT or 40 AT 2 Alarms 1 to 4 the HB alarm and the HS alarm are cancelled 3 For details on auto manual operations using the PF Key refer to 5 12 Performing Manual Control Note 1 Pressing the PF Key for at least one second executes operation according to the set value However if Digit Shift is set operation will be in less than one second When the Monitor Setting Item parameter is selected however the display is changed in order from Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 each time the key is pressed 2 This function is enabled when PF Key Protect is OFF e Monitor Setting Item Monitor Setting Item 1 Advanced Function Setting Level Setting the P
364. table shows the relationships between the ON OFF status of multi SP number switching bits O to 2 and the set point Multi SP No switching bits Selected set point ele ORE SP 4 OFF OFF ON Note Any bits that are not assigned to event inputs are treated as being OFF sBumes indu uan3 1 p S e Using Key Operations You can select any of the set points 0 to 7 by changing the set value of the Multi SP Uses parameter The Multi SP Uses parameter display conditions are as follows e Controllers without event inputs for which the Number of Multi SP Points parameter is not set to OFF e Controllers with event inputs for which the Number of Multi SP Points parameter is not set to OFF and the Event Input Assignment 1 to 6 parameters are not set to Multi SP switching bits O to 2 The following table shows the relationship between the Multi SP Uses parameter set value and the selected set point Multi SP Selected set point 0 SP 0 1 SP 1 2 SP 2 3 SP 3 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 11 5 Advanced Operations Multi SP Selected set point 4 SP 4 5 SP 5 6 SP 6 7 SP 7 Note The set point can also be switched using communications 5 4 3 Operation Commands Other than Multi SP The following table shows the functions that can be assigned when an Event Input Assignment 1 or 6 parameter is displayed 1 2 it 4 Setting Function NaNE None Star RUN STOP ANLI Auto Manual PRSE Program Start 1
365. tegral Time Press the 4 or Key to set the value to 250 The default settings are as follows e Integral Derivative Time Unit of 1 s 233 e Integral Derivative Time Unit of 0 1 s 233 0 e Setting the Derivative Time 1 Press the Key several times in the Adjustment Level to AUS meno lola display the Derivative Time parameter Derivative Time 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the value to 45 The default settings are as follows e Integral Derivative Time Unit of 1 s 40 e Integral Derivative Time Unit of 0 1 s 40 0 EN Additional Information Proportional Action When PID constants integral time and D derivative time are set to 0 control is executed according to proportional action As the default the center value of the proportional band becomes the set point Related parameter Manual Reset Value Adjustment Level E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation When P Proportional Band Is Adjusted The curve rises gradually and a long stabilization time is created but overshooting is prevented Increased Overshooting and hunting occur but the set value is quickly reached and the temperature stabilizes Decreased It takes a long time to reach the set point It takes time to achieve a stable state but overshooting gt o g D e D 3 2 5 ae Y g O O 5 D F 9 5 7 E o n1 D 5 c D o D c Increased undershooting
366. tents are shown on the No 1 or the No 2 display This section describes how to check error codes on the display and the actions to be taken to remedy the problems mam Lit e Pr gt T Input Error e Meaning The input value has exceeded the control range The input type setting is not correct The sensor is disconnected or shorted The sensor wiring is not correct The sensor is not wired Control Range Resistance thermometer Temperature setting lower limit 20 C to temperature setting upper limit 20 C thermocouple input Temperature setting lower limit 40 F to temperature setting upper limit 40 F ES1B input Same as input indication range Analog input 5 to 105 of scaling range e Action Check the wiring of inputs for miswiring disconnections and short circuits and check the input type If no abnormality is found in the wiring and input type turn the power OFF then back ON again If the display remains the same the Controller must be replaced If the display is restored then the probable cause is electrical noise affecting the control system Check for electrical noise Note With resistance thermometer input a break in the A B or B line is regarded as a disconnection Operation After an error occurs the error is displayed and the alarm outputs function as if the upper limit has been exceeded It will also operate as if transfer output exceeded the upper limit If an input error is as
367. ter short Remote SP Local SP a a ae a ee a IR ER RS 485 RBd s EI E RS485 485 2 for 3 phase heaters A L m 485 see 3 phase E a a 241 313 31 RS 485 6 Pride Rsa Provided Transfer output Provided Provided Provided Provided A EU stands for Engineering Unit EU is used as the minimum unit for engineering units such as C m and g The size of the EU depends on the input type For example when the input temperature setting range is 200 to 1 300 C 1 EU is 1 C and when the input temperature setting range is 20 0 to 500 0 C 1 EU is 0 1 C For analog inputs the size of the EU depends on the decimal point position of the scaling setting and 1 EU is the minimum scaling unit E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 15 Conventions Used in This Manual How to Read Display Symbols The following tables show the correspondence between the symbols displayed on the displays and alphabet characters NN y 4 IN How This Manual is Organized Goal Related sections Contents Learning about the Section 1 Introduction This section shows the appearance and appearance features describes the features functions and model functions and model numbers of the E5CC E5EC numbers of the E5CC E5EC o Setting up the EBCC EBEC Section 2 Preparations This section describes the steps that are required before turning ON the pow
368. ter than the threshold set in the LBA Level parameter and if the control deviation is not reduced by at least the value set in the LBA Detection Band parameter within the LBA detection time e Loop burnout alarms are detected at the following times LBA level casi LBA level ERN eus l l l l l TBA band E Area where ime LBAisnot LBA detection LBA detection LBA detection detected time time time E M M bg Je ke HA _ __ p gt l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l E i 1 2 4 3 4 5 A 6 A 7 A LBA OFF LBA ON LBA OFF LBA ON If the control deviation is reduced in the area between 1 and 2 i e the set point is approached and the amount the control deviation is reduced is at least equal to the LBA band the loop burnout alarm will remain OFF The process value is within the LBA level between 3 and 4 and thus loop burnout alarms will not be detected The loop burnout alarm will remain OFF If the process value is outside the LBA level between 4 and 5 and the control deviation is not reduced by at least the LBA band within the LBA detection time the loop burnout alarm will turn ON If the control deviation is reduced in the area between 5 and 6 i e the set point is approached and the amount the control deviation is reduced is at least equal to the LBA band the loop burnout alarm will turn OFF If the control deviation is reduced in the area between 6 and 7 i e th
369. ting range Default an Enabled af F Disabled oN Setting A parameter mask can be used to hide the displays of parameters that are not needed The parameter mask function is provided by the Setup Tool Setup Tool CX Thermo EST2 2C MV4 P K L P Password to Move to Protect Level This parameter is used to set the password to move to the Protect Level e To prevent setting the password incorrectly the 4 and C Keys or 4 and Keys must be pressed simultaneously to set the password Function a Setting range Default 1999 to 9999 0 Setting E Set this parameter to O when no password is to be set o Related Parameters See Move to Protect Level Protect Level Page 6 3 LA Precautions for Correct Use Protection cannot be cleared or changed without the password Be careful not to forget it If you forget the password contact your OMRON sales representative E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters 6 3 Operation Level Display this level to perform control operations on the ESCC E5EC You can set alarm values monitor the manipulated variable and perform other operations in this level ww m um um um uj mm um um um um um um eee eee ee eee ee eee ESO RS RS eee ee ESO ERO mm Adjustment Level Press the S Key for less than 1 s Ld Press the Press the Key for at Control in progress N pm Key for Ly least 1 s display will flash Control stopped at le
370. tion Level e Display Aa Move to Advanced Function Setting Level and then enter 169 to go to Advanced Function Setting Level Press once to go to the next parameter Hold to go to the previous parameter Hold the key to increment or decrement the value quickly Any changes in settings are applied at the following times e After 3 seconds elapse e When the Key is pressed e When the level is changed with the S Key Press the PP to select the digit to change You can change the PF Setting parameter to assign any of the following functions Press the XP Key for at least 1 second and then specify one of the following functions RUN STOP auto manual autotuning or canceling an alarm latch The PF Key operates as a Digit Shift Key by default Example If you set the PF Setting parameter to STOP operation will stop when you press the PF Key for at least 1 second Press the PF Key once to display the Monitor Setting Item Level The parameter that is displayed is set in the Monitor Setting Item parameters in the Advanced Function Setting Level E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 3 Part Names and Basic Procedures Setup Tool Ports port Top panel Setup Use the E58 CIFQ2 USB Serial Conversion Cable to connect the Tool port E5CC E5EC to the computer i e the CX Thermo Support Software Front panel Setup Use the E58 CIFQ2 USB Serial Conversion Cable and the E58 CIFQ2 E Tool port E5
371. tion and heater short detection cannot be used with the control output for cooling EOD 2u pui Power to heater HS alarm output heating DEE Yes HS alarm ON No normal OFF Ton Toff 4 ot l l l ON Control output heating OFF In the above diagram power is considered to be OFF normal if the leakage current is less than H Lor HAC heater short detection current during the Toff interval The HS alarm will be OFF in this case If the leakage current is greater than 5 or H5r heater short detection current during the Toff interval the HS alarm will turn ON Heater short are not detected if the OFF time Toff for the control output for heating is 100 ms or less 35 ms or less if the control period is 0 1 or 0 2 s Heater shorts are not detected in the following cases e Control will be continued even when there is an HS alarm e The rated current may sometimes differ slightly from the actual current flowing to the heater Use the Leakage Current 1 Value Monitor and Leakage Current 2 Value Monitor parameters to check the leakage current during actual operation Set the HS Alarm Use parameter to ON in the Advanced Function Set ting Level and set the HS Alarm 1 parameter in the Adjustment Level This procedure sets the HS Alarm 1 parameter to 2 5 Operating Procedure e Setting the HS Alarm Use Parameter Advanced Function Setting 1 Press the Key several times in the Advanced
372. tion of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work Bil G Operation Type MAEIKE Work Bit 1 is used by ON OFF Delay Auxiliary Dutput 1 Input A 9 Alarm 1 Input B 20 RUN STOP AE enel i Input C 0 Always OFF y ON OFF 0 0 Input D 0 Always OFF y Time Unit Ir min s AorBorCorD When condition A B C or D is satisfied suonelado 29107 Buisn 2 22 peration of Work Bit 1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work BiL4 e Operation 4 Operation of Work Bit 1 XI Operation Type MEE Work Bit 1 is used by InputA InputB Input C Input D Auxiliary Dutput 1 A and B and C and D 1H MTI a When conditions A B I I Asami 5 MU oun C and D are all B 2o RUN sTOP y ON OFF satisfied 0 0 t 0 Always DFF j E Time Unit D 0 Always OFF y C min s E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 59 5 Advanced Operations 4 Selecting Input Assignments Select the input assignment for the work bit logic operation from the following settings Setting range O Always OFF Always ON 2 ON for one cycle when power is turned ON 3 Event input 1 external input 4 Event input 2 external input 5 Event input 3 external input 6 Event input 4 external input Event input 5 external input 8 Event input 6 external input 9 Alarm 1 10 Alarm 2 11 Alarm
373. to a control action that is proportional to the time derivative of the control action error The proportional control and integral control correct for errors in the control result and thus the control system is late in responding to sudden changes in temperature The derivative action increases the MV in proportion to the slope of the change in the temperature as a corrective action A Parameter Setting range Unit Default Proportional Band Temperature input 0 1to999 9 8 0 m sog A as integral Time Seconds 233 Seconds 2330 Derivative Time Integral Derivative Time Unit of 1s O to 9999 40 Integral Derivative Time Unit of 0 1 s 0 0 to 999 9 Seconds 40 0 The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral Derivative Time Unit parameter The Proportional Band Integral Time and Derivative Time parameters are initialized if the Integral Derivative Time Unit parameter is changed e Related Parameters es AT Execute Cancel Adjustment Level Page 6 19 Integral Derivative Time Unit Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 60 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 27 T I gt amp c m 3 D 5 F r O lt o 6 Parameters L P Proportional Band Cooling ad The control must be set to heating cooling control LOL Integral Time Cooling and 2 PID control L d Derivative Time Cooling These parameters set the PID constants for cooling control These parameters
374. to the upper or lower limit The RSP indicator will flash in Remote SP Mode and the Remote SP Monitor will flash on the No 2 display in any SP Mode e When you use the remote SP input value as the control SP it is restricted by the set point upper limit and the set point lower limit E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 55 5 Advanced Operations Remote SP Input of 4 to 20 mA RSP Remote SP upper limit 10 et oo OT Remote SP upper limit m Ss Remote SP lower limit p Remote SP lower limit 10 CILE s s2 55 Input mA 4 0 20 0 2 4 10 21 6 110 e SP Mode The SP mode is used to switch between local SP and remote SP When a remote SP is selected in SP mode the RSP single indicator will light e Remote SP Monitor e You can check the remote SP input value in the Remote SP Monitor parameter Adjustment Level e f a remote SP is selected for the SP Mode parameter the remote SP input value will be displayed as the SP in PV SP displays This remote SP input value will be restricted as the control SP by the set point upper limit and the set point lower limit e SP Tracking e f the SP tracking function is enabled the local SP inherits the remote SP value after switching from remote SP to local SP To enable the SP tracking function set the SP Tracking parameter to ON e SP tracking operates as follows SP mode LSP RSP LSP 1 Switching to remote SP
375. trol output 2 idi Standard Heating cooling Standard Heating cooling Control Output 1 Control output Control output Control output Control output Control Output 2 Not assigned Control output Auxiliary Output 1 Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Assignment Auxiliary Output 2 Alarm 2 Control output Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Auxiliary Output 3 Alarm 3 Alarm 3 Alarm 3 Alarm 3 Controllers with Four Auxiliary Outputs Para metermames Diesla Without control output 2 With control output 2 ies Standard Heating cooling Standard Heating cooling Control Output 1 Control output Control output Control output Control output Control Output 2 Not assigned Control output Auxiliary Output 1 Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Auxiliary Output 2 Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Assignment Auxiliary Output 3 Alarm 3 Alarm 3 Alarm 3 Alarm 3 Assignment Auxiliary Output 4 Alarm 4 Control output Alarm 4 Alarm 4 If the Controller is equipped with HB HS alarm detection it is set by default to detect heater alarms HA Therefore the alarm 1 function is disabled and the Alarm 1 Type is not displayed To enable alarm 1 set an output assignment to alarm 1 If the Program Pattern parameter is changed to a setting other than OFF Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter is set as the program end output Alarms It will be specified in this section when an alarm must be assigned i e when an alarm must be set for the Control Output 1 or 2 Assignment parameters or for t
376. ts Communications Setting Level Page 6 84 The ST parameter must be set to OFF and the Remote SP Enable parameter must be set to ON al Md SP Mode The Event Input Assignment 1 to Event Input Assignment 6 parameters must not be set to change the SP mode This parameter sets the SP mode In Local SP Mode the local SP that is set inside the Dig ital Controller is used as the SP In Remote SP Mode the remote SP that is specified with Function an external signal e g 4 to 20 mA is used as the SP Setting range Default LSP Local SP and RSP Remote SP LSP e Related Parameters Ses Remote SP Enable Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 75 6 20 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters HB and HS alarms must be supported E peste CHER iD SONO MOHIROE The HB ON OFF parameter must be set to ON This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting heater burnout This parameter measures and displays the heater current value e Heater burnout is not detected if the ON time for the control output for heating is 100 ms Function or less 30 ms or less if the control period is 0 1 or 0 2 s L Monitor range Unit 0 0 to 55 0 A Monitor Z e rrrr is displayed when 55 0 A is exceeded e f an alarm is output for the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter the No 1 display will flash the Heater Current 1 Value Monitor parameter e Related Parameters See Heater
377. ts and operation combining the AND OR logic E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 57 T N N r O e o O o O D ct O 5 D ouueu 1 X9 uonoun J uoneiado 21601 ay L Zz S 5 Advanced Operations e Making the Settings The following display will appear on the Logic Operation Editor Setting Window Set each of the pa rameters A ox Import of Library Help H Close lt Operation of Work Bit 1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work Bil Work Bit 1 is used by Auxiliary Output 1 Work Bit 1 S Alarm 1 20 RUN STOP Control Output Assignment Control Dutput 1 Control output heating v Input A Input B Control Output 2 No assignment v Operation Type ON OFF Delay Input C Input D 1 E 14 y y Time Unit D Always OFF vi O Always OFF Y C mn s Event Input Data Event Input Assignment Internal Event 1 1 E vent input 1 external input None Internal E vent 2 2 E vent input 2 external input None Internal Event 3 3E vent input 3 external input None y Auxiliary Output Assignment v Auxiliary Output 1 Work bit 1 Auxiliary Output 2 Alarm 2 y Internal Event 4 4 Event input 4 external input None Internal Event 5 5 E vent input 5 external input None Aux
378. ual H174 2 Preparations 2 1 3 Mounting e E5CC There are two models of Terminal Covers that you can use with the E5CC Adapter E53 COV23 Terminal Cover Y 5 o pu D et O 5 E53 COV17 Terminal Cover Adapter Sold separately lt gt m Bununow L 2 The Terminal Cover is provided only with the following models E5CC LILILILISM LILIL Waterproof packing Panel Y Mounting to the Panel 1 For waterproof mounting waterproof packing must be installed on the Controller Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers Waterproof packing is not necessary when there is no need for the waterproofing function Insert the E5CC into the mounting hole in the panel Push the adapter from the terminals up to the panel and temporarily fasten the E5CC e Y Tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter Alternately tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a balance Tighten the screws to a torque of 0 29 to 0 39 N m E Mounting the Terminal Cover Slightly bend the E53 COV23 Terminal Cover to attach it to the terminal block as shown in the following diagram The Terminal Cover cannot be attached in the opposite direction Or you can use the E53 COV17 Terminal Cover Make sure that the UP mark is facing up and then attach the E53 COV17 Terminal Cover to the holes on the top and bottom of the Digital Controller e E53 COV17 e E53 COV23 JI
379. uct y To CT input b Star connecting lines Refer to the following diagram for CT installation positions Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered so be sure to take that into account when setting the detection current Load such as a heater Product To CT input Product To CT input c V connecting lines Refer to the following diagram for CT installation positions Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered so be sure to take that into account when setting the detection current Product To CT input Load such as a heater AC line CT Product To CT input E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation 4 12 4 Calculating Detection Current Values Calculate the set value using the following equation Normal current value Burnout current value Heater Burnout Detection 1 2 set value 7 Leakage current value output OFF HS current value 2 e To set the current for heater burnout when two or more heaters are connected through the CT use the value from when the heater with the smallest current burns out If all of the heaters have the same current use the value from when any one of them burns out Example Set value of Heater Burnout Detection 1 or 2 parameter Normal current value x Number of loops Burnout current value 2 e Make sure that the following conditions are satisfied Heater with
380. upper limit alarm or an MV absolute value lower limit alarm This parameter is initialized to 50 0 50 if a non MV alarm is changed to an MV alarm This parameter is initialized to 2 0 2 C or 0 02 FS if an MV alarm is changed to a non MV alarm Write to both so that the SP and the currently selected Multi SP SPO to SP7 match When the ST condition is met the SP Mode parameter is initialized to LSP and the Remote SP Enable parameter is initialized to OFF Initialized to 0 8 when the temperature unit is C and to 1 4 when the temperature unit is F These parameters are initialized as follows e Integral Derivative Time Unit of 1 s Proportional band to 8 0 integral time to 233 and derivative time to 40 This applies to both the heating and cooling constants e Integral Derivative Time Unit of 0 1 s Proportional band to 8 0 integral time to 233 0 and derivative time to 40 0 This applies to both the heating and cooling constants E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A 29 o U y e 3 D mp D O o O 9 et O 5 r 0 mp 0 A Appendices A 7 Sensor Input Setting Range Indication Range Control Range AAN AA Resistance Pt100 O 200to850 C 300 to 1500 220 to 870 C 340 to 1540 F thermometer 199 9 to 500 0 C 199 9 to ETC 199 9 to 520 0 C 199 9 to 940 0 F 20 0 to 120 0 Cy 40 0 to 250 0 F JPt100 199 9 to 500 0 C 199 9 to 900 0 F
381. ure Ng a pepe fe ps MM LBA band MV 100 LBA detection time Tm x 2 Time 3 Set the LBA Detection Time parameter to two times the measured time e LBA Level e Set the control deviation when the control loop is working properly e The default is 8 0 C F for Controllers with Temperature Inputs and 10 00 FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 29 5 Advanced Operations e LBA Band e There is assumed to be an error in the control loop and the alarm output turns ON if the control deviation is greater than the threshold set in the LBA Level parameter and if the control deviation does not change by at least the value set in the LBA Band parameter e The default is 3 0 C F for Controllers with Temperature Inputs and 0 20 FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs The LBA is used The related parameters are as follows LBA Detection Time 10 LBA Level 8 0 LBA Band 3 0 Operating Procedure e Setting the LBA Press the Key several times in the Initial Setting Level to ia Setting Level display AL Alarm 1 Type Alarm 1 Type 2 Press the 4 or Key to select LBA The default is 2 upper limit e Setting the LBA Detection Time Advanced Function Setting 1 Press the Key several times in the Advanced Function Set tevel ting Level to display L bA LBA Detection Time LBA Detection Time 2 Press th
382. ure Controllers User s Manual H174 A Appendices e HB and HS Alarms E5CC E5EC Models with HB and HS Alarms Max heater current 50 A AC Input current readout 5 FS 1 digit max accuracy 0 1 to 49 9 A 0 1 A units Henero noian 0 0 A Heater burnout alarm output turns OFF 50 0 A Heater burnout alarm output turns ON SEUIngitange Min detection ON time 30 ms for a control period of 0 1 s or 0 2 s 100 ms for a control period of 0 5 s or 1 to 99 s 0 1 to 49 9 A 0 1 A units Beater shor alam 0 0 A Heater short alarm output turns ON 50 0 A Heater short alarm output turns OFF SAME Ch Gls Min detection OFF time 35 ms for a control period of 0 1 s or 0 2 s 100 ms for a control period of 0 5 s or 1 to 99 s di HB alarms are not detected and the heater power is not measured if the ON time for the control output for heating is 100 ms or less 30 ms or less if the control period is 0 1 or 0 2 s 2 HS alarms are not detected and the leakage power is not measured if the ON time for the control output for heating is 100 ms or less 35 ms or less if the control period is 0 1 or 0 2 s P sb o o O O zh O e et O 5 0 sBuney L L V E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 A 3 A Appendices A 1 2 Characteristics Indication accuracy ambient temperature of 23 C Temperature variation influence 2 Voltage variation influence Hysteresis Proportional band P Integral time
383. utput Advanced Function Setting 1 Press the e Key several times in the Advanced Function Set Level ting Level to display 5i b2 Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment 2 Press the 4 or Key to select AL M Integrated Alarm The default is AL Me Alarm 2 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 Advanced Operations e Setting the Integrated Alarm Assignment Parameter Advanced Function Setting 1 Press the Key several times in the Advanced Function Set vun ting Level to display HL MA Integrated Alarm Assignment ri ri ME UL Fi Integrated Alarm no Assignment 12 2 Press the 4 or Key to set the set value to 17 i e the sum T of 1 for alarm 1 and 16 for the HB alarm FILI NI The default is 49 Alarm 1 1 HB alarm 16 HS Alarm 32 49 EN Additional Information For details on the integrated alarm refer to Section 6 Parameters rh Ko O JJ O c mp Lo c mp O gt fo 3 o wey pajelbaju L 6 G E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 5 25 5 Advanced Operations 5 10 Alarm Delays 5 10 1 Alarm Delays e Delays can be set for the alarm outputs ON and OFF delays can be set separately for alarms 1 2 3 and 4 The ON and OFF delays for alarms 1 2 3 and 4 also apply to the individual SUB1 SUB2 SUB3 and SUB4 indicators and to communications status The alarm ON delays
384. utput 1 Signal Control Output 2 Signal Transfer Output Signal Transfer Output Type Transfer Output Upper Limit Transfer Output Lower Limit Event Input Assignment 1 Event Input Assignment 2 Setting monitor value Display Default Unit Temperature input 0 1 to 999 9 for all alarms except 0 2 C or F for MV absolute value upper limit or MV lower limit alarms Analog input 0 01 to 99 99 for all alarms except for 0 02 FS MV absolute value upper limit or MV lower limit alarms 0 01 to 99 99 for MV absolute value upper limit or MV lower limit alarms pe Same as Alarm 1 Type except that 12 LBA cannot None be set Temperature input 0 1 to 999 9 for all alarms except 2 C or F for MV absolute value upper limit or MV lower limit alarms Analog input 0 01 to 99 99 for all alarms except for 0 02 FS MV absolute value upper limit or MV lower limit alarms 0 01 to 99 99 for MV absolute value upper limit or MV lower limit alarms Pe oe as Alarm 1 Type except that 12 LBA cannot None m set Temperature input 0 1 to 999 9 for all alarms except C or F for MV absolute value upper limit or MV lower limit alarms Analog input 0 01 to 99 99 for all alarms except for MV absolute value upper limit or MV lower limit alarms FS 0 01 to 99 99 for MV absolute value upper limit or MV lower limit alarms 4 20 4 20 mA 0 20 0 20 mA 4 20 4 20 mA 0 20 0 20 mA 4 20 4 20 mA 5 1 5V 1
385. vel Function Setting range Unt Default 1030 Ir Cold Junction Compensation Input type must be thermocouple or infrared e Method temperature sensor e This parameter specifies whether cold junction compensation is to be performed internally by the Controller or to be performed externally when the input type setting is 5 Function to 24 e The cold junction compensation external setting is enabled when the temperature difference is measured using two thermocouples or two ES1B Sensors Default IM CUIN a Setting range aN Internally aF F Externally Setting e Related Parameters See Input Type Initial Setting Level Page 6 39 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters Alarm 1 must be assigned and the alarm 1 type must not be 0 12 or 13 L1 n w gt 3 N Alarm 1 ON Delay Alarm 2 must be assigned and the alarm 2 type must not be 0 12 or 13 Ci Dur nf NEO N Alarm 2 ON Delay Alarm 3 must be assigned and the alarm 3 type must not be 0 12 or 13 H j an Alarm 3 ON Delay Alarm 4 must be assigned and the alarm 4 type must not be 0 12 or 13 A dan Alarm 4 ON Delay The alarm 1 2 3 or 4 output is prevented from turning ON until after the delay times set in these parameters have elapsed e Set the time for which the ON delay is to be enabled e To disable the ON delay set 0 Function Setting range Unit Default 00 999
386. vent setting incorrect set points The upper and lower limit values of the set point limiter are set using the Set Point Upper Limit and Set Point Lower Limit parameters in the Initial Setting Level If the set point is not within the range set for the set point limiter as the result of changes to the Set Point Upper Limit or Set Point Lower Limit parameter the set point will automatically be changed to a value within the set range When the set point limiter is reset the set point is forcibly changed to the upper or lower limit value of the set point limiter if the set point is out of the limiter range Also when the input type and the temperature unit scaling upper limit value or lower limit value are changed the set point limiter is forc ibly reset to the input setting range or the scaling upper or lower limit value Input setting range i Before being changed by the limiter Se MEE E Set point 7 al o O zi 5 Q mp gt O o U c o o O D 5 o rr O O r 3 mp S c 0 gt Upper limit value changed B 22 x Cannot be set Y Upper limit value changed Set point A C Input type changed AAA Set point A Set point Y Upper lower limit values B V Sensor upper lower limit values O Can be set Parameters Set Point Upper Limit To limit the SP setting Initial Setting Level Set Point Lower Limit To limit the SP setting Initial Setting Level JOP 1utog JOS L G G e
387. vice life will decrease In such a case use forced cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the Digital Controllers When providing forced cooling however be careful not to cool down the terminals sections alone to avoid measurement errors Ambient Noise To avoid inductive noise keep the wiring for the Digital Controller s terminal block wiring away from power cables carrying high voltages or large currents Also do not wire power lines together with or parallel to Digital Controller wiring Using shielded cables and using separate conduits or ducts is recommended Attach a surge suppressor or noise filter to peripheral devices that generate noise in particular motors transformers solenoids magnetic coils or other equipment that have an inductance compo nent When a noise filter is used at the power supply first check the voltage or current and attach the noise filter as close as possible to the Digital Controller Allow as much space as possible between the Digital Controller and devices that generate powerful high frequencies high frequency welders high frequency sewing machines etc or surge Ensuring Measurement Accuracy When extending or connecting the thermocouple lead wire be sure to use compensating wires that match the thermocouple types When extending or connecting the lead wire of the platinum resistance thermometer be sure to use wires that have low resistance and keep the resistance of the thr
388. wide range e When there are large variations in ambient temperatures due to factors such as seasonal changes or differences between day and night temperatures e When there are large variations in ambient wind conditions and air flow e When heater characteristics change depending on the temperature e When an actuator with disproportional I O such as a phase control type power regulator is used e When a rapidly heating heater is used e When the control object or sensor has much loss time e When hunting occurs in normal mode for any reason PID constants are initialized to the factory settings by switching to RT mode When the RT mode is selected the Integral Derivative Time Unit pa rameter changes to O 1 s 4 26 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 4 Basic Operation eo RT Features e Even when hunting occurs for PID constants when AT or ST is executed in normal mode it is less likely to occur when AT or ST is executed in RT mode Temperature l Temperature Much hunting occurs Hunting is reduced Set value 5 A A Start of control Time Start of control e When the temperature PV falls short of the set point for the PID constants when using AT or ST in normal mode executing AT or ST in RT mode tends to improve performance Set value Time OU O D 3 2 3 aq y Jg O O 3 o F fo 3 gu 0 E p m fo 3 c D o O F c 3 Temperature Temperature Set v
389. will also function when power is turned ON or when moving from the Initial Setting Level to Operation Level e g to software resets All outputs will turn OFF and the OFF delays will not function when moving to the Initial Setting Level or when an alarm is output for an A D converter error Operation of Alarm ON and OFF Delays for an Upper limit Alarm PV Alarm hysteresis Alarm setting ON delay set I I l l gine gt OFF delay set Alarm status time gt I I I I l l Alarm Latch OFF i ON delay set time l l Alarm will not turn ON e The alarm will not turn ON if the time that the alarm is ON is equal to or less than the ON delay set time Also the alarm will not turn OFF if the time that the alarm is OFF is equal to or less than the OFF delay set time e f an alarm turns OFF and then back ON during the ON delay time the time will be remeasured from the last time the alarm turns ON Also if an alarm turns ON and then back OFF during the OFF delay time the time will be remeasured from the last time the alarm turns OFF o Parameters Related to Alarm Delays Parameter name Level Alarm 1 ON Delay HioM Oto999 Alarm 2 ON Delay Acow 010999 8 Alarm 3 ON Delay RJ N 009999 Alarm 4 ON Delay AHON O to 999 s Advanced Function Alarm 1 OFF Delay AiaF 0to999 s Setting Level Alarm 2 OFF Delay Hebr 0t0999 Alarm 3 OFF Delay AJF 0t0999 Alarm 4 OFF Delay ASF 0t0
390. work bit logic operation is ON the work bit is turned ON after the Function time specified in the parameter elapses e OFF Delay When the results of a work bit logic operation is OFF the work bit is turned OFF after the time specified in the parameter elapses Setting range Unit Default KEL Setting o Related Parameters See Auxiliary Output 1 to 4 Assignment Advanced Function Setting Level Page 6 73 E5CC E5EC Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual H174 6 Parameters 6 5 Monitor Setting Item Level Monitor setting items can be displayed by means of the function key when the PF Setting parameter Advanced Function Setting Level is set to PFDP Monitor Setting Item YES Pet s sss esses sees om oom oom oom om om m mp mom Gm mom momo Ee Press the C Key L for less than 1 s a gt o ss Monitor Setting Key Item Level Control in progress The PF Setting parameter must be set to PFDP and d l to 5 Monitor Setting Item Display 1 to 5 the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters must not be set to OFF e When the PF Key is set to display monitor setting items pressing the PF Key will display in order the contents of the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters The contents of these parameters are shown in the following table For the setting monitor ranges refer to the applicable parameters vid on O 5 O o D 5 ae D 3 r D lt o Set Remarks value Monitor

1 Press

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents